advertisement
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
For safety and security
Vehicle status information and indicators
Before driving
Driving
Interior features
Maintenance and care
When trouble arises
Vehicle specifications
For owners
Index
Make sure to read through them
(Main topics: Child seat, theft deterrent system)
1
Reading driving-related information
(Main topics: Meters, multi-information display)
Opening and closing the doors and windows, adjustment before driving
(Main topics: Keys, doors, seats)
Operations and advice which are necessary for driving
(Main topics: Starting engine, refueling)
2
3
4
Usage of the interior features
(Main topics: Air conditioner, storage features)
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
(Main topics: Interior and exterior, light bulbs)
What to do in case of malfunction and emergency
(Main topics: Battery discharge, flat tire)
Vehicle specifications, customizable features
(Main topics: Fuel, oil, tire inflation pressure)
5
6
7
8
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, seat belt and
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
For your information ......................................
Reading this manual....................................
How to search .................................................
Pictorial index .................................................
1
For safety and security
1-1. For safe use
Before driving....................................
For safe driving..................................
Seat belts .............................................
SRS airbags ........................................
Pop Up Hood ...................................
Front passenger occupant classification system .................................
Exhaust gas precautions ..............
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children........................
Child restraint systems .................
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system.........
Alarm....................................................
2
Vehicle status information and indicators
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators....
Gauges and meters (except F
SPORT models) ...........................
Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)..............................................
Multi-information display.............
Head-up display ..............................
Fuel consumption information...
3
Before driving
3-1. Key information
Keys.......................................................
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors ....................................................
Trunk ..................................................
Smart access system with push-button start ..........................................
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats..........................................
Power rear seat ..............................
Driving position memory............
Rear seat position memory.........
Head restraints ...............................
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ...............................
Inside rear view mirror ...............
Outside rear view mirrors..........
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows .............................
Moon roof.........................................
Panoramic moon roof..................
4
Driving
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle........................
Cargo and luggage......................
Vehicle load limits.........................
Trailer towing..................................
Dinghy towing ................................
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ..............
Automatic transmission..............
Turn signal lever.............................
Parking brake .................................
Brake Hold.......................................
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch............................
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
............................................................
Windshield wipers and washer
............................................................
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap.........
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+A..............
Lexus Safety System+ .................
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A)
...........................................................
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+)
............................................................
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
............................................................
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).........
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) .....
RSA (Road Sign Assist).............
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range..........................
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) ........
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
...........................................................
Intuitive parking assist ................
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function..........................................
TABLE OF CONTENTS
RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function..........................................
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
............................................................
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects).............................
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) .........
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) .....................
Driving mode select switch .....
Electronically modulated air sus-
pension............................................
Driving assist systems ................
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.......................
5
Interior features
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Remote Touch...............................
Center Display..............................
Rear Multi Operation Panel ...
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge...........
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning system.............................................
Rear air conditioning system...
Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators...................
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ...........................
5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features ..............
Trunk features ...............................
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5-6. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ..............
Garage door opener..................
Lexus Enform Safety Connect
...........................................................
6
Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior...................................
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior ....................................
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements .....
General maintenance................
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ............
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
...........................................................
Hood..................................................
Positioning a floor jack...............
Engine compartment..................
Battery ..............................................
Tires ...................................................
Replacing the tire.........................
Tire inflation pressure.................
Wheels...............................................
Air conditioning filter..................
Electronic key battery................
Checking and replacing fuses
...........................................................
Light bulbs.......................................
7
When trouble arises
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers .....................
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency .............................
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
............................................................
If you think something is wrong
...........................................................
Fuel pump shut off system..........
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds......................
If a warning message is displayed
..........................................................
If you have a flat tire ....................
If the engine will not start ..........
If you lose your keys....................
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened ..........................................
If the electronic key does not operate properly.................................
If the vehicle battery is discharged
..........................................................
If your vehicle overheats...........
If the vehicle becomes stuck ...
8
Vehicle specifications
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) .................................................
Fuel information............................
Tire information ............................
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-2. Customization
Customizable features...............
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ...........................
9
For owners
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ...........................................
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)....................
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)..........
Index
What to do if... (Troubleshooting) ...
...........................................................
Alphabetical Index.......................
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
6
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
age they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products.
Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any dam-
Multiport fuel injection sys-
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as: tem/sequential multiport fuel injection system
Lexus Safety System+A
Lexus Safety System+
Anti-lock brake system
Vehicle dynamics integrated management
SRS airbag system
Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Vehicle data recordings
Your Lexus is equipped with several
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:
Engine speed
Accelerator status
Brake status
Vehicle speed
Shift position
Images from the camera sensor
(available only in situations when sudden inputs occur while driving
[sudden acceleration, etc.], the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating, the Parking Support
Brake function [static objects] was operating, or your vehicle was involved in a collision)
The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.
Data Transmission
Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Lexus without notification to you.
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Usage of data collected through
Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)
If your Lexus has Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please refer to the Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information on data collected and its usage.
To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by
Lexus, please visit www.lexus.com/privacyvts/.
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Disclosure of the EDR data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner
(or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
However, if necessary, Lexus may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner devices and Pop Up Hood system in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags, seat belt pretensioners and
Pop Up Hood micro gas generators left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag, seat belt pretensioner and Pop Up Hood micro gas generators removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, Pop Up Hood system, and wireless remote control batteries.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
10
Reading this manual
Explains symbols used in this manual.
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings
WARNING:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in numerical order.
Symbols in illustrations
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the action
(pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Symbols Meanings
Indicates the component or position being explained.
Means Do not , Do not do this , or Do not let this happen .
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
How to search
■ Searching by name
Alphabetical index: →
■ Searching by installation position
Pictorial index: →
■ Searching by symptom or sound
What to do if... (Troubleshooting):
→
■ Searching by title
Table of contents: → P.2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
11
12
Pictorial index
Pictorial index
■
Exterior
A
B
C
D
Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key................................................P.436
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Pictorial index
13
E
F
G
To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) *
...................................................P.317
Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system..............................................P.386
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
H
I
J
K
Stop lights
L
M
Back-up lights
N
* : If equipped
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
14
Pictorial index
■
Instrument panel
A
B
C
D
E
Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light............ P.69, 71, 72, 75
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Pictorial index
15
F
G
Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights............................P.175
H
I
J
K
L
Audio system *
M
N
* : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
16
Pictorial index
■
Switches
C
D
A
B
E
HUD (Head-up display) switch
Camera switch
*1, 2
*1
......................................................................... P.83
F
G
H
*1
: If equipped
*2
: Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Pictorial index
17
A
B
C
D
E
F
Rear door sunshade switches *
...........................................................................P.346
* : If equipped
A
B
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
18
Pictorial index
C
D
Phone switch *1
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) switch *2
...................................................................P.221
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch *2
................................................................P.231
E
F
G Audio remote control switches *1
H Talk switch *1
*1 : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2 : If equipped
A Remote Touch *1
B
C
Rear sunshade switch
*2
.......................................................................................P.347
Vehicle height adjustment switch *2
..................................................................P.291
D
E
*1 : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
*2 : If equipped
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Pictorial index
19
■
Interior
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K Rear Multi Operation Panel *1
.......................................................................... P.308
L Rear seat entertainment system
*1 : If equipped
*1, 2
*2 : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
20
Pictorial index
■
Ceiling
A Moon roof switches *
..............................................................................................P.142
Panoramic moon roof switches *
.........................................................................P.144
D
E
B
C
“SOS” button
*
H
I
F
G
J
*
: If equipped
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
For safety and security
1
.
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.................................
For safe driving..............................
Seat belts ..........................................
SRS airbags ....................................
Pop Up Hood ................................
Front passenger occupant classification system ..............................
Exhaust gas precautions ...........
1-2. Child safety
Riding with children.....................
Child restraint systems ..............
1-3. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system......
Alarm.................................................
21
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
22
1-1.For safe use
1-1. For safe use
Before driving
Observe the following before starting off in the vehicle to ensure safety of driving.
Installing floor mats
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.
1 Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eyelets.
2 Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.
Always align the marks A .
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.
● With the engine stopped and the shift position in P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
For safe driving
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1-1. For safe use
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving and take a break immediately.
23
1
A
B
C
D
Adjust the angle of the seatback so that you are sitting straight up and so that you do not have to lean forward to steer. ( →
Adjust the seat so that you can depress the pedals fully and so that your arms bend slightly at the elbow when gripping the steering wheel. (
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears.
( →
Wear the seat belt correctly.
( →
WARNING
■ For safe driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
Correct use of the seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. (
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (
Adjusting the mirrors
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside rear view mirrors properly.
(
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
24
1-1. For safe use
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at once, including children.
● Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( →
Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants, extending the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. ( →
■ When children are in the vehicle
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
Correct use of the seat belts
Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.
1-1. For safe use
25
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. ( →
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. ( →
■ Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.
Adjust the position of the seatback.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat.
Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
WARNING
■ Using a seat belt extender
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
26
1-1. For safe use
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Easy Access Buckle (front seats)
*
The front seat belt buckles move outward automatically for easier access.
When entering the vehicle
When a front door is opened, the seat belt buckle for the corresponding seat will move outward automatically. The buckle will retract automatically after the plate is inserted and locked to the buckle.
When exiting the vehicle (driver’s seat only)
If the engine switch is turned off when the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the driver’s seat belt buckle will move outward. The buckle will retract automatically when the driver’s seat belt is released.
* : If equipped
1 To fasten the seat belt, push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.
2 To release the seat belt, press the
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull the belt and release it.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more.
( →
■ Easy Access Buckle
● If the seat belt buckle is not latched when it is in the outward position, it will return to its original position after a certain amount of time.
● If an occupant exits the vehicle and leaves the front door open and then enters the vehicle again, the seat belt buckle will not operate until the door is closed and then opened again.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front seats)
1-1. For safe use
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)
27
1
1 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor down while pressing the release
2 Push the seat belt shoulder anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.
WARNING
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
The pretensioners help the seat belts to quickly restrain the occupants by retracting the seat belts when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle rollover.
The pretensioners do not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a minor side impact or a rear impact.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
WARNING
■ Seat belt pretensioners
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
28
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the
SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your
Lexus dealer.
Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function (front seats of vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)
When the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher, the seat belts will retract slightly to remove any slack.
If the system determines that a collision is unavoidable, the front seat belts will retract before the collision. ( →
■ Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function
A motor sound may be heard when a front seat belt is released or a front door is opened. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
29
SRS airbag system
■ Location of the SRS airbags
1
SRS front airbags
A
C
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components
B SRS knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection
SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS front side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
D
E
SRS rear side airbags
Can help protect the torso of occupants in the rear outer seats
SRS curtain shield airbags
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
30
1-1. For safe use
• Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer seats
• Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in the event of vehicle rollover
F SRS seat cushion airbags (if equipped)
Can help restrain the power rear seat occupants
■ SRS airbag system components
A Front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors)
D
E
B
C
F
Side impact sensors (front door)
Knee airbags
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
J
I
G
H
K
Front side airbags
Side impact sensors (front)
SRS warning light
Rear side airbags
Seat belt pretensioners
N
O
L
M
P
Driver airbag
Seat cushion airbags (if equipped)
Rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped)
Side impact sensors (rear)
Driver’s seat position sensor
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
31
Q Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
R Airbag sensor assembly
S Front impact sensors
T Pop Up Hood computer assembly
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
● The emergency flashers will be turned on automatically. ( →
● For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if any of the following situations occur, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location
(without needing to push the “SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the necessary emergency services.
(
• An SRS airbag is deployed.
• A seat belt pretensioner is activated.
• The vehicle is involved in a severe rear-end collision.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)
● The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:
• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact
• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the front of the vehicle underrides, or goes under, the bed of a truck
● The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
● The SRS seat cushion airbags on the rear seat will not operate if the occupant is not wearing a seat belt.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
● The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
32
1-1. For safe use of force corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately
3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 -
30 km/h]).
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may deploy in the event of a severe side collision.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.
● Both SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe frontal collision.
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision
The SRS front airbags, SRS curtain shield airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags/SRS seat cushion airbags)
The SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags and SRS seat cushion airbags may occur.
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustration.
● The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.
● The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment
● Collision from the side at an angle
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
33 that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS front airbags and SRS cushion airbags to inflate.
The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
● A portion of a door or its surrounding area is damaged, deformed or has had a hole made in it, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
1
The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.
● Collision from the rear
● Pitching end over end
● The pad section of the steering wheel, dashboard near the front passenger airbag or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
■ When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident
● Vehicles with power rear seat: The seat cushion surface is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
34
1-1. For safe use
● The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
WARNING
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.
● If the seat belt extender has been connected to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front airbags will judge that the driver and front passenger are wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the SRS front airbags may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of a collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
●
1-1. For safe use seriously injured by a deploying airbag.
An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. ( →
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.
35
1
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
36
1-1. For safe use
WARNING
● Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield, side windows, front or rear pillar, roof side rail and assist grip.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seats toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad and lower portion of the instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when the SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.
● Do not hang coat hangers or hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy.
● If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components or the front doors. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the
SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so.
Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger may not deploy in the event of a collision.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars, roof side rails, front door panels, front door trims or front door speakers
● Modifications to the front door panel
(such as making a hole in it)
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or roof luggage carrier
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players
1-1. For safe use
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
37
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
38
1-1. For safe use
Pop Up Hood
In the event of a frontal collision with a body, such as a pedestrian, the Pop Up Hood system raises the hood to reduce the possibility of a serious impact to the pedestrian’s head area by adding clearance to the engine compartment.
When the sensors located at the back of the front bumper detect a frontal impact with a body, such as a pedestrian, which meets or exceeds the threshold level while the vehicle is being driven within the operational speed range, the system operates.
System components
A
B
C
Sensors
Hood
Lifters
■ Pop Up Hood precautions
● Before scrapping your vehicle, make sure to contact your Lexus dealer.
● The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated. Have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.
■ Pop Up Hood operational conditions
The Pop Up Hood will operate when the vehicle detects an impact such as the following:
● The front bumper detects a frontal impact equivalent to or greater than that of a pedestrian while the vehicle being driven within the operational speed range of approximately 16 to 34 mph (25 to 55 km/h). (The system is operated by an impact of threshold level or greater, even in the case of a minor collision that may not leave a trace on the front bumper.
Also, depending on the impact conditions or vehicle speed, the system may operate by a collision with a light or small object or a small animal.)
● In other situations, such as the following the system may operate when an impact is applied to the lower part of the vehicle or front bumper:
• Colliding with a curb
• Falling into a deep hole
• Landing hard
• Hitting the slope of a parking lot, an undulating road, a protruding object or falling object
■ Conditions under which the Pop Up
Hood may not operate properly
● If a pedestrian collides with the right or left corner of the front bumper or the side of the vehicle. As such impacts may be difficult to detect, the system may not operate.
● If the vehicle speed is not detected correctly, such as if the vehicle is sliding sideways, the system may not operate properly.
■ Conditions under which the Pop Up
Hood will not operate
The Pop Up Hood will not operate in the following situations:
● Colliding with a lying person
● A frontal impact applied to the front bumper while driving at speeds outside of the operational speed range
● A side impact or rear impact
● A vehicle rollover (In some accident situations, the Pop Up Hood may operate.)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ When the Pop Up Hood is operated
● Do not pull the hood lock release lever.
Doing so after the Pop Up Hood has operated will further raise the hood and may cause an injury. Do not drive with the hood raised, as doing so may block the driver’s vision, possibly causing an accident.
● Do not forcibly push down the hood.
As the popped up hood cannot be lowered by hand, doing so may deform the hood or cause an injury.
● If the Pop Up Hood has operated, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer. If the
Pop Up Hood has operated, stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not touch the lifters immediately after the Pop Up Hood has operated, as the lifters may be hot and burn you.
NOTICE
■ Pop Up Hood precautions
● Make sure to close the hood before driving, as the system may not operate properly if the hood is not fully closed.
● Make sure that all 4 tires are of the specified size and inflated to the specified tire pressure. If tires of a different size are used, the system may not operate properly.
● If something has hit the area around the front bumper, the sensors may be damaged even if the Pop Up Hood has not operated. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not remove or repair the parts or wiring of the Pop Up Hood, as doing so may cause accidental operation or prevent the system from operating properly. If repair or replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
1-1. For safe use
● Do not remove such components as the front bumper, hood or suspension, or replace them with non-genuine parts, as doing so may prevent the system from operating properly.
● Do not install anything to the front bumper or hood, as doing so may prevent the sensors from detecting an impact correctly and prevent the system from operating properly.
● Do not close the hood with force or apply load to the lifters, as doing so may damage the lifters and prevent the system from operating properly.
● Do not modify the suspension, as changes made to the vehicle height may prevent the system from operating properly.
39
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
40
1-1. For safe use
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system.
This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the front passenger airbag and front passenger knee airbag.
System components
A Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
B SRS warning light
For the U.S.A.
C “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
D “AIR BAG ON” indicator light
For Canada
E
F
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“AIR BAG ON” indicator light
WARNING
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving.
Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.
1-1. For safe use
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order.
(
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger occupant classification system.
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
41
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
42
1-1. For safe use
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult
*1
Indicator/warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Devices
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
■ Child restraint system with infant *5
Indicator/warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Devices
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
“AIR BAG ON”
Off
Off
*2
or flashing
*3
Activated
■ Child *4
Indicator/warning light
Devices
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
“AIR BAG OFF” or
“AIR BAG ON”
Off
Off
*2 or flashing
*4
*3
Deactivated or activated *4
“AIR BAG OFF” *6
Off
Off *2 or flashing *3
Deactivated
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
1-1. For safe use
■ Unoccupied
Indicator/warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Devices
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
“AIR BAG OFF”
Off
Deactivated
43
■ There is a malfunction in the system
Indicator/warning light
“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
SRS warning light
Devices
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Front passenger airbag
Front passenger knee airbag
“AIR BAG OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
*1 : The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2 : In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt
*3 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt
*4 : For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or posture.
*5 : Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (
*6 : In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the child restraint system properly. ( →
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
44
1-1. For safe use
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.
WARNING
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
● Keep the trunk lid closed.
● If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the trunk lid is closed, open the windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
1-2.Child safety
Riding with children
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid children opening the door while driving or operating the power window accidentally.
(
Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body parts, such as the power window, hood, trunk, seats etc.
WARNING
■ When children are in the vehicle
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof or panoramic moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
1-2. Child safety
Child restraint systems
Before installing a child restraint system in the vehicle, there are precautions that need to be observed, different types of child restraint systems, as well as installation methods, etc., written in this manual.
Use a child restraint system when riding with a small child that cannot properly use a seat belt. For the child’s safety, install the child restraint system to a rear seat. Be sure to follow the installation method that is in the operation manual enclosed with the restraint system.
45
1
Table of contents
When using a child restraint system:
Child restraint system installation method
• Fixed with a seat belt: P.49
• Fixed with a child restraint LATCH
• Using an anchor bracket (for top
Points to remember
The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. as well as Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.
Prioritize and observe the warnings, as well as the laws and regula-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
46
1-2. Child safety tions for child restraint systems.
Use a child restraint system until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.
WARNING
■ When a child is riding
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system which is correctly installed. For installation details, refer to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system. General installation instruction is provided in this manual.
● Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the weight and size of the child, installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
● Holding a child in your or someone else’s arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield or between the holder and the interior of the vehicle.
■ Handling the child restraint system
If the child restraint system is not properly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving, or an accident.
● If the vehicle were to receive a strong impact from an accident, etc., it is possible that the child restraint system has damage that is not readily visible. In such cases, do not reuse the restraint system.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided with the child restraint system manufacturer and that the system is properly secured.
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk.
Child restraint system
■ Types of child restraint system installation methods
Confirm with the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system about the installation of the child restraint system.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Seat belt attachment
Installation method
1-2. Child safety
Page
47
1
Child restraint LATCH anchors attachment
Anchor brackets (for top tether strap) attachment
When using a child restraint system
■ When installing a child restraint system to a front passenger seat
For the safety of a child, install child restraint systems to a rear seats. When installing child restraint system to a front passenger seat is unavoidable, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system.
Move the front seat fully rearward.
Adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position.
Adjust the front of the seat cushion to the lowest position.
Adjust the seat height to the uppermost position.
Adjust the lumbar support to the lowest position.
Adjust the shoulder bolster to the
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
48
1-2. Child safety lowest position (if equipped).
Adjust the pelvic support to the lowest position.
Adjust the seatback side bolster to the widest position (if equipped).
Adjust the seat cushion side bolster to the lowest position (if equipped).
Adjust the hip support to the lowest position (if equipped).
If the head restraint interferes with the child restraint system installation and the head restraint can be removed, remove the head restraint.
Otherwise, put the head restraint in the upper most position.
Adjust the head restraint to the lowest and rearmost position.
Adjust the shoulder bolster to the lowest position.
Adjust the lumbar support to the lowest position.
Adjust the pelvic support to the lowest position.
Disable the automatic rear seat operation. ( →
For the rear seat with an ottoman (if equipped): Adjust the seatback to the most upright position and ottoman (footrest) to the stowed position.
■ When installing a child restraint system to a power rear seat (if equipped)
When using a child restraint system in an outer rear seat, adjust the seat as follows and install the child restraint system.
Adjust the seat cushion to the fully rearward position.
Adjust the upper seatback to the rearmost position.
Adjust the front of the seat cushion to the lowest position.
WARNING
■ When using a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable.
When installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the seatback angle to the most upright position, move the seat to the rearmost position, and raise the seat to the upper most position, even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
1-2. Child safety
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder.
● Use child restraint system suitable to the age and size of the child and install it to the rear seat.
● If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.
49
1
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front or rear pillars, or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or
SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the
SRS side and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.
Child restraint system fixed with a seat belt
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
■ Installing child restraint system using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
50
1-2. Child safety
■ Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
1 Adjust the rear seat
Vehicles with power rear seat: If there is a gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
5 While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock
6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely.
(
■ Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat
1 Adjust the seat
When using the front passenger seat
If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is unavoid-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
able, refer to P.47 for front passenger
seat adjustment.
When using the rear seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved.
2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
1-2. Child safety mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.
3 Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
5 While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.
51
1
4 Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock
6 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. (
7 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely.
(
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
52
1-2. Child safety
■ Booster seat
1 If installing the child restraint system to the front passenger seat is
unavoidable, refer to P.47 for front
passenger seat adjustment.
2 Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.
Booster type
High back type
(
■ Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt
Press the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.
When releasing the buckle, the child restraint system may spring up due to the rebound of the seat cushion. Release the buckle while holding down the child restraint system.
Since the seat belt automatically reels itself, slowly return it to the stowing position.
4 Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system according to the manufacturer’s instructions and insert the plate into the buckle.
Make sure that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child’s shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
1-2. Child safety
● When installing a child restraint system in the rear center seat, adjust both seat cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ When installing a booster seat
To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
53
1
Child restraint system fixed with a child restraint LATCH anchor
■ Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided for the outboard rear seat. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)
■ Installation with LATCH system
Install the child restraint system in
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
54
1-2. Child safety accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
1 Vehicles with power rear seat:
Adjust the seat
If there is a gap between the child seat and the seatback, adjust the seatback angle until good contact is achieved. (
2 Open the cover.
Type A
4 Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint syslower connector system.
3 Insert the tab into the slit of the cover.
The cover will be held open.
A Canada only
Type B
4 Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors.
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint sys-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
lower connector system.
1-2. Child safety
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
● When securing some types of child restraint systems in rear seats, it may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
55
1
A Canada only
5 If the child restraint has a top tether strap, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s operation manual regarding the installation, using the top tether strap to latch onto the top tether strap anchor. ( →
6 After installing the child restraint system, rock it back and forth to ensure that it is installed securely.
( →
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE
J1819.
Using an anchor bracket (for top tether strap)
■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
Anchor brackets are provided for each rear seat.
Use anchor brackets when fixing the top tether strap.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
56
1-2. Child safety
Outboard rear seats
Outboard rear seats
A Anchor brackets
B Top tether strap
Rear center seat
A Hook
B Top tether strap
Rear center seat
A Anchor bracket
B Top tether strap
■ Fixing the top tether strap to the anchor bracket
Install the child restraint system in accordance to the operation manual enclosed with the child restraint system.
Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched. (
A
B
Hook
Top tether strap
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchors
The LATCH system conforms to
FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to SAE
J1819.
WARNING
■ When installing a child restraint system
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Firmly attach the top tether strap and make sure that the belt is not twisted.
● Do not attach the top tether strap to anything other than the anchor bracket.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.
● Be sure to have the top tether strap pass over the top of the head restraint.
If the belt passes below the head restraint, it is possible that the child restraint system may not be securely fixed.
NOTICE
■ Anchor brackets (for top tether strap)
When not in use, make certain to close the lid. If it remains open, the lid may be damaged.
1-2. Child safety
57
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
58
1-3. Theft deterrent system
1-3.Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
Operating the system
The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing after the engine switch has been turned to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certification for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
For vehicles sold in Canada
1-3. Theft deterrent system
59
1
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
60
Alarm
1-3. Theft deterrent system
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:
A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote control or mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically.)
The hood is opened.
Setting/canceling/stopping the alarm system
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following:
Nobody is in the vehicle.
The windows, moon roof (if equipped) and panoramic moon roof (if equipped) are closed before the alarm is set.
No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Setting
Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all the doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.
The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.
■ Canceling or stopping
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors.
Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● The trunk is opened using the mechanical key.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood, or unlocks the vehicle.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
● The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked. ( →
■ Alarm-operated door lock
In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to prevent improper entry into the vehicle:
● When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.
● While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
1-3. Theft deterrent system
61
1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
62
1-3. Theft deterrent system
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Vehicle status information and indicators
.
2-1. Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
...........................................................
Gauges and meters (except F
SPORT models) ........................
Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)...........................................
Multi-information display..........
Head-up display ...........................
Fuel consumption information
...........................................................
2
63
2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
64
2-1. Instrument cluster
2-1.Instrument cluster
Warning lights and indicators
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster, center panel and outside rear view mirrors inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Warning lights and indicators displayed on the instrument cluster
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations display all warning lights and indicators illuminated.
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems.
(U.S.A.)
Brake system warning light *1
(
(red)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light
*1
(
(yellow)
Brake system warning light *1
(
High coolant temperature warning light
*2
( →
Charging system warning light
*2
(
Low engine oil pressure warning light
*2
( →
(U.S.A.)
Malfunction indicator lamp *1
(
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp *1
(
SRS warning light
*1
(
Pop Up Hood warning light
(
*1
(U.S.A.)
ABS warning light *1 ( →
(Canada)
ABS warning light *1 ( →
Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control warning light
*2
( →
2-1. Instrument cluster
65
Electric power steering system warning light
*1
(
(red)
(yellow)
(orange)
(flashes)
Electric power steering system warning light *1 (
Low fuel level warning light
( →
Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
( →
Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights *3 ( →
Tire pressure warning light *1
( →
LTA indicator (if equipped)
( →
LKA indicator (if equipped)
( →
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator
*1
(if equipped) ( →
(flashes)
RCTA OFF indicator *1 equipped) (
(if
(flashes)
RCD OFF indicator (if equipped) (
(flashes)
PKSB OFF indicator
*1 equipped) (
(if
2
(flashes or illuminates)
PCS warning light *1 (
Slip indicator *1 (
(flashes)
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
66
2-1. Instrument cluster
(flashes)
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(
Brake hold operated indicator
*1
(
(flashes)
Master warning light *4
(
*1 : These lights come on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or go off.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
*2 : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*3 : This light illuminates on the center panel.
*4 : F SPORT models: This light comes on when the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or go off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the
ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator (
(U.S.A.)
Headlight indicator ( →
(Canada)
Tail light indicator ( →
Headlight high beam indicator
( →
AHB indicator ( →
(white)
(green)
(orange)
(flashes)
PCS warning light
*1, 2
( →
Cruise control indicator
( →
Dynamic radar cruise control indicator ( →
Cruise control “SET” indicator
( →
LTA indicator (if equipped)
( →
LKA indicator (if equipped)
( →
LTA indicator (if equipped)
( →
LKA indicator (if equipped)
( →
LTA indicator (if equipped)
( →
LKA indicator (if equipped)
( →
BSM outside rear view mirror indicators *1, 3 (if equipped)
( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2-1. Instrument cluster
67
BSM indicator (if equipped)
(
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator *1, 2 (if equipped)
(
RCTA OFF indicator *1, 2 (if equipped) ( →
RCD OFF indicator *2 (if equipped) ( →
PKSB OFF indicator *1, 2 (if equipped) ( →
(flashes)
Slip indicator
*1
( →
VSC OFF indicator *1, 2
(
High mode indicator (if equipped) ( →
Smart access system with push-button start indicator *4
(
(U.S.A.)
Parking brake indicator
(
(Canada)
Parking brake indicator
(
Brake hold standby indicator *1
(
Brake hold operated indicator *1
(
Eco Driving Indicator Light *1
(
Low outside temperature indicator *5 (
Security indicator *6 (
(U.S.A.)
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator *1, 6 ( →
“AIR BAG ON/OFF” indicator *1, 6 ( →
(Canada)
Drive mode indicators
Except F SPORT models
Snow mode indicator ( →
Normal mode indicator
( →
Custom mode indicator (if equipped) (
Comfort mode indicator (if equipped) (
Eco drive mode indicator
( →
Sport mode indicator (if equipped) (
Sport S mode indicator (if equipped) (
Sport S+ mode indicator (if equipped) (
F SPORT models
Snow mode indicator ( →
Normal mode indicator
( →
Custom mode indicator
( →
2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
68
2-1. Instrument cluster
Comfort mode indicator
(
Eco drive mode indicator
(
Sport S mode indicator
(
Sport S+ mode indicator
(
*1 : These lights come on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will go off after the engine is on, or after a few seconds.
There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or go off.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
*2 : This light comes on when the system is turned off.
*3 : This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.
*4 : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
*5 : When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, this indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.
*6 : This light illuminates on the center panel.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2-1. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters (except F SPORT models)
Meter display
■ Locations of gauges and meters
69
2
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
A Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
B Odometer and trip meter display ( →
C Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
D Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.
E Speedometer
F Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. ( →
G
H
Shift position indicator (
Shift range/gear position ( →
I Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
J Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
70
2-1. Instrument cluster
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( →
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Liquid crystal display
■ Customization
The gauges and meters can be customized on of the multi-information display.
( →
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (
Odometer and trip meter display
■ Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Distance until next engine oil change
Displays the distance the vehicle can be driven until an oil change is necessary.
■ Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is pressed, the displayed item will be changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch will reset the trip meter.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Pop-up display
Distance until the next engine oil change will displayed when a warning message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed soon or is required is displayed.
Changing the instrument panel light brightness
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
2-1. Instrument cluster
71
2
1 Darker
2 Brighter
■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and night mode)
The brightness of the meters changes between day mode and night mode.
● Day mode: When the tail lights are off or when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright
● Night mode: When the tail lights are on and the surrounding area is dark
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
72
2-1. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters (F SPORT models)
Meter display
■ Locations of gauges and meters
When the main meter is moved to the right, some of the meter displays and the gauge layout will change. ( →
Main meter in center position
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
A Odometer and trip meter display ( →
B Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
C Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
D Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.
• Rev indicator ( →
• Rev peak ( →
)
)
E Shift position/shift range/gear position ( →
F Speedometer
G Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. ( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2-1. Instrument cluster
H Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
I Shift position indicator (
J Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( →
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( →
Main meter moved to the right
73
2
The units of measure may differ depending on the intended destination of the vehicle.
A Outside temperature
Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C)
B Clock
Time displayed is linked to the analog clock on the center panel. ( →
C Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute
When sport mode is selected for the driving mode, the periphery of the tachometer will change color and the scale of the tachometer will be emphasized.
• Rev indicator ( →
• Rev peak ( →
)
)
D Shift position/shift range/gear position ( →
E Speedometer
F
G
Shift position indicator (
Odometer and trip meter display ( →
H Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
74
2-1. Instrument cluster
I Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature
J Multi-information display
Presents the driver with a variety of vehicle data ( →
Displays warning messages if a malfunction occurs ( →
■ Rev indicator
When the engine speed reaches a set speed or the red zone, a ring-shaped tachometer.
The indicators will be displayed in amber when the engine speed reaches a set speed, and in red when the engine speed reaches the red zone.
The engine speed at which the rev indicator will begin to be displayed can be set on
of the multi-information display.
( →
■ Rev peak
When the engine speed reaches or exceeds 5000 rpm, an afterimage of the tachometer will be displayed at the highest engine speed for approximately 1 second.
■ Outside temperature display
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
■ Liquid crystal display
→
■ Customization
The gauges and meters can be customized on of the multi-information display.
(
WARNING
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.
2-1. Instrument cluster
75 changed. When the trip meter is displayed, pressing and holding the switch will reset the trip meter.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. ( →
Odometer and trip meter display
■ Display items
Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter A/trip meter B
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.
Distance until next engine oil change
Displays the distance the vehicle can be driven until an oil change is necessary.
■ Changing the display
Each time the “ODO TRIP” switch is pressed, the displayed item will be
■ Pop-up display
The distance until the next engine oil change will displayed when a warning message indicating that oil maintenance should be performed soon or is required is displayed.
Changing the instrument panel light brightness
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
1 Darker
2 Brighter
■ Brightness of the meters (day mode and night mode)
The brightness of the meters changes between day mode and night mode.
● Day mode: When the tail lights are off or
2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
76
2-1. Instrument cluster when the tail lights are on but the surrounding area is bright
● Night mode: When the tail lights are on and the surrounding area is dark
Changing the main meter location
The display can be switched between the center and side positions.
Multi-information display
Display and menu icons
■ Display (except F SPORT models)
By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a variety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations.
■ Display (F SPORT models)
Main meter in center position
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related information.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2-1. Instrument cluster
Audio system-linked display
( →
Driving support system information display (
Warning message display
( →
Settings display ( →
77
Main meter moved to the right
By selecting menu icons on the multi-information display, a variety of driving-related information can be displayed. The multi-information display can also be used to change display settings and other vehicle settings.
Warning or suggestion/advice pop-up displays are also displayed in certain situations.
■ Menu icons
The menu icons will be displayed by pressing or of the meter control switch.
F SPORT models: The menu icons can be displayed when the main meter is moved to the right.
Driving information display
(
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped) ( →
■ Liquid crystal display
Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.
WARNING
■ Caution for use while driving
● When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle.
● Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
■ The information display at low temperatures
Changing the meter display
The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.
2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
78
2-1. Instrument cluster
A / : Select menu icons
/ : Change displayed content, scroll up/down the screen and move the cursor up/down
B Press: Enter/Set
Press and hold: Reset
C Move the main meter * and return to the previous screen
* : F SPORT models
Content of driving information
■ Display items (except F SPORT models)
Press or of the meter control switch and select . Then press or to display the following items:
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Eco Driving Indicator
Boost gauge
Tire pressure (
Vehicle sway warning
Display off
■ Display items (F SPORT models)
Main meter in center position
Press or of the meter control switch to display the following items:
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Tire pressure (
Gear positions
Units
Display off
Driving support system information
*
(
* : Can be selected when a driving support system is enabled. (
Main meter moved to the right
Press or of the meter control switch and select . Then press or to display the following items:
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Eco Driving Indicator
Boost gauge
G-force
Gear Position
Vehicle sway warning
Tire pressure ( →
Display off
■ Drive information 1/Drive information 2
Displays drive information such as the following:
Use the displayed values as a reference only.
Drive information 1
• Current fuel consumption
• Average fuel economy (after reset)
Drive information 2
• Distance (driving range)
• Average vehicle speed (after reset)
Displayed items (listed below) can be changed on . ( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Current fuel consumption
Bar type: Displays instantaneous current fuel consumption
Average fuel economy
After reset: Displays average fuel consumption since the display was reset *1
After start: Displays average fuel consumption since engine start
After refuel: Displays average fuel consumption since refuel
Average vehicle speed
After reset: Displays average vehicle speed since the display was reset
*1
After start: Displays average vehicle speed since engine start
Elapsed time
After reset: Displays elapsed time since the display was reset *1
After start: Displays elapsed time since engine start
Distance
Driving range: Displays driving range with remaining fuel *2, 3
After start: Displays the distance driven since engine start
Other
Blank: No item
*1 : To reset, display the desired item and press and hold of the meter control switch.
*2 : This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
*3 : When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may not
2-1. Instrument cluster
79 be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.
■ Eco Driving Indicator
A Eco Driving Indicator Light
During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco driving), the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn on. When the acceleration exceeds the Zone of Eco driving, or when the vehicle is stopped, the light turns off.
B Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with current Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.
C Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
If the acceleration exceeds the Zone of
Eco driving, the right side of the Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display will illuminate.
At this time, the Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn off.
D Zone of Eco driving
■ Boost gauge
Displays the boost pressure. The display will change color if the specified
2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
80
2-1. Instrument cluster pressure is exceeded.
This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle.
■ G-force (F SPORT models)
Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle. Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pressure.
A Acceleration G-force on the vehicle
B Current G-force value (analyzed value of front/rear and left/right
G-forces)
E
F
C
D
Record of the maximum G-forces
Accelerator pedal input
Brake fluid pressure
Steering amount
This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle.
Resetting the record of maximum
G-forces
Press and hold of the meter control switch to reset the record.
Peak hold function
If lateral G-forces of 0.5 G or greater are generated, the G-force value display will turn amber and be held for 2 seconds.
■ Gear Position (F SPORT models)
Displays the current shift range or gear position when the shift position is in D or M.
■ Units (F SPORT models)
The units of measure used can be changed while driving.
Unlike the units setting performed on the settings display, the units setting performed on the drive information display can be changed while driving.
■ Vehicle sway warning
Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associated with a decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the decrease in attention using a bar display.
The shorter the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest.
■ Eco Driving Indicator
Eco Driving Indicator will not operate under the following conditions:
● The shift position is in any position other than D.
● A paddle shift switch is operated.
● The driving mode is set to sport mode.
● The driving mode is set to custom mode and the powertrain control is set to power
( →
● Snow mode is selected.
● The vehicle speed is approximately 80 mph (130 km/h) or higher.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Vehicle sway warning
This display is enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warning of the LTA (
→
met.
Navigation system-linked display (if equipped)
Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.
Route guidance to destination
Compass display (heading-up display)
■ Route guidance to destination display
When the route guidance to destination display is enabled on the head-up display, it will not be displayed on the multi-information display. (
Audio system-linked display
Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the meter using the meter control switches.
Driving support system information display
Select to display the operational status of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped) ( →
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped) ( →
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ( →
RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped) ( →
2-1. Instrument cluster
Settings display
■ Meter display settings that can be changed
Language
Select to change the language displayed.
Units
Select to change the units of measure displayed.
Speedometer display (except F
SPORT models)
Select to set the display of the speedometer to digital/analog/both digital and analog.
Drive information 1/Drive information 2
Select to select up to 2 items (
will be displayed on each Drive information screen (Drive information 1 screen and
Drive information 2 screen) respectively.
Clock
Select to switch between 12-hour display and 24-hour display.
Pop-up display
Select to enable/disable pop-up displays for each relevant system.
Accent color
Select to change the accent color on the screen, such as the cursor color.
Rev indicator (F SPORT models)
• Select to enable/disable the rev indicator.
• Select to set the engine speed at which the rev indicator (amber) will begin to be displayed.
Rev peak (F SPORT models)
Select to enable/disable the rev peak.
81
2
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
82
2-1. Instrument cluster
Eco Driving Indicator Light
Select to enable/disable the Eco Driving
Indicator Light.
Default setting
Select to reset the meter display settings to the default setting.
■ Vehicle functions and settings that can be changed
→
■ Suspension of the settings display
● Some settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings, park the vehicle in a safe place.
● If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will be suspended.
WARNING
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Suggestion to turn off the headlights
If the headlights are left on for a certain amount of time with the headlight switch in after the engine switch has been turned off, a suggestion message will be displayed asking if you wish to turn the headlights off.
To turn the headlights off, select “Yes”.
If a front door is opened after the engine switch is turned off, this suggestion message will not be displayed.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
NOTICE
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.
Suggestion function
Displays suggestions to the driver in the following situations. To select a response to a displayed suggestion, use the meter control switches.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2-1. Instrument cluster
Head-up display
*
* : If equipped
The head-up display projects a variety of driving-related information and the operating state of the driving support systems on the windshield.
83
System components
2
Illustrations used in this text are intended as examples, and may differ from the image that is actually displayed by the head-up display.
A Navigation system-linked display area (if equipped)
Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:
• Route guidance to destination
• Street name
• Compass (heading-up display)
B Driving support system display area (
C Speed limit/RSA (Road Sign Assist) display area (if equipped)
Displays the following items:
• Speed limit of the current road (linked to the navigation system) (U.S.A. only)
• RSA (Road Sign Assist) display ( →
D Outside temperature display area
E Driving information display area
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
84
2-1. Instrument cluster
Displays the following items:
• Speedometer
• Shift position/shift range/gear position ( →
)
F Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator display area ( →
G HUD (Head-up display) switch
■ Head-up display will operate when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When using the head-up display
The head-up display may seem dark or hard to see when viewed through sunglasses, especially polarized sunglasses. Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.
■ Street name display
Only street names which are included in the map data will be displayed.
■ Outside temperature display
● When the ambient temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the low outside temperature indicator will flash for approximately 10 seconds and the outside temperature display will turn off. In this case, the display will be displayed again when the outside temperature becomes approximately 41°F (5°C) or higher.
● In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be displayed, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
• When stopped, or driving at low speeds
(less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
• When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
● When “--” or “E” is displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ When using the head-up display
● Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not interfere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not continuously look at the head-up display while driving as you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.
NOTICE
■ Head-up display projector
● Do not place any drinks near the head-up display projector. If the projector gets wet, electrical malfunctions may result.
● Do not place anything on or put stickers onto the head-up display projector.
Doing so could interrupt head-up display indications.
● Do not touch the inside of the head-up display projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into the projector.
Doing so could cause mechanical malfunctions.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Using the head-up display
■ Enabling/disabling the head-up display
Press the HUD switch.
■ Changing settings of the head-up display
The following settings can be changed on of the multi-information display.
( →
Brightness and vertical position of the head-up display
Select to adjust the brightness or vertical position of the head-up display.
Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator
Select to display the tachometer, Eco Driving Indicator or no content.
Display content
Select to enable/disable the following items:
• Route guidance to destination/street name
• Driving support system display *
• Compass (heading-up display)
• Audio system operation status
* : Make sure to enable this display when using the driving support systems
Display angle
2-1. Instrument cluster
Select to adjust the angle of the head-up display.
85
■ Enabling/disabling of the head-up display
If the head-up display is disabled, it will remain disabled when the engine switch is turned off then back to IGNITION ON mode.
■ Display brightness
The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on of the multi-information display. Also, it is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness.
■ Head-up display automatic position adjustment
If the display position is recorded into memory, the head-up display will be automatically adjusted to the desired position.
(
■ When the battery is disconnected
The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.
WARNING
■ Caution for changing settings of the head-up display
As the engine needs to be running while changing the settings of the head-up display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
2
NOTICE
■ When changing the settings of the head-up display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while the changing the settings of the head-up display.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
86
2-1. Instrument cluster
Driving support system display area
Displays the operational status of the following systems:
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped) ( →
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) (if equipped) ( →
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range ( →
Details of content displayed on the head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the explanation of each system.
Pop-up display
Pop-up displays for the following systems will be displayed when necessary.
■ Driving support systems
Displays a warning/suggestion/advice message or the operating state of a relevant system.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
( →
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) (if equipped) ( →
Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
( →
Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) (if equipped)
( →
Brake Override System ( →
Drive-Start Control (
Details of content displayed on the head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display. For details, refer to the explanation of each system.
■ / icons
These icons are linked to the multi-information display
: Master warning icon
Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display.
(
: Information icon
Displayed when a suggestion pop-up display ( →
P.82) or advice pop-up display is
displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Warning message
Some warning messages are displayed when necessary, according to certain conditions.
Details of content displayed on the head-up display may differ from that displayed on the multi-information display.
■ Audio system operation status
Displayed when an audio remote control switch on the steering wheel is operated.
■ Hands-free system status
Displayed when the hands-free system is operated.
■ When a pop-up display is displayed
When a pop-up display is displayed, a current display may no longer be displayed. In this case, the display will return after the pop-up display disappears.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Tachometer/Eco Driving Indicator
■ Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
■ Eco Driving Indicator
2-1. Instrument cluster
Fuel consumption information
87
Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the Center Display.
The fuel consumption information can be displayed and operated on the side display.
2
System components
A
B
Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display
Eco driving ratio based on acceleration
C Zone of Eco driving
Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display
(Eco Driving Indicator). For details, refer to
C
D
A
B
Center Display
Meter control switches
“MENU” button
Touchpad
Consumption
■ Trip information
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select on the
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
88
2-1. Instrument cluster menu screen.
If a screen other than “Trip Information” is displayed, select “Trip Information”.
C
D
A
B
Resetting the consumption data
Fuel consumption in the past 15 minutes
Current fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed since the engine was started.
E Elapsed time since the engine was started.
F Cruising range
Average fuel consumption for the past
15 minutes is divided by color into past averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to
IGNITION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ History
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch, then select on the menu screen.
If a screen other than “History” is displayed, select “History”.
A
B
C
D
E
Best recorded fuel consumption
Latest fuel consumption
Previous fuel consumption record
Resetting the history data
Updating the latest fuel consumption data
The average fuel consumption history is divided by color into past averages and the average fuel consumption since the last updated. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
■ Updating the history data
Update the latest fuel consumption by selecting “Clip” to measure the current fuel consumption again.
■ Resetting the data
The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.
■ Cruising range
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.
As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Using the side display
Display the vehicle information on the side display ( →
or to display the desired screen.
The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.
Displays the average fuel consumption for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute intervals, as well as the cruising range.
■ Trip information (type A)
2-1. Instrument cluster
89
■ History
Displays the average fuel consumption and highest fuel consumption.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
2
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
■ Trip information (type B)
Displays the cruising range, latest fuel consumption and the amount of time elapsed since the engine was started.
Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
90
2-1. Instrument cluster
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Before driving
3
.
3-1. Key information
Keys ...................................................
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors.................................................
Trunk................................................
Smart access system with push-button start.....................
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats......................................
Power rear seat...........................
Driving position memory ........
Rear seat position memory.....
Head restraints............................
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel.............................
Inside rear view mirror.............
Outside rear view mirrors......
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows...........................
Moon roof .....................................
Panoramic moon roof ..............
91
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
92
3-1.Key information
Keys
3-1. Key information
The keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
key does not operate properly.
● If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a pen tip etc. If it is still difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.
● To store the mechanical key in the card key, insert it while pressing the lock release button.
● If the battery cover is not installed and the battery falls out or if the battery was removed because the key got wet, reinstall the battery with the positive terminal facing the Lexus emblem.
A Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access system with push-button start ( →
)
)
• Operating the wireless remote control function (
B Mechanical keys
C Key number plate
D Card key (electronic key) (if equipped)
Operating the smart access system with push-button start (
■ Card key (if equipped)
● The card key is not waterproof.
● The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only if a problem arises, such as when the card
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
(The card key battery life is about a year and a half.)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin and a message will be shown on the multi-information display when the engine is stopped.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
● To reduce key battery depletion when the electronic key is to not be used for long periods of time, set the electronic key to the battery-saving mode. ( →
● As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (
• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate.
• The detection area becomes smaller.
• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
• TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
• Induction cookers
■ Replacing the battery
■ Confirmation of the number of registered keys
The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your
Lexus dealer for details.
■ If “A New Key has been Registered
Contact Your Dealer for Details” is shown on the multi-information display
This message will be displayed each time the driver’s door is opened when the doors are unlocked from the outside for approximately 10 days after a new electronic key has been registered.
If this message is displayed but you have not had a new electronic key registered, ask your Lexus dealer to check if an unknown electronic key (other than those in your possession) has been registered.
3-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.
● Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time.
● Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.
● Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to such materials.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
● Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.
● Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems and induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equipment.
■ Carrying the electronic key on your person
Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-related problems
■ When an electronic key is lost
■ Handling the card key (if equipped)
● Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key into the card key. Doing so may damage the card key.
93
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
94
3-1. Key information
NOTICE
● If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key may stop working.
If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water, etc. is spilled on the key, immediately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals. (To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp and pull it.) If the battery is corroded, have your Lexus dealer replace the battery.
● Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.
Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.
● If the battery cover is frequently removed, the battery cover may become loose.
● When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.
Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.
● The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the following situations:
• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins and keys.
• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as the tip of a mechanical pencil.
• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinner or benzene.
Wireless remote control
The electronic keys are equipped with the following wireless remote control:
A
B
C
Locks the doors ( →
Unlocks the doors ( →
Opens the windows *1 and moon roof
*1, 2
or panoramic moon roof
*1,
2
(
Opens the trunk (
D
E Sounds the alarm
*1
: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
*2
: If equipped
■ Theft deterrent panic mode
When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.
Using the mechanical key
To take out the mechanical key, push the release button and take the key out.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
The mechanical key can only be inserted in one direction, as the key only has grooves on one side. If the key cannot be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it over and re-attempt to insert it.
After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key.
( →
3-1. Key information
95
3
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch off
( →
P.106) and lock the glove box (
as circumstances demand.
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
■ If you lose your mechanical keys
■ If a wrong key is used
The key cylinder rotates freely, isolated from the internal mechanism.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
96
3-2.Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Doors
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Wireless remote control
Unlocking and locking the doors from the outside
■ Smart access system with push-button start
Carry the electronic key to enable this function.
1 Grip the driver’s door handle to unlock the door. Holding the driver’s door handle for approximately 2 seconds unlocks all the doors. Grip any passenger door handle to unlock all the doors.
*
Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.
The doors cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the doors are locked.
* : The door unlock settings can be changed.
2 Touch the lock sensor (indentation on the upper part of the door handle) to lock all the doors.
Check that the door is securely locked.
1 Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely locked.
2 Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the driver’s door. Pressing the button again within 5 seconds unlocks the other door.
Press and hold to open the windows
*1
and moon roof
*1,2
or panoramic moon roof
*1,2
.
*1
: This setting must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
*2
: If equipped
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote control.
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold ,
or for approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding
.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and repeat step 3 .)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Multi-information display/Beep
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking function
Exterior: Beeps 3 times
Interior: Pings once
Holding the driver’s door handle unlocks only the driver’s door.
Holding any of the passenger door handles unlocks all the doors.
97
60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ When the doors cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door handle
When the doors cannot be locked even if the lock sensor on the surface of the door handle is touched by a finger, touch the lock sensor with the palm.
If you are wearing gloves, remove them.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
Holding a door handle unlocks all the doors.
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed.
(If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)
In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. ( →
■ Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may not operate.
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once;
Unlocked: twice)
A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof or panoramic moon roof are operating.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately
■ Open door warning buzzer
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Setting the alarm
Locking the doors will set the alarm system.
(
■ Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control
→
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. (
■ If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked and unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control. Lock or unlock the doors using the mechanical key. ( →
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
98
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
Unlocking and locking the doors from the inside
■ Door lock switches (to lock/unlock)
WARNING
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant throwing out of the vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.
■ When opening or closing a door
Check the surroundings of the vehicle such as whether the vehicle is on an incline, whether there is enough space for a door to open and whether a strong wind is blowing. When opening or closing the door, hold the door handle tightly to prepare for any unpredictable movement.
■ Vehicle height control precautions
(vehicles with electronically modulated air suspension)
In the following situations, make sure to check the safety of the area around the vehicle, as the vehicle height may change and part of someone’s body may be caught in the vehicle, possibly causing injury or the vehicle may be damaged.
● When opening a door
● When unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start
1 Locks all the doors
2 Unlocks all the doors
■ Inside lock buttons (to lock)
Push down the inside lock button to lock the door.
■ Inside door handles (to unlock)
For the front doors
Pull the handle to unlock and open the door.
When the door is unlocked, the inside lock button will pop up.
For the rear doors
Pull the handle to unlock the door. Pull the handle a second time to open the door.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
When the door is unlocked, the inside lock button will pop up.
WARNING
■ Door closer (if equipped)
In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the door easy closer begins to operate.
If the child-protector lock is set, the door closer will not stop during operation even if an attempt is made to open the door from inside the vehicle. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the door.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
■ Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
1 Push down the inside lock button.
2 Close the door.
The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle. However, the key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.
■ Door closer (if equipped)
In the event that a door is left slightly open, the door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
● The door closer will operate regardless of the engine switch mode.
● The door closer will not function if the door has been closed while pulling the inside or outside door handle.
● The door can be opened by pulling the inside or outside door handle, even when the door closer is operating (except when the lock button is in the lock position or the child-protector lock is set).
● A motor sound may be heard for several seconds after the door closer closes the door. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Open door warning buzzer
If a door or the trunk is not fully closed, a buzzer will sound when the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5 km/h).
The open door(s) or trunk is indicated on the multi-information display.
NOTICE
■ To prevent door closer malfunction (if equipped)
Do not frequently repeat opening and closing of doors, or apply excessive force to a door while the door closer is operating.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
99
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
100
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1 Unlock
2 Lock
These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down on each rear door switch to lock both rear doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or canceled:
For instructions on customizing, refer to
Shift position linked door unlocking function
Driver’s door linked door unlocking function
Function
Speed linked door locking function
Shift position linked door locking function
Operation
All doors are automatically locked when vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
All doors are automatically locked when the shift position is shifted to a position other than
P.
All doors are automatically unlocked when the shift position is shifted to P.
All doors are automatically unlocked when driver’s door is opened within approximately
45 seconds after turning the engine switch off.
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener switch, entry function or wireless remote control.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk can be closed using the trunk closer.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Before driving
● Make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving and hit near-by objects or luggage in the trunk may be thrown out, causing an accident.
● Do not allow children to play in the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to open unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
■ Important points while driving
Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.
● The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
101
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure to press it lightly on its outer surface. If the trunk handle is used to fully close the trunk lid, it may result in hands or arms being caught.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position. It takes several seconds before the trunk easy closer begins to operate. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid, as this may cause bone fractures or other serious injuries.
3
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra care to prevent your fingers etc. from being caught.
■ Power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions when operating the power trunk opener and closer.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.
● If the trunk closer switch is pressed while the trunk lid is opening during automatic operation, the trunk lid stops opening. Take extra care when on an incline, as the trunk lid may open or close suddenly.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
102
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
● On an incline, the trunk lid may suddenly shut after it opens automatically.
Make sure the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.
● In the following situations, the power trunk opener and closer may detect an abnormality and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the trunk lid has to be operated manually. Take extra care in this situation, as the stopped trunk lid may suddenly shut, causing an accident.
• When the trunk lid contacts an obstacle
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode or the engine is started during automatic operation
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Lexus parts to the trunk lid. The power trunk opener and closer may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the trunk lid may suddenly shut again after it is opened.
■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes to become quite hot. When operating the Hands Free Power Trunk
Lid, be careful not to touch the exhaust pipe.
● Do not operate the Hands Free Power
Trunk Lid if there is little space under the rear bumper.
■ Jam protection function
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause serious injury.
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the trunk lid fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else in the trunk lid.
● The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.
NOTICE
■ To prevent trunk easy closer malfunctions
Do not apply force to the trunk lid while the trunk easy closer is operating.
■ To prevent damage to the power trunk opener and closer (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
● Make sure that there is no luggage or snow on the trunk lid before operating the power trunk opener and closer. In addition, make sure that there is no ice between the trunk lid and frame that prevents movement of the trunk lid.
Operating the power trunk opener and closer when excessive load is present on the trunk lid may cause a malfunction.
● Do not apply excessive force to the trunk lid while the power trunk opener and closer is operating.
Opening/closing the trunk
■ Trunk opener switch
Press the trunk opener switch.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid will fully open.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
103
A buzzer sounds.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid will fully open.
If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.
■ Smart access system with push-button start
While carrying the electronic key, press the button.
If the vehicle is equipped with a power trunk opener and closer, the trunk lid will fully open.
If the button is pressed while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.
When all the doors are unlocked using one of the following methods, the trunk can be opened without the electronic key:
Entry function
Wireless remote control
Door lock switches
Automatic door unlocking system
Mechanical key
■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (if equipped)
1 While carrying an electronic key, stand slightly away from the vehicle, move a foot under the center of the rear bumper and then pull it back.
The trunk lid will not start operating while a foot is detected under the rear bumper.
If another electronic key for your vehicle is in the vehicle, it may take slightly longer than normal for the trunk lid to start operating.
3
■ Wireless remote control
Press and hold the switch.
2 A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will fully open/close.
If a foot is moved under the rear bumper while the trunk lid is opening, the trunk lid will stop moving.
If a foot is moved under the rear bumper
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
104 while the trunk lid is closing, the trunk lid will open.
■ Trunk closer switch (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
Press the trunk closer switch.
A buzzer will sound and the trunk lid will fully close.
Pressing the switch while the trunk lid is closing opens the trunk lid again.
■ Trunk grip
Using the trunk grip, pull down the trunk lid without applying sideways force and push the trunk lid down from the outside to close it.
■ Trunk lid light/trunk light
● The trunk lid light/trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
● If the trunk lid light/trunk light is left on when the engine switch is turned off, the light will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Trunk easy closer
In the event that the trunk lid is left slightly open, the trunk easy closer will automatically close it to the fully closed position.
● The trunk easy closer will operate regardless of the engine switch mode.
● If the trunk easy closer does not operate, open the trunk to the half open position or more and then close it.
■ Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside
● When all doors are locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm.
In this case, the trunk lid can be opened pressing the trunk release button on the trunk lid.
● If the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function is activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.
● If the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key may not be detected depending on the location of the key and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement prevention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.
● The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.
■ Hands Free Power Trunk Lid operating conditions (if equipped)
The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) is enabled and the engine switch is turned off.
■ Overload protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
The trunk lid will not operate when excessive load is present on the top of the trunk lid.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the trunk lid from rapidly falling down.
■ Jam protection function (vehicles with power trunk opener and closer)
While the trunk lid is closing automatically, the trunk lid will stop closing and open if something gets caught.
■ Internal trunk release lever
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid to the side.
The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.
■ Using the mechanical key
The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. ( →
If the trunk is unlocked using the mechanical key, the power trunk lid and trunk easy closer will not be operational. To return them to an operational state, fully close the trunk lid by hand.
■ If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does not operate properly
Use the mechanical key to unlock the trunk.
( →
Replace the key battery with a new one if it is depleted. ( →
■ Situations in which the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may operate unintentionally (if equipped)
In the following situations, the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may operate unintentionally.
To prevent unintentional operation, do not
105 leave the electronic key in the trunk and keep it out of the effective range (detection area) or disable the Hands Free Power
Trunk Lid (kick sensor).
● When a large amount of water is applied to the rear bumper, such as when the vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
● When dirt is wiped off the rear bumper
● When a small animal or small object, such as a ball, moves under the rear bumper
● When an object is moved from under the rear bumper
● When snow, etc. is removed from under the rear bumper
● If someone is swinging their legs while sitting on the rear bumper
● If the legs or another part of someone’s body contacts the rear bumper while passing by the vehicle
● When the vehicle is parked near an electrical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid, such as a pay parking spot, gas station, electrically heated road, or fluorescent light
● When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When the vehicle is parked in a place where objects, such as grass, move near the rear bumper
● If luggage, etc. is set near the rear bumper
● If accessories or a vehicle cover is installed/removed near the rear bumper
● When the vehicle is being towed
■ Situations in which the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly (if equipped)
● In the following situations, the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid may not operate properly:
• If the rear bumper is strongly hit with a foot or is touched for a while
Make sure not to touch the rear bumper
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
106
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk with a foot when operating the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid.
If the rear bumper has been touched for a while, wait for a short time before attempting to operate the Hands Free Power Trunk
Lid again.
• When an external radio wave source interferes with the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle ( →
• When the vehicle is parked near an electrical noise source which affects the sensitivity of the Hands Free Power Trunk Lid, such as a pay parking spot, gas station, electrically heated road, or fluorescent light
• When the vehicle is near a TV tower, electric power plant, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When a large amount of water is applied to the rear bumper, such as when the vehicle is being washed or in heavy rain
• When mud, snow, ice, etc. is attached to the rear bumper
• When the vehicle has been parked for a while near objects that may move under the rear bumper, such as grass
• When an accessory is installed to the rear bumper
Make sure to disable the Hands Free
Power Trunk Lid (kick sensor) if an accessory is installed to the rear bumper.
● The Hands Free Power Trunk Lid will not operate in the following situations:
• When an electronic key is not carried
• When an electronic key is not within the effective range (detection area)
■ Open door warning buzzer
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
porarily disabled to protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft.
Turn the main switch in the glove box off to disable the trunk opener.
A On
B Off
The trunk lid cannot be opened even with the wireless remote control, entry function or Hands Free Power Trunk Lid.
■ When leaving a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
→
Luggage security system
The trunk opener switch can be tem-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
107
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key (including the card key) on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always carry the electronic key.
Locks and unlocks the doors
(
Opens the trunk (
Starts the engine ( →
■ Antenna location
A
B
Antennas outside the cabin
Antennas inside the cabin
C Antenna inside the trunk
D Antenna outside the trunk
A When locking or unlocking the doors
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of an outside door handle. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)
B When opening the trunk
The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of the trunk release button.
C When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes
The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.
■ Alarms and warning messages
An alarm sounds and warning messages are displayed on the multi-information display to protect against unexpected accidents or theft of the vehicle resulting from erroneous operation. When a warning message is displayed, take appropriate measures based on the displayed message.
(
When only an alarm sounds, circumstances and correction procedures are as follows.
● When an exterior alarm sounds once for
5 seconds
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
108
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Situation
The trunk was closed while the electronic key was still inside the trunk and all the doors were locked.
Correction procedure
An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.
Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.
Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.
● When an interior alarm sounds continuously
Situation
Correction procedure
The engine switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the driver’s door was open (The driver’s door was opened when the engine switch was in ACCESSORY mode).
Turn the engine switch off and close the driver’s door.
The engine switch was turned off while the driver’s door was open.
Close the driver’s door.
take some time to unlock the doors.
• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.
• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or longer.
● If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case, take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.
■ Turning an electronic key to battery-saving mode
When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the electronic key from receiving radio waves.
Press twice while pressing and holding
. Confirm that the electronic key indicator flashes 4 times.
While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart access system with push-button start cannot be used. To cancel the function, press any of the electronic key buttons.
■ If “Key Detected in Vehicle” is shown on the multi-information display
An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart access system with pushbutton start while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle. Retrieve the electronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.
■ Battery-saving function
The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key battery and the battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time.
● In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Ways of coping:
→
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant,
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby
● When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window
● When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices
● When the vehicle is parked in a pay parking spot where radio waves are emitted.
■ Note for the entry function
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the center of the rear bumper when the trunk is opened.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in the door pockets or glove box when the
109 engine is started or engine switch modes are changed.
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle.
Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used to unlock the vehicle.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately
60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
● Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent lock operation.
● When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.
● If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft.
(2 m) or more away from the vehicle.
(Take care to ensure that the key is not
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
110
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
• Set the electronic key to battery-saving
●
● stolen.) mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. ( operate it again.
is gripped.
● If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.
The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
● To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.
● The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.
● Setting the electronic key to battery-saving mode helps to reduce key battery depletion. (
■ To operate the system properly
● Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)
● Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk.
The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (the inside edge of the
Trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. ( →
■ If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk:
● Starting the engine: →
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
■ If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized setting
● Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk:
Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (
● Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes:
● Stopping the engine:
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
111
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
112
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
For vehicles sold in Canada
113
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
114
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
WARNING
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas.
( →
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
● Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.
115
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
116
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3-3.Adjusting the seats
Front seats
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
● Make sure to leave enough space around the feet so they do not get stuck.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Do not operate the front passenger’s seat when a passenger is seated in it. In addition, do not let anyone sit down in the front passenger’s seat while the seat is being operated or when the head restraint is being folded. The front passenger may catch their legs between the instrument panel and seat, or the head restraint may interfere with their head, resulting in injury.
■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward
If the outside rear view mirror is difficult to see, due to the position of the front passenger’s seat, move the front passenger’s seat to an appropriate position.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat or rear seat
Before operating the front passenger’s seat, make sure that there is no luggage or any other objects on the seat or in the footwell that could prevent its operation.
Such items may result in excess force being applied, causing damage to the seat and/or the luggage.
Adjustment procedure
■ Seat adjustment switches
A
B
C
Seat position adjustment switch
Seatback angle adjustment switch
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch
D Vertical height adjustment switch
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
E
F
Lumbar support adjustment switch
Seat cushion length adjustment switch (if equipped)
■ Center Display
1 Press the seat switch.
2 Using the Remote Touch pad, select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or
“Passenger Seat Adjustment”.
3 Select the button for the desired adjustment.
C
D
E
A
B
Head restraint adjustment (if equipped) ( →
Shoulder bolster adjustment (if equipped)
Lumbar support adjustment
Pelvic support adjustment
Seatback side bolster adjustment (if equipped)
F Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if equipped)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
G Hip support adjustment (if equipped)
4 Perform adjustment using the displayed buttons.
The seat will move while a button is selected.
117
■ When adjusting the front seats
While adjusting a front seat, to avoid contact with the ceiling, instrument panel or rear seats, the operation of the seat may be restricted or parts of the seat other than that being adjusted may move.
■ Operation after the engine switch is turned off
After a certain time elapses after the engine switch is turned off, the following parts of the front seats will move to their neutral positions.
● Shoulder bolster (if equipped)
● Lumbar support
● Pelvic support
● Seatback side bolster (if equipped)
● Seat cushion side bolster (if equipped)
● Hip support (if equipped)
■ Automatic angle adjustment of the rear displays (if equipped)
When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the rear display will be adjusted automatically to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the rear display from the rear seat.
■ Pre-collision seatbacks for the passenger seats
→
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
118
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Operating the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat
■ Using the driver’s seat adjustment switches to adjust the front passenger’s seat (front passenger mode)
The mode of the driver’s seat adjustment switches can be changed to adjust the front passenger’s seat.
1 Press the mode change button on the driver’s side door.
The indicator A will illuminate when front passenger mode is selected.
■ Using the Center Display (vehicles with a foldable head restraint)
1 Press the seat switch.
2 Press the sub function button of the
Remote Touch. (
3 Select the button for the desired operation.
2 Using the seat adjustment switches on the driver’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat.
To cancel front passenger mode, press the mode change button again.
Front passenger mode will be canceled automatically if the driver’s seat adjustment switches are not operated for approximately 30 seconds.
A Moves the front passenger’s seat forward and folds the seatback and head restraint forward
B Moves the front passenger’s seat backward and the seatback and head restraint to the upright position
If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s seat is not in the upright position, it will move to the upright position before the front passenger’s seat moves to its upright position.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is moving, select the A press the seat switch.
or B button or
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Operating the foldable head restraint using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode (if equipped)
● When the front passenger’s seatback angle is adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode, the front passenger’s head restraint will operate automatically as follows:
• When the front passenger’s seatback is moved forward to the upright position, the head restraint will lower and fold forward when the seatback angle adjustment switch is released.
• When the front passenger’s seatback is moved backward to the upright position, the head restraint will move to the upright position when the seatback angle adjustment switch is released.
● If any of the following conditions are met, the front passenger’s head restraint will not fold forward even though the front passenger’s seatback angle is being adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passenger mode:
• The engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off.
• The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
• The front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
• The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
• The front passenger’s seat is not in the lowest position.
• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion
(front) is not in the lowest position.
• The front passenger’s seat seat cushion is extended (if equipped).
● If either of the following conditions is met, the front passenger’s head restraint will not return to the upright position even though the front passenger’s seatback angle is being adjusted using the driver’s seat adjustment switches in front passen-
3-3. Adjusting the seats
119 ger mode:
• The engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off.
• The front passenger’s seat position is moved to a position forward of the neutral position.
■ Operating the foldable head restraint using the front passenger’s seat adjustment switches (if equipped)
When the front passenger’s head restraint is folded forward and the front passenger’s door is open, if the front passenger’s seat adjustment switches are used to move the seat backward or recline the seatback, the head restraint will move to the upright position automatically when the switch is released.
To stop the operation of the front passenger’s head restraint part-way, perform any of the following operations:
● Operate any front passenger’s seat adjustment switch.
The head restraint will stop when the seat position adjustment switch or seatback angle adjustment switch is operated to move the seat backward or recline the seatback, and will resume operating when the switch is released.
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press the “1”, “2” or “3” button.
● Press the seat switch.
■ Operation of the front passenger’s seat using the Center Display will be canceled when (vehicles with a foldable head restraint)
In the following situations, the front passenger’s seat cannot be operated using the
Center Display:
● The engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off.
● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
120
3-3. Adjusting the seats
● The front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
● The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward
By reclining the front passenger’s seat seatback, the forward view of the rear passenger can be improved.
Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat (vehicles without power rear seat)
1 Press and hold to move the front passenger’s seat forward and fold the seatback forward.
2 Press and hold to move the front passenger’s seat backward and move the seatback to the upright position.
Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat (vehicles with power rear seat)
■ Automatic operation
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
( →
2 Touch the button for the desired operation.
When the operating conditions are not met, the buttons will be grayed out.
A Move the front passenger’s seat forward and fold the seatback forward.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also fold forward.
B Move the front passenger’s seat backward and the seatback to the upright position.
If the rear seat behind the front passenger’s seat is not in the upright position, it will move to the upright position before the front passenger’s seat moves to its previous position.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also move to the upright position.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is moving, touch “STOP”.
■ Manual operation
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(
→ P.308) and then touch “Seat”.
2 Touch “Right”
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3 Touch the button for the desired operation.
3-3. Adjusting the seats
121 closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● The front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
● The front passenger’s door is open. (The front seat will not move forward.)
■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward
→
Front seat refresh system (if equipped)
Pneumatic chambers built into the front seat apply pressure to the occupant’s body at different modes and intensities.
1 Press the seat switch.
3
A Touch and hold to move the front passenger’s seat forward and fold the seatback forward.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also fold forward.
B Touch and hold to move the front passenger’s seat backward and the seatback to the upright position.
On vehicles with a foldable head restraint, the head restraint will also move to the upright position.
■ Operating the front passenger’s seat from the rear seat
In the following situations, the front passenger’s seat cannot be operated using the
Rear Multi Operation Panel:
● The engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off.
● The rear seat belt is not fastened and weight is not detected on the rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then
2 Using the Remote Touch pad, select “Driver Seat Refresh” or
“Passenger Seat Refresh”.
3 Select the desired mode.
“Centripetal”
Applies pressure sequentially from the front of the seat cushion to top of the seatback
“Centrifugal”
Applies pressure sequentially from the top of the seatback to the front of the seat cushion
“Upper Body”
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
122
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Applies pressure sequentially from the bottom to the top of the seatback
“Lower Body”
Applies pressure sequentially from the front to the back of the seat cushion
“Lumbar”
Applies pressure sequentially from the bottom to the top of the lumbar area of the seatback
4 Select the desired intensity and then confirm the setting.
The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.
To stop the operation select “Stop”.
If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the front seat refresh system for that seat.
■ Refresh system
● Operating conditions
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The temperature in the cabin is not extremely high.
• For the front passenger’s seat: The weight of an occupant is detected on the front passenger’s seat or the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● Automatic stop function
• The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15 minutes.
• If the power easy access system begins operating, the front seat refresh system will stop.
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Do not adjust the driver’s seat refresh system while driving.
Using it may affect your ability to control the vehicle, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Using the refresh system
● Those who are pregnant, have recently given birth, or suffer from ailments requiring rest (heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use.
● Do not allow children to use the refresh function.
● Do not use immediately after consuming a meal or alcohol, or for an extended period of time.
● If you feel sick while using the refresh function, immediately discontinue use.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Power rear seat
*
* : If equipped
WARNING
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.
● When adjusting the rear seat with an ottoman, make sure there is sufficient space so that a foot does not get caught between the ottoman and front passenger seat. (If equipped)
● Vehicle with rear seat entertainment system: When the rear seat is moving to the Entertainment Mode position, do not allow hands near the rear display. Otherwise, a hand or finger may be caught, possibly causing injury.
■ Seat adjustment
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
■ Using the ottoman (if equipped)
● Do not sit on the ottoman.
If someone sits on the ottoman, the seat belt cannot be fitted properly, and they may be thrown from the seat, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
3-3. Adjusting the seats
123
● When getting in or out of the vehicle, retract the ottoman. If the ottoman is not retracted, it may cause a fall, resulting in injury.
● Do not operate the ottoman when the vehicle is moving.
● Do not allow anyone to put their hands or feet under the rear seat when stowing the ottoman.
NOTICE
■ To prevent an ottoman malfunction (if equipped)
● Do not place any objects in the rear seat footwell that could prevent the operation of the ottoman.
● Do not place heavy luggage on the ottoman.
● Do not place any objects under the ottoman while it is raised for use. These objects may interfere with the ottoman being folded, causing damage to the ottoman or the objects themselves.
■ To prevent a rear display malfunction
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to move the rear display by hand, as doing so may damage the rear display.
Adjustment procedure
■ Manual operation
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(
→ P.308) and then touch “Seat”.
2 Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
124
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3 Select the button for the desired adjustment.
met, the preset buttons will be grayed out.
A
D
E
B
C
Head restraint adjustment
( →
Shoulder bolster adjustment
Lumbar/pelvic support adjustment
Seatback angle adjustment
Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment
F Ottoman adjustment (if equipped)
4 Perform adjustment using the displayed buttons.
The seat will move while a button is touched.
■ Automatic operation
The seat can be moved to preset positions.
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
( →
2 Touch the desired preset button.
When the operating conditions are not
A Moves the left-hand rear seat to the upright position (Business Mode)
B Moves the right-hand rear seat to the upright position (Business
Mode)
C Moves the rear seat with an ottoman to a slightly reclined position
(Entertainment Mode) (if equipped)
Vehicle without rear seat entertainment system: Moves the front passenger’s seat forward.
Vehicle with rear seat entertainment system: Moves the front passenger’s seat and rear display to allow the rear display to be comfortably viewed.
D Moves the rear seat with an ottoman to a deeply reclined position
(Relaxation Mode) (if equipped)
Moves the front passenger’s seat forward and folds the seatback and head restraint forward.
To stop the front passenger seat while it is moving, touch “STOP”.
■ Adjustment of the rear seat
When a rear seat is close to a front seat, the operation of the rear seat may be restricted.
■ Operating conditions of Business Mode
When the rear seat belt is not fastened and
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
weight is not detected on the rear seat,
Business Mode cannot be selected.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
■ The rear seat with an ottoman cannot be moved to Entertainment Mode/Relaxation Mode when (if equipped)
In the following situations, Entertainment
Mode or Relaxation Mode cannot be selected:
● The engine switch is in ACCESSORY mode or off.
● The rear seat belt is not fastened and weight is not detected on the rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on the front passenger’s seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the front passenger’s door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● The front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
● The front passenger’s door is open.
■ When the front passenger’s seat is folded forward
■ Automatic angle adjustment of the rear displays (if equipped)
When a seat is adjusted, the angle of the rear display will be adjusted automatically to maintain an optimal viewing angle for the rear display from the rear seat.
■ Operation after the engine switch is turned off
After a certain time elapses after the engine switch is turned off, the following parts of the rear seats will move to their neutral positions.
3-3. Adjusting the seats
125
● Shoulder bolster
● Lumbar/pelvic support
■ Seat return function linked to the door opening operation
The rear seat will return to the upright position automatically when the rear door is opened for easier entry and exit of the vehicle.
For the rear seat with an ottoman (if equipped): When the rear door on the side with the rear seat with an ottoman is opened, the seatback of the rear seat with an ottoman will move to a more upright position. The seatback will move to the upright position after the door is closed and the system determines that the rear passenger has exited.
However, if the armrest is stowed, the rear seat will not move.
■ Shift-linked rear seat reclining function
When the shift position is shifted from P, to enhance rear visibility for the driver, the rear seats will recline slightly.
However, the shift-linked rear seat reclining function will not operate in the following situations:
● The weight of an occupant or heavy object, etc. is detected on a rear seat.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● A rear seat belt is fastened.
● A rear door is open.
● The armrest is stowed.
When a front seat is close to a rear seat, the rear seats may not operate or the range of movement may be restricted.
■ Pre-collision seatbacks for the passenger seats
→
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
126
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Returning the rear seat from the front seats
1 Press the seat switch.
2 Press the sub function button of the
Remote Touch. ( →
3 Select .
The rear seat will move to the upright position.
WARNING
■ When returning the rear seats to the neutral position
To avoid injuring the rear passengers, wait until they have gotten out of the vehicle before operating the switch.
Rear seat relaxation system (if equipped)
The rear seat relaxation system utilizes pneumatic chambers and dedicated heaters, and applies pressure to the occupant’s body at different modes and intensities.
To display the rear seat relaxation system screen, display the home screen on the Rear Multi Operation Panel
(
→ P.308) and then touch “Relax-
ation”.
■ Operation of the rear seats from the front seats
In the following situations, the rear seats cannot be operated from the front seats.
● When the armrest is stowed and weight of an occupant, heavy object, etc. is detected on a rear seat
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● When the armrest is stowed and a rear seat belt is fastened.
A Touch to select the desired rear seat.
B Touch to select the desired mode.
When a button is touched, operation will begin.
C Touch to adjust the intensity.
The intensity can be adjusted in 5 steps.
D Touch to turn the spot heaters on/off.
E Touch to stop the operation.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Driving position memory
127
If a seat is not occupied, do not operate the rear seat relaxation system for that seat.
■ Relaxation system
● Operating conditions
• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
• The temperature in the cabin is not extremely high.
• The weight of an occupant is detected on the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
● Automatic stop function
• The operation will be canceled automatically after approximately 15 minutes.
• If the door for a seat that the relaxation system is currently being used is opened, the relaxation system will stop operating.
WARNING
■ Using the relaxation system
● Those who are pregnant, have recently given birth, or suffer from ailments requiring rest (heart disease etc.) should consult a doctor before use.
● Do not allow children to use the relaxation function.
● Do not use immediately after consuming a meal or alcohol, or for an extended period of time.
● If you feel sick while using the relaxation function, immediately discontinue use.
This feature automatically adjusts the positions of the front seats, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and head-up display (if equipped) to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to suit your preferences.
Up to 3 different driving positions can be recorded.
Each electronic key (including a card key) can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.
Power easy access system
The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.
Driver’s seat
When all of the following have been performed, the seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to a position that allows driver to enter and exit the vehicle easily.
• The shift position has been shifted to
P.
• The engine switch has been turned off.
• The driver’s seat belt has been unfastened.
When the driver’s seat adjustment switches are in front passenger mode
(
→ P.118), the seat and steering wheel will
not move.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
128
3-3. Adjusting the seats
On vehicles with adjustable seat cushion side bolsters, when the driver’s door is opened with the engine switch off, the seat cushion side bolsters will lower if they are in the default position.
When any of the following has been performed, the seat and steering wheel automatically return to their original positions.
• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.
Front passenger’s seat
If all of the following have been performed while the vehicle is stopped, the lumbar support, pelvic support, shoulder bolster (if equipped), seatback side bolster (if equipped), and hip support (if equipped) will be moved to their default position. On vehicles with adjustable seat cushion side bolsters, the seat cushion side bolsters will lower.
• The passenger’s seat belt has been unfastened.
• The front passenger’s door is opened.
■ Operation of the power easy access system
● When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is already in the rearmost or uppermost position or close to the rear seat.
● If the seat position is adjusted during power easy access system operation, the automatic operation will stop. (The seat will change to manual operation.)
● If the seat position is adjusted during or after the power easy access system operation when the driver is exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system will not operate when entering the vehicle.
■ Seat cushion side bolster adjustment (if equipped)
If the seat cushion side bolsters have been lowered, when the front door is closed, the seat cushion side bolsters will move to their default position.
If the seat is adjusted while the seat cushion side bolsters are moving to the default position, their movement will be temporarily suspended. (The seat cushion side bolsters will move to the default position after a certain amount of time.)
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
Recording a driving position into memory
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
3 Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and head-up display (if equipped) to the desired positions.
4 While pressing the “SET” button, or within 3 seconds after the “SET”
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
button is pressed, press button “1”,
“2” or “3” until the buzzer sounds.
If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.
When the driver’s seat adjustment switches are in front passenger mode
( →
P.118), the position of the driver’s seat
cannot be registered.
3-3. Adjusting the seats
129
3 Press one of the buttons for the driving position you want to recall until the buzzer sounds.
When the driver’s seat adjustment switches are in front passenger mode
(
→ P.118), a driving position cannot be
recalled.
To record the position of the front passenger’s seat, adjust the front passenger’s seat to the desired position and perform step 4 using the buttons on the front passenger’s side.
■ In order to correctly use the driving position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
Recalling a driving position
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
■ To stop the position recall operation part-way through
Perform any of the following operations:
● Press the “SET” button.
● Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.
● Press the mode change button.
● Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).
● Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel position recall).
■ Recalling a driving position
If a driving position is recalled, the movement of the front seat may be stopped partway if the seat moves close to the rear seat.
If a rear passenger is determined to be in the vehicle, the rearward movement of the front seat may be stopped partway to ensure sufficient space for the rear passenger.
■ Recalling the front passenger’s seat position (vehicles with a rear seat with an ottoman)
If the ottoman of the rear seat is extended, the front passenger’s seat position cannot be recalled.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
130
3-3. Adjusting the seats
■ Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off
Driver’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.
Front passenger’s seat:
Recorded seat positions can be recalled up to 180 seconds after the front passenger’s door is opened.
Registering/canceling/recall a driving position to an electronic key (including a card key) (memory recall function)
■ Registering procedure
Record your driving position to button
“1”, “2” or “3” before performing the following:
Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded properly.
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
3 Recall the driving position that you want to record.
4 While pressing the recalled button, press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds.
If the button could not be registered, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Cancelation procedure
Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door.
If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled properly.
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2 Check that the shift position is in P.
3 While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch
(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.
If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approximately 3 seconds.
■ Recall procedure
1 Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position. Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position, and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control.
The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering wheel and head-up display [if equipped]). However, the seat will move to a position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehi-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
cle easier.
If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and outside rear view mirrors will not move.
2 Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or IGNITION ON mode, or fasten a seat belt.
The seat, steering wheel and head-up display (if equipped) will move to the recorded position.
■ Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function
● Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.
● If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart access system with push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving position button which has been set.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Rear seat position memory
*
131
* : If equipped
The rear seat position can be memorized and recalled with the touch of a button.
Recording a position into memory
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
(
→ P.308) and then touch “Seat”.
3 Touch “Left” or “Right”.
4 Adjust the rear seat to the desired position and then touch “Set Memory”.
5 Touch “1” or “2”.
If the preset is being used, the previously recorded seat position will be overwritten.
■ In order to correctly use the position memory function
If a seat position is already in the furthest possible position and the seat is operated in the same direction, the recorded position may be slightly different when it is recalled.
3
WARNING
■ Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment so that the rear passengers do not strike the front seats.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
132
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Recalling the memorized position
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
2 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
( →
3 Touch “1” or “2”.
When the operating conditions are not met, the buttons will be grayed out.
To stop the operation touch “STOP”.
If the seat is adjusted while a memorized position is being recalled, the automatic operation will stop. (The seat will change to manual operation.)
■ Operating condition
The weight of an occupant is detected on the rear seat or the rear seat belt is fastened.
Once weight is detected on the seat, the seat will be judged as occupied until the rear door is opened then closed or the engine switch is turned off.
■ Recalling a rear seat position
If a memorized rear seat position is recalled, the seat may stop part-way to ensure sufficient space for the rear passenger.
■ Recalling the ottoman position (if equipped)
When a seat position is recalled, the ottoman will not raise or extend. The ottoman position can only be recalled if the memorized position is lower and shorter than the current position.
Head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Vehicles with power rear seat: The head restraint for the rear center seat is integrated into the seatback and cannot be adjusted.
WARNING
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● Manual type: After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Adjusting a head restraint vertically and horizontally (power head restraints)
Front seats
1 Press the seat switch.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2 Using the Remote Touch pad, select “Driver Seat Adjustment” or
“Passenger Seat Adjustment”.
3 Select then the desired adjust-
B C D adjust the head restraint.
E
3-3. Adjusting the seats
133
D
E
B
C
Up
Backward
Down
Forward
The head restraint moves while the adjustment button is touched.
Adjusting a head restraint vertically (manual head restraints)
3
B Up
C Backward
D Down
E Forward
The head restraint moves while the adjustment button is selected.
Rear seats
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel
( →
2 Touch “Left” or “Right”.
3 Touch then the desired adjust-
B C D adjust the head restraint.
E
1 Up
Pull the head restraints up.
2 Down
Push the head restraint down while pressing the lock release button A .
■ Front seat head restraints (power head restraints)
Depending on the position of the front seat, the front head restraint may not be able to be adjusted upward if it is close to the ceiling.
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
Make sure that the head restraints are
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
134
3-3. Adjusting the seats adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
(manual head restraints)
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
Adjusting a head restraint horizontally (manual head restraints)
The position of the head restraint can be adjusted forward in 4 stages.
If the head restraint is pulled forward from the foremost position, it will return to the rearmost position.
Removing the head restraints
(manual head restraints)
Pull the head restraint up while press-
Adjusting the side supports (if equipped)
Push the sides of the head restraint.
■ Removing the head restraints (power head restraints)
For removal and installation of the head restraint, contact your Lexus dealer.
Installing the head restraints
(manual head restraints)
Align the head restraint with the installation holes and push it down to the lock position.
Press and hold the lock release button
A when lowering the head restraint.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-4.Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel
Adjustment procedure
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Operating the switch moves the steering wheel in the following directions:
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
135
Sounding the horn
Press on or close to the mark.
3
1 Up
2 Down
3 Toward the driver
4 Away from the driver
■ The steering wheel can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode * .
* : If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of engine switch mode.
■ Automatic adjustment of the steering position
A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory system.
( →
■ Power easy access system
The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and the driver’s seat belt condition. ( →
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
136
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Inside rear view mirror
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.
When the automatic anti-glare function is in ON mode, the indicator A illuminates.
The function will set to ON mode each time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Pressing the button turns the function to
OFF mode. (The indicator A also turns off.)
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view mirror by moving it up and down.
■ To prevent sensor error
To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do not touch or cover them.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
Anti-glare function
Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turn the automatic anti-glare function mode on/off
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Outside rear view mirrors
2 To adjust the mirror, press the switch.
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view.
137
WARNING
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
Adjustment procedure
1 To select a mirror to adjust, press the switch.
The indicator comes on.
A Left
B Right
Pressing the same switch again will put the switch in neutral.
A
B
C
D
Up
Right
Down
Left
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.
■ Defogging the mirrors
The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers.
(
■ Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (
■ Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the driving position memory. (
■ Linked mirror function when reversing
When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground.
To disable this function, select neither “L”
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
138
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors nor “R”.
To set the mirror angle used when the vehicle is reversing, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position with the shift position in R.
The adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the memorized angle whenever the shift position is shifted to R from next time.
The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position
(angle adjusted with the shift position in other than R). Therefore, if the normal position is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.
When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.
locking/unlocking of the doors.
Press the “AUTO” switch to set automatic mode.
The indicator A will come on.
Pressing the switch once more will return to manual mode.
WARNING
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
Folding and extending the mirrors
■ Using the switch
Press the switch to fold the mirrors.
Press it again to extend them to the original position.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The automatic folding/extending mirror function will return to off as default. To turn the function on, press the switch again to select on.
■ Using automatic mode in cold weather
When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze up and automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this case, remove any ice and snow from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror using manual mode or move the mirror by hand.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
WARNING
■ When a mirror is moving
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ Setting automatic mode
Automatic mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-5.Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Opening and closing the power windows
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
1 Closing
2 One-touch closing *
3 Opening
4 One-touch opening *
* : To stop the window partway, operate the switch in the opposite direction.
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ When the driver’s power window switch is used to open a rear power window
(vehicles with rear door sunshades)
If a rear door sunshade is extended or being extended when the driver’s power window switch is pushed, only the rear door sunshade will be retracted. To open the rear power window from the driver’s seat, push the driver’s power window switch again.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine off
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
139 engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the window is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ Catch protection function
If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening, window movement is stopped.
■ When the side window cannot be opened or closed
When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and the side window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the power window switch of that door.
● Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds of the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously operate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening direction so that the side window can be opened and closed.
● If the side window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.
1 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
2 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and completely close the side window.
3 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.
4 Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After the side window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional 1 second or more.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
140
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
5 Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or more.
6 Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again. After the side window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a further 1 second or more.
If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.
If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Door lock linked window operation
● The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(
*
● The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.
* ( →
* : These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ Power windows open warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the power windows open.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. ( →
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also do not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child.
There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the window.
■ Catch protection function
● Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protection function.
● The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or closing caught in the window.
141
■ When the battery is disconnected
The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after reconnecting the battery.
3
Preventing accidental operation
(window lock switch)
This function can be used to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.
Press the switch.
The indicator A will come on and the passenger windows will be locked.
The passenger windows can still be opened and closed using the driver’s switch even if the lock switch is on.
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
142
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Moon roof
*
* : If equipped
Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and down.
Operating the moon roof
■ Opening and closing
1 Opens the moon roof *
The moon roof tilts up and then fully opens.
2 Closes the moon roof
*
* : Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
■ Tilting up and down
1 Tilts the moon roof up
*
2 Tilts the moon roof down *
* : Lightly press either side of the moon roof switch to stop the moon roof partway.
■ The moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■ Door lock linked moon roof operation
● The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
*
( →
● The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.
*
( →
*
: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10 seconds. Then it will close again and stop at the completely closed position.
3 Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the switch.
* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
If the moon roof does not fully close even
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Opening the moon roof
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ If the moon roof does not move normally
If the moon roof does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Press and hold the “DOWN” switch.
*
The moon roof will stop at the tilt-up position. After that, it will open, close, tilt up, tilt down, and stop at the fully closed position.
3 Confirm that the moon roof has completely stopped and release the switch.
* : If you release the switch while the moon roof is moving, perform the procedure again from the beginning.
If, after performing the above procedures correctly, the moon roof still does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Moon roof open warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
●
WARNING
Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■
●
Opening and closing the moon roof
143
● The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.
In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child.
There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
144
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof is fully closed.
Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the moon roof switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.
Panoramic moon roof
*
* : If equipped
Use the overhead switches to operate the panoramic moon roof and electronic roof sunshade.
Operating the panoramic moon roof
■ Opening and closing the electronic front roof sunshade
1 Opens the electronic front roof sunshade *
2 Closes the electronic front roof sunshade *
If the panoramic moon roof is not fully closed, it will close fully before the electronic front roof sunshade closes.
* : Lightly press either side of the front roof sunshade switch to stop the electronic front roof sunshade partway.
■ Opening and closing the electronic rear roof sunshade
Rear roof sunshade switch
Press the rear roof sunshade switch.
Lightly press the switch while the electronic rear roof sunshade is opening/closing will stop the operation.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
Press the switch again will operate the electronic rear roof sunshade in the opposite direction.
The panoramic moon roof can be tilted
145 down only when it is in the tilt-up position.
Lightly press the switch while the panoramic moon roof is operating will stop the operation.
Rear Multi Operation Panel
1 Display the Home screen
( →
“Shade/Lamp”.
2 Touch the button for the desired operation.
■ Opening and closing the panoramic moon roof
3
A
B
Closes the electronic rear roof sunshade
Opens the electronic rear roof sunshade
If a button is touched while the electronic rear roof sunshade is opening/closing, the opening/closing operation will stop.
■ Tilting the panoramic moon roof up and down
Press the tilt switch.
When the panoramic moon roof is tilted up, the electronic front roof sunshade will open.
1 Opens the panoramic moon roof *
When the panoramic moon roof is opened, the electronic front roof sunshade will open.
The panoramic moon roof can be opened from the tilt-up position.
2 Closes the panoramic moon roof *
* : Lightly press either side of the panoramic moon roof switch to stop the panoramic moon roof partway.
■ The panoramic moon roof can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
146
■ Operating the panoramic moon roof after turning the engine off
The panoramic moon roof and electronic roof sunshade can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the panoramic moon roof and the frame in the following situations, travel is stopped and the panoramic moon roof opens slightly:
● The panoramic moon roof is closing or tilting down.
● The electronic roof sunshade is closing.
■ Door lock linked panoramic moon roof operation
● The panoramic moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
* (
● The panoramic moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control.
* ( →
* : These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.
■ When the panoramic moon roof or electronic front roof sunshade does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch or the front roof sunshade close switch.
Continue pressing the switch for approximately 10 seconds after the panoramic moon roof or electronic front roof sunshade closes and reopens.
The panoramic moon roof and electronic front roof sunshade will start to close.
*
4 Check that the panoramic moon roof and electronic front roof sunshade are fully closed and release the switch.
* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be per-
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof formed again from the beginning.
If the panoramic moon roof or electronic front roof sunshade does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ When the electronic rear roof sunshade does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3 Press and hold the rear roof sunshade switch. Continue pressing the switch for approximately 10 seconds after the electronic rear roof sunshade closes and reopens. The electronic rear roof sunshade will start to close.
*
4 Check that the electronic rear roof sunshade are fully closed and release the switch.
* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
If the panoramic moon roof or electronic front roof sunshade does not fully close even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If the panoramic moon roof or electronic front roof sunshade does not move normally
If the panoramic moon roof or electronic front roof sunshade does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3 Fully close the panoramic moon roof and electronic front roof sunshade.
4 Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.
*
The electronic front roof sunshade will open after approximately 10 seconds. Then the panoramic moon roof will open, close, tilt up and tilt down. After that, the electronic front roof sunshade will fully close and stop.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
5 Check that the panoramic moon roof and electronic front roof sunshade are fully closed and release the switch.
* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
If, after performing the above procedures correctly, the panoramic moon roof and electronic front roof sunshade still does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If the electronic rear roof sunshade does not move normally
If the electronic rear roof sunshade does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, perform the following initialization procedure.
1 Stop the vehicle.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3 Open the rear roof sunshade.
4 Press and hold the rear roof sunshade switch.
*
Continue pressing the switch for approximately 10 seconds after the electronic rear roof sunshade closes. The electronic rear roof sunshade will begin operating again and stop at the fully closed position.
5 Check that the electronic rear roof sunshade are fully closed and release the switch.
* : If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be performed again from the beginning.
If, after performing the above procedures correctly, the electronic rear roof sunshade still does not open or close normally or the automatic opening function does not operate, have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■ Panoramic moon roof open warning buzzer
A buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the panoramic moon roof open.
■
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Opening and closing the electronic roof sunshade
■
●
Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
WARNING
147
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the electronic sunshade is being operated.
● Do not let a child operate the electronic sunshade. Closing the electronic roof sunshade on someone can cause death or serious injury.
Opening the panoramic moon roof
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.
Do not sit on top of the panoramic moon roof.
3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
148
3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof
WARNING
■ Opening and closing the panoramic moon roof
● The driver is responsible for panoramic moon roof opening and closing operations. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the panoramic moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the panoramic moon roof.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when the panoramic moon roof is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child.
There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the panoramic moon roof or electronic roof sunshade is fully closed. Also, the jam protection function is not designed to operate while the switch is being pressed. Take care so that your fingers, etc. do not get caught.
■ To prevent burns or injuries
Do not touch the area between the underside of the panoramic moon roof and the electronic sunshade. Your hand may get caught and you could injure yourself. Also, if the vehicle is left in direct sunlight for a long time, the underside of the panoramic moon roof could become very hot and could cause burns.
● When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the panoramic moon roof, operate the panoramic moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the panoramic moon roof. Also, do not let a child operate panoramic moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the panoramic moon roof.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the panoramic moon roof
● Before opening the panoramic moon roof, make sure that there are no foreign objects, such as stones or ice, around the opening.
● Do not hit the surface or edge of the panoramic moon roof with hard objects.
■ After the vehicle has been washed or rained on
Before opening the panoramic moon roof, wipe any water off the panoramic moon roof. Otherwise, water may enter the cabin when the panoramic moon roof is opened.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
149
Driving
4
.
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle.....................
Cargo and luggage...................
Vehicle load limits......................
Trailer towing...............................
Dinghy towing .............................
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch ...........
Automatic transmission...........
Turn signal lever..........................
Parking brake ..............................
Brake Hold....................................
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch.........................
AHB (Automatic High Beam)
.........................................................
Windshield wipers and washer
.........................................................
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap......
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+A...........
Lexus Safety System+ ..............
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A) .......................................
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+)
.........................................................
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
........................................................
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) ......
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
........................................................
RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
.......................................................
Intuitive parking assist.............
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function.......................................
RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function.......................................
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)
.........................................................
Parking Support Brake function
(static objects).........................
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) ......
Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) ..................
Driving mode select switch ..
Electronically modulated air suspension........................................
Driving assist systems..............
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips....................
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
150
4-1. Before driving
4-1.Before driving
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:
Driving procedure
■ Starting the engine
→
■ Driving
1 With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift position to D.
( →
Check that the shift position indicator shows D.
2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake.
( →
3 Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
1 With the shift position in D, depress the brake pedal.
2 If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift position to P. ( →
■ Parking the vehicle
1 With the shift position in D, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle completely.
2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake.
( →
3 Shift the shift position to P.
( →
4 Press the engine switch to stop the engine.
5 Slowly release the brake pedal.
6 Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
■ Starting off on a steep uphill
1 Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift position to D.
Hill-start assist control will operate.
(
2 Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
3 Release the parking brake.
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
● When the brake pedal is depressed
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Restraining the engine output (Brake
Override System)
● When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine output may be restrained.
● A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is operating.
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start
Control)
● When the following unusual operation is performed, the engine output may be restrained.
• When the shift position is shifted from R
* , or P to R * (D to D, D to R, N to R, P to D includes M) with the accelerator pedal depressed, a warning message appears on the multi-information display. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instruction.
• When the accelerator pedal is depressed too much while the vehicle is in reverse.
* : Depending on the situation, the shift position may not be changed.
● While Drive-Start Control is being activated, your vehicle may have trouble escaping from the mud or fresh snow. In such case, deactivate TRAC ( →
to cancel Drive-Start Control so that the vehicle may become able to escape from the mud or fresh snow.
■ Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:
● For the first 186 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 621 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake
4-1. Before driving
151 shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your
Lexus dealer perform the bedding down operation.
■ Brake pads and discs (F SPORT models)
The brake pads and discs are designed for use under high load conditions. Therefore, brake noise may be generated depending on the vehicle speed, braking force and vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.).
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. ( →
■ Idling time before engine stop
To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately after high-speed driving or hill climbing.
4
Driving condition
Normal city driving
Idling time
Not necessary
High-speed driving (Constant speed of approx. 62 mph [100km/h])
Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 62 mph (100 km/h) or more (race track driving etc.)
Not necessary
Approximately 1 minute
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
152
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A: During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should putt over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:
● Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A:
During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost.
This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
In the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way:
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. ( →
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift position
● Do not let the vehicle roll backward while a forward driving position is selected, or roll forward while the shift position is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● Do not shift the shift position to P while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift position to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Do not shift the shift position to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Changing the shift position to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission.
Engine braking is not available when N is selected.
4-1. Before driving
153
● Be careful not to change the shift position with the accelerator pedal depressed. Changing the shift position to any positions other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
After changing the shift position, make sure to confirm the current shift position displayed on the shift position indicator inside the meter.
■ Brake pad wear
If any of the following situations occurs, have the brake pads visually checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
● If the thickness of the brake pads exceeds the brake pad wear limit when visually checking all four brake pads
(for the brake pad wear limit, refer to
● If a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display (only the right-side pads can be detected)
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
F SPORT models: Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
154
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift position to P, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
If the vehicle is parked with the shift position in P but the parking brake is not set, the vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A: If the brake booster device does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A:
If the electronically controlled brake system does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
● Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A: Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
● Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A: The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
● Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A:
The brake system consists of 2 or more individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other(s) will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck
Do not spin the wheels excessively when a driven wheel is up in the air, or the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
4-1. Before driving
155
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as this may restrain the engine output.
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
● Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-load driving. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger has cooled down.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
156
4-1. Before driving
NOTICE
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Lexus dealer check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission, transfer (AWD models), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
If the shift control system is damaged by flooding, it may not be possible to shift the shift position to P, or from P to other positions. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ When parking the vehicle
Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift position to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load:
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit —
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750
(5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and lug-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
gage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
( →
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.
Calculation formula for your vehicle
A Cargo capacity
B Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) ( →
When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity
(vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:
B
*2
lb. (kg) - A
*1
lb. (kg) = C
*3
lb. (kg)
*1 : A =Weight of people
*2 : B =Total load capacity
4-1. Before driving
157
*3 : C =Available cargo and luggage load
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:
C lb. (kg) - D
*4
lb. (kg) = E
*5
lb. (kg)
*4 : D =Additional weight of people
*5 : E =Available cargo and luggage load
As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
WARNING
■ Things that must not be carried in the trunk
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
158
4-1. Before driving
WARNING
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger or rear seats
(when stacking items)
• On the package tray
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
• In front of the Center Display
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.
Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.
Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.
Seating capacity:5 occupants
(Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
Towing capacity
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (
WARNING
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Trailer towing
Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.
4-1. Before driving
Dinghy towing
159
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with the four wheels on the ground.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
160
4-2. Driving procedures
4-2.Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.
Starting the engine
1 Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set.
( →
The parking brake indicator will come on.
2 Firmly depress the brake pedal.
and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.
3 Press the engine switch shortly and firmly.
When operating the engine switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.
The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is completely started.
The engine can be started from any engine switch mode.
■ Engine switch illumination
According to the situation, the engine switch illumination operates as follows.
● When a door is opened, or the engine switch mode is changed from ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode to off, the engine switch illumination slowly blinks.
● When depressing the brake pedal with carrying the electronic key on your person, the engine switch illumination rapidly blinks.
● When the engine switch is in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode, the engine switch illumination illuminates.
■ If the engine does not start
● The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. ( →
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● If a message related to start-up is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ If the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started using the smart access system with push-button start.
Refer to P.438 to restart the engine.
■ Electronic key battery depletion
→
■ Conditions affecting operation
→
■ Notes for the entry function
→
■ Steering lock function
● After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.
● When the steering lock cannot be released, “Push Engine Switch While
Turning Steering Wheel in Either Direction” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Press the engine switch shortly and firmly
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
while turning the steering wheel left and right.
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Caution while driving
If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
161
● To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, operation of the motor may be suspended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the engine switch. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.
■ Electronic key battery
■ Operation of the engine switch
● If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.
● If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the engine may not start in some cases.
After turning the engine switch off, please wait a few seconds before restarting the engine.
■ Customization
If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized
WARNING
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch
If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
Stopping the engine
1 Stop the vehicle completely.
2 If the parking brake is in manual mode, set the parking brake.
(
3 Shift the shift position to P.
(
Check that the shift position indicator shows P. ( →
4 Press the engine switch.
The engine will stop, and the meter display will be extinguished (the shift position indicator will be extinguished a few seconds after the meter display).
5 Release the brake pedal and check that “ACCESSORY” or “IGNI-
TION ON” is not shown on the meter.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
162
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Automatic P position selection function
WARNING
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
● If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly
3 times or more in succession.
( →
However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, however, power assist to the steering will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer smoothly, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
● If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.
● When restarting the engine after an emergency shutdown, press the engine switch.
Changing engine switch modes
Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)
1 Off
The emergency flashers can be used.
2 ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.
“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the meter.
3 IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can be used.
“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on the meter.
■ Auto power off function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION
ON mode (with the engine not running) for more than an hour with the shift position in
P, the engine switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent the battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ When the shift control system malfunctions
When attempting to turn the engine switch off while there is a malfunction in the shift control system, the engine switch mode may change to ACCESSORY mode. In this case, ACCESSORY mode may be turned off by applying the parking brake and pressing the engine switch again. If there is a malfunction in the system, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Do not leave the engine switch in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running.
● If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION
ON” is displayed on the meter, the engine switch is not off.
Exit the vehicle after turning the engine switch off.
4-2. Driving procedures
Automatic transmission
Select the shift position depending on your purpose and situation.
163
Shift position purpose and functions
Shift position
Objective or function
P
R
N
Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
Reversing
Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D Normal driving *1
M M mode driving *2 (
*1 : To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noise, set the shift position in D for normal driving. You can choose gear range suitable for your driving situation by operating the paddle shift switches.
*2 : Any gear range can be fixed when driving in M mode.
■ For the shift positions
● When the engine switch is off or in
ACCESSORY mode, the shift position cannot be changed.
● When the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, the shift position can only be changed to N.
● When the engine is running, the shift position can be changed from P to D, N or R.
● The shift position can only be changed to
M directly from D.
In addition, if an attempt is made to change
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
164
4-2. Driving procedures the shift position by moving the shift lever or by pressing the P position switch in any of the following situations, the buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled or the shift position will automatically change to N. When this happens, select an appropriate shift position.
● Situations where the shifting operation will be disabled:
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P to another position by moving the shift lever without depressing the brake pedal.
• When an attempt is made to change the shift position from P or N to M by moving the shift lever.
• When the P position switch is pressed while the vehicle is running.
*1
● Situations where the shift position will automatically change to N:
• When an attempt is made to select the R position by moving the shift lever when the vehicle is moving forward.
*2
• When an attempt is made to select the D position by moving the shift lever when the vehicle is moving in reverse.
*3
• When the shift position is changed from
R to M
● If N is selected while driving at a certain speed, even if the shift lever is not held in the N position, the shift position changes to N. In this situation, the buzzer sounds and a confirmation message is displayed on the multi-information display to inform the driver that the shift position has changed to N.
*1 : Shift position may be changed to P when driving at extremely low speeds.
*2 : Shift position may be changed to R when driving at low speeds.
*3 : Shift position may be changed to D when driving at low speeds.
■ Reverse warning buzzer
When shifting into R, a buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the shift position is in
R.
■ To protect the automatic transmission
If the automatic transmission fluid temperature is high, “Transmission Fluid Temp High
See Owner’s Manual” will be displayed on the multi-information display and the vehicle will go into transmission protection mode automatically. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ When driving with dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activated
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking, engine braking will not be activated because dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range will not be canceled.
● While driving in the D position, downshifting to 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 or 4.
● When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in the D position
( →
■ Restraining sudden start (Drive-Start
Control)
→
■ AI-SHIFT
The AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift position is in D. (Shifting the shift position to the M position cancels the function.)
■ If a message about a shift operation is shown
To prevent the shift position from being selected incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, the shift position may be changed automatically or operating the shift lever may be required. In this case, change the shift position following the messages on the multi-information display.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
→
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift the shift position suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an accident.
NOTICE
■ Situations where shift control system malfunctions are possible
If any of the following situations occurs, shift control system malfunctions are possible.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place on level ground, apply the parking brake, and then contact your Lexus dealer.
● When the warning message indicating the shift control system appears on the multi-information display.
● The display indicates that no shift position is selected for more than a few seconds.
4-2. Driving procedures
Shifting the shift lever
165
A Shift lever
Operate the shift lever gently and securely in the direction of the arrow on the shift position indicator.
To shift to N, slide the shift lever in the direction of the arrow and hold it.
Release the shift lever after each shifting operation to allow it to return to its regular position ( ).
Shifting to M is only possible when the shift position is in D.
When shifting from P to N, D or R, from N,
D, M or R to P, from D or M to R, or from R to D, ensure that the brake pedal is being depressed and the vehicle is stationary.
B Shift position indicator
Meter display:
The current shift position is highlighted.
When any shift position other than D or M is selected, the arrow toward M and the M position indicator are displayed in gray.
Shift lever display:
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
166
4-2. Driving procedures
The current shift position is illuminated.
When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indicator provided on the instrument cluster.
C P position switch
WARNING
■ For the shift lever
● Do not remove the shift lever knob or use anything but a genuine Lexus shift lever knob. Also, do not hang anything on the shift lever.
Doing so could prevent the shift lever from returning to position, causing unexpected accidents to occur when the vehicle is in motion.
● In order to prevent the shift position from accidentally being changed, do not touch the shift lever when not using them.
P position switch
■ When shifting the shift position to P
Fully stop the vehicle and set the parking brake, and then press the P position switch.
When the shift position is changed to P, the switch illuminates.
Check that the shift position indicator shows P.
■ Shifting the shift position from P to other positions
While depressing the brake pedal firmly, operate the shift lever. If the shift lever is operated without depressing the brake pedal, the buzzer will sound and the shifting operation will be disabled.
When selecting the shift position, make sure that the shift position has been changed to the desired position by checking the shift position indicator provided on the instrument cluster.
The shift position cannot be changed from P to M directly.
■ Automatic P position selection function
In the following situations, the shift position is automatically changed to P.
● When pressing the engine switch with the vehicle stopped while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the shift position is in a position other than P (after the shift position has changed to P, the engine switch will turn off) *
● When the vehicle is stopped after the engine has been stopped in an emergency while driving
● When voltage of the battery drops while the shift position is in a position other than
P
* : When the engine switch is pressed while driving at extremely slow speeds, such as immediately before stopping the vehicle, the shift position may automatically change to P. Make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before pressing the engine switch.
■ If the shift position cannot be shifted from P
There is a possibility that the battery is dis-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-2. Driving procedures
167 charged. Check the battery in this situation.
( →
WARNING
■ P position switch
● Do not press the P position switch while the vehicle is moving.
If the P position switch is pressed when driving at very low speeds (for example, directly before stopping the vehicle), the vehicle may stop suddenly when the shift position switches to P, which could lead to an accident.
● In order to prevent the shift position from accidentally being changed, do not touch the P position switch or shift lever when not using them.
NOTICE
■ Notes regarding shift lever and P position switch operation
Avoid repeatedly operating the shift lever and P position switch in quick succession.
The system protection function may activate and it will not be temporarily possible to shift the shift position other than P.
If this happens, please wait for a while before attempting to change the shift position again.
Selecting the driving mode
■ Driving mode
→
■ Snow mode
Snow mode can be selected to suit the conditions when driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.
Turn the snow mode switch backward.
The snow mode indicator illuminates.
Turn the snow mode switch backward again to return to normal mode.
A
B
Except F SPORT models
F SPORT models
■ Snow mode automatic deactivation
Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned off after driving in snow mode.
Selecting shift ranges in the D position
To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift switch.
When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range switches to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions. When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range switches to a range that is one range higher than the current range.
Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest gear, preventing unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be selected.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
168
4-2. Driving procedures
A Except F SPORT models
B F SPORT models
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The selected shift range, from D1 to D10, will be displayed on the meter.
To return to normal D position driving, the
“+” paddle shift switch must be held down for a period of time.
Meter display
Function
D2 - D10
D1
A gear in the range between
D1 and the selected shift range is automatically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving conditions
Setting the shift range at D1
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift range.
■ Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position
Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:
● When the vehicle comes to a stop
● If the accelerator pedal is depressed for more than a certain period of time
● When the shift position is shifted to a position other than D.
● When pressing and holding the “+” paddle shift switch
■ Downshifting restriction warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
Selecting gears in the M position
To enter M mode, shift the shift position to M. Gears can be selected by operating the paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing.
A Except F SPORT models
B F SPORT models
1 Upshifting
2 Downshifting
The gear changes once every time the paddle shift switch is operated.
The selected gear, from M1 to M10, will be fixed and displayed on the meter.
When in the M position, the gear will not change unless the paddle shift switches are operated.
However, even when in the M position, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situations:
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).
When it is necessary to protect the engine or automatic transmission when the engine coolant temperature is low, the automatic transmission fluid temperature is high or low, or other reasons.
Also, the gear will not shift when the vehicle speed is low, even if an upshift operation is performed.
■ Downshifting restriction warning buzzer
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the paddle shift switch is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)
4-2. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
Operating instructions
169
1 Right turn
2 Lane change to the right (move the lever partway and release it)
The right hand signals will flash 3 times.
3 Lane change to the left (move the lever partway and release it)
The left hand signals will flash 3 times.
4 Left turn
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
■ If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed
Operate the lever again.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
170
4-2. Driving procedures
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
Parking brake
The parking brake can be set or released automatically or manually.
In automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released automatically according to the shift lever operation. Also, even in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set or released manually.
Operating instructions
■ Using the manual mode
The parking brake can be set and released manually.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
A U.S.A.
B Canada
1 Push the switch to set the parking brake
The parking brake indicator light will turn on.
Press and hold the parking brake switch if an emergency occurs and it is necessary to operate the parking brake while driving.
2 Pull the switch to release the parking brake
• Operate the parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal.
• Using the parking brake automatic release function, the parking brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal. When using this function, slowly depress the accelerator pedal.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator light turn off.
If the parking brake indicator light flashes, operate the switch again.
( →
■ Turns automatic mode on
While the vehicle is stopped, press and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display
When the automatic mode is turned on, the parking brake operates as follows.
When the shift position is shifted
from P, the parking brake will be released, and the parking brake indicator light will turn off.
When the shift position is shifted to
P, the parking brake will be set, and the parking brake indicator light will turn on.
4-2. Driving procedures
171
Operate the shift lever and P position switch with the vehicle stopped and the brake pedal depressed.
■ Turns automatic mode off
While the vehicle is stopped, pull and hold the parking brake switch until a message is shown on the multi-information display
■ Parking brake operation
● When the engine switch is not in IGNI-
TION ON mode, the parking brake cannot be released using the parking brake switch.
● When the engine switch is not in IGNI-
TION ON mode, automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) is not available.
■ Parking brake automatic release function
● When the shift position is shifted from P, the parking brake will be released in automatic mode.
● When all of the following conditions are met in manual mode, the parking brake can be released by depressing the accelerator pedal.
• The driver’s door is closed
• The driver is wearing the seat belt
• The shift position is in D, M or R
■ If “EPB Frequently Operated Wait a
Minute” is displayed on the multi-information display
If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may restrict operation to prevent overheating. If
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
172
4-2. Driving procedures this happens, refrain from operating the parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.
■ If “EPB Activation Stopped Incompletely” or “EPB unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display
Operate the parking brake switch. If the message does not disappear after operating the switch several times, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Parking brake operation sound
When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Parking brake operation
● Depending on the engine switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will turn on and stay on as described below:
IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.
Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.
● When the engine switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indicator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ When the parking brake switch malfunctions
Automatic mode (automatic brake setting and releasing) will be turned on automatically.
■ Parking the vehicle
■ Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. “EPB
Applied” is displayed on the multi-information display. (with the vehicle reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h])
■ If the brake system warning light comes on
■ Usage in winter time
WARNING
■ When parking the vehicle
Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone.
The parking brake may be released unintentionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift position to P and make sure that the vehicle does not move.
■ When the system malfunctions
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.
■ When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Brake Hold
The brake hold system keeps the brake applied when the shift position is in D, M or N with the system on and the brake pedal has been depressed to stop the vehicle. The system releases the brake when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the shift position in D or M to allow smooth start off.
Enabling the system
Press the brake hold switch to turn the system on
The brake hold standby indicator (green)
A comes on. While the system is holding the brakes, the brake hold operated indicator (yellow) B comes on.
■ Brake hold system operating conditions
The brake hold system cannot be turned on in the following conditions:
● The driver’s door is not closed.
● The driver is not wearing the seat belt.
If any of the conditions above are detected when the brake hold system is enabled, the system will turn off and the brake hold standby indicator light will go off. In addition, if any of the conditions are detected while the system is holding the brake, a warning buzzer will sound and a message
4-2. Driving procedures
173 will be shown on the multi-information display. The parking brake will then be set automatically.
■ Brake hold function
● If the brake pedal is left released for a period of about 3 minutes after the system has started holding the brake, the parking brake will be set automatically. In this case, a warning buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display.
● To turn the system off while the system is holding the brake, firmly depress the brake pedal and press the button again.
● The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle when the vehicle is on a steep incline. In this situation, it may be necessary for the driver to apply the brakes. A warning buzzer will sound and the multi-information display will inform the driver of this situation. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ When the parking brake is set automatically while the system is holding the brakes
Perform any of the following operations to release the parking brake.
● Depress the accelerator pedal. (The parking brake will not be released automatically if the seat belt is not fastened.)
● Operate the parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
Make sure that the parking brake indicator light goes off. (
■ When an inspection at your Lexus dealer is necessary
When the brake hold standby indicator
(green) does not illuminate even when the brake hold switch is pressed with the brake hold system operating conditions met, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
174
4-2. Driving procedures
■ If “Brake Hold Fault Depress Brake to
Deactivate Visit Your Dealer” or “Brake
Hold Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multiinformation display
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Warning messages and buzzers
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ If the brake hold operated indicator flashes
WARNING
■ When the vehicle is on a steep incline
When using the brake hold system on a steep incline exercise caution. The brake hold function may not hold the vehicle in such a situation.
■ When stopped on a slippery road
The system cannot stop the vehicle when the gripping ability of the tires has been exceeded. Do not use the system when stopped on a slippery road.
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
The brake hold system is not designed for use when parking the vehicle for a long period of time. Turning the engine switch off while the system is holding the brake may release the brake, which would cause the vehicle to move. When operating the engine switch, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift position to P and set the parking brake.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-3.Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4 lights listed above turn on and off automatically.
(U.S.A.) Off
(Canada) The daytime running lights turn on. (
175
1
A
B
U.S.A.
Canada
2
The side marker, parking, tail, license plate, instrument panel lights, and daytime running lights
( →
The headlights and all lights listed above (except daytime running lights) turn on.
3 The headlights, daytime running lights (
■ AUTO mode can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Daytime running light system
● The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights.
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)
• The engine is running
• The parking brake is released
• The headlight switch is in the (Canada only), or * position
* : When the surroundings are bright
The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is set again.
● For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.
■ Headlight control sensor
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
176 shield.
tion.
■ closed.) opened.
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight system to malfunc-
Automatic light off system
● When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after the driver’s door is opened and closed if the engine switch is turned to
ACCESSORY mode or turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are
● When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off and the driver’s door is
To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to or .
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode and the driver’s door is opened while the lights are turned on.
■ Automatic headlight leveling system
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.
■ Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination
When driving during daytime with the headlight switch turned to , if the windshield wipers are used, the headlights will turn on automatically after several seconds to help enhance the visibility of your vehicle.
■ Battery-saving function
In order to prevent the battery of the vehicle from discharging, if the headlights and/or tail lights are on when the engine switch is turned off the battery saving function will operate and automatically turn off all the lights after approximately 20 minutes.
When the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode, the battery-saving function will be disabled.
When any of the following are performed, the battery-saving function is canceled once and then reactivated. All the lights will turn off automatically 20 minutes after the
Battery- saving function has been reactivated:
● When the headlight switch is operated
● When a door is opened or closed
■ Welcome light illumination control
The front position and tail lights automatically turn on at night when the doors are unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control if the light switch is in
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
1
Turning on the high beam headlights
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
With the headlights on, push the
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
lever away from you to turn on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the center position to turn the high beams off.
2 Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
177
When the shift position is in R while the headlights are on (low beam), both cornering lights will turn on.
This is designed to enhance visibility when parking.
■ Cornering lights
When the cornering lights are on for more than 30 minutes, they will turn off automatically.
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) (if equipped)
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System) secures excellent visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of the light axis of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire’s angle as controlled by steering input.
AFS operates at speeds of approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
4
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
Cornering lights
When the steering wheel or turn signal lever is operated while the headlights are on (low beam), a cornering light will turn on and light up the direction of movement of the vehicle. The cornering lights are designed to ensure excellent visibility when making a turn at an intersection.
However, when vehicle speed is approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or higher, the cornering lights will not turn on.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
178
AHB (Automatic High
Beam)
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
The AHB indicator will come on when the system is operating.
The Automatic High Beam uses a camera sensor located behind the upper portion of the windshield to assess the brightness of the lights of vehicles ahead, streetlights, etc., and automatically turns the high beams on or off as necessary.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Automatic High
Beam
Do not overly rely on the Automatic High
Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and turning the high beams on or off manually if necessary.
■ To prevent incorrect operation of the
Automatic High Beam system
Do not overload the vehicle.
Activating the Automatic High
Beam
1 Press the Automatic High Beam switch.
2 Push the lever away from you with the headlight switch in the or
position.
■ Conditions to turn the high beams on/off automatically
● When all of the following conditions are met, the high beams will be turned on automatically (after approximately 1 second):
• The vehicle speed is approximately 21 mph (34 km/h) or more.
• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.
• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.
● If any of the following conditions are met, the high beams will turn off automatically:
• The vehicle speed is below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).
• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.
• Vehicles ahead have their headlights or tail lights turned on.
• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.
■ Camera sensor detection information
● The high beams may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:
• When a vehicle suddenly appears from around a curve
• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle
• When vehicles ahead cannot be detected due to repeated curves, road dividers or roadside trees
• When vehicles ahead appear in a faraway lane on a wide road
• When the lights of vehicles ahead are not on
● The high beams may be turned off if a
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without its headlights turned on is detected.
● House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs and other reflective objects may cause the high beams to change to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.
● The following factors may affect the amount of time taken for the high beams to turn on or off:
• The brightness of the headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead
• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead
• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side
• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle
• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface, etc.)
• The number of passengers and amount of luggage in the vehicle
● The high beams may turn on or off unexpectedly.
● Bicycles or similar vehicles may not be detected.
● In the following situations the system may not be able to correctly detect the surrounding brightness level. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high beams to flash or dazzle pedestrians or vehicles ahead. In such a case, it is necessary to manually switch between the high and low beams.
• When driving in inclement weather
(heavy rain, snow, fog, sandstorms, etc.)
• When the windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt, etc.
• When the windshield is cracked or damaged
• When the camera sensor is deformed or dirty
• When the temperature of the camera sensor is extremely high
• When the surrounding brightness level is equal to that of headlights, tail lights or fog lights
• When headlights or tail lights of vehicles ahead are turned off, dirty, changing color, or not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a preceding vehicle
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
179
• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness
• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces
(such as stone-paved roads, gravel roads, etc.)
• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road
• When there is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or mirror
• When the back of a preceding vehicle is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck
• When the vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty, or are not aimed properly
• When the vehicle is listing or titling due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed, etc.
• When the headlights are changed between the high beams and low beams repeatedly in an abnormal manner
• When the driver believes that the high beams may be flashing or dazzling pedestrians or other drivers
■ Temporarily lowering sensor sensitivity
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.
1 Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.
● The headlight switch is in or .
● The headlight switch lever is in high beam position.
● Automatic High Beam switch is on.
2 Turn the engine switch to IGNITION
ON mode.
3 Within 30 seconds after step 2 , repeat pulling the headlight switch lever to the original position then pushing it to the high beam position quickly 10 times, then leave the lever in high beam position.
4 If the sensitivity is changed, the AHB indicator is turn on and off 3 times.
Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even when the vehicle is stopped.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
180
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Turning the high beams on/off manually
■ Switching to the low beams
Pull the lever to its original position.
The AHB indicator will turn off.
Push the lever away from you to activate the Automatic High Beam system again.
Windshield wipers and washer
Operating the lever can switch between automatic operation and manual operation, or can use the washer.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ Switching to the high beams
Press the Automatic High Beam switch.
The AHB indicator will turn off and the high beam indicator will turn on.
Press the switch to activate the Automatic
High Beam system again.
Operating the wiper lever
Operate the lever and switch as follows to use the wipers. When is selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
1
Off
(U.S.A.) or (Canada)
2 Rain-sensing wiper operation
The wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
3 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Low speed wiper operation
4 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
High speed wiper operation
5 (U.S.A.) or (Canada)
Temporary operation
When switch ring.
6
7
is selected, the sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by turning the
Increases the sensitivity
Decreases the sensitivity
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
181
8 Washer/wiper dual operation
Wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.
(After operating several times, the wipers operate once more time after a short delay to prevent dripping. However, the dripping prevention does not operate while the vehicle is moving.)
Vehicles with headlight cleaners:
When the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode and the headlights are on, if the lever is pulled, the headlight cleaners will operate once. After this, the headlight cleaners will operate every 5th time the lever is pulled.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation
Even when the wipers are not in AUTO mode, vehicle speed affects the time until the drip prevention wiper sweep occurs.
With low speed windshield wiper operation selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.
(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the mode cannot be switched.)
■ Raindrop sensor
● The raindrop sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
An optical sensor is adopted. It may not operate properly when sunlight from the rising or setting of the sun intermittently strikes the windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the windshield.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
182
●
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
If the wiper is turned to AUTO mode while the engine switch is in IGNITION
ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that AUTO mode is activated.
● If the temperature of the raindrop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or 5°F
(-15°C) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any mode other than AUTO mode.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
■ Front door opening linked windshield wiper stop function
When is selected and the windshield wipers are operating, if a front door is opened while the vehicle is stopped and the
P shift position is selected, operation of the windshield wipers will be stopped to prevent anyone near the vehicle from being sprayed by water from the wipers. When the front door is closed, wiper operation will resume.
■ When stopping the engine in an emergency while driving
If the windshield wipers are operating when the engine is stopped, the windshield wipers will operate in high speed operation. After the vehicle is stopped, operation will return to normal when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, or operation will stop when the driver’s door is opened.
■ Outside rear view mirror defogger activation linked to windshield wiper operation
The outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn on when you operate the windshield wipers.
The outside rear view mirror defoggers automatically turn off approximately 15 minutes after the wipers stop.
For details about the outside rear view mirror defoggers:
WARNING
■ Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in
AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm.
The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Lexus dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Changing the windshield wiper rest position/Lifting the windshield wipers
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Lifting the windshield wipers
183 the wiper arm, lift the windshield wiper from the windshield.
When the windshield wipers are not being used, they retract to below the hood. To enable the windshield wipers to be lifted when parking in cold conditions or when replacing a windshield wiper insert, change the rest position of the windshield wipers to the service position using the wiper lever.
■ Raising the wipers to the service position
Within approximately 45 seconds of turning the engine switch off, move the wiper lever to the (U.S.A.) or
(Canada) position and hold it for approximately 2 seconds or more.
The wipers will move to the service position.
■ Lowering the windshield wipers to the retracted position
With the windshield wipers placed on the windshield, turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode and then move the wiper lever to an operating position. When the wiper switch is turned off, the windshield wipers will stop at the retracted position.
Even if the wipers deviate while the engine switch is off, the wipers will return to the normal position.
4
NOTICE
■ When lifting the windshield wipers
● Do not lift the windshield wipers when they are in the retracted position below the hood. Otherwise, they may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to a windshield wiper and/or the hood.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
184
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
NOTICE
● Do not lift a windshield wiper by the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade may be deformed.
● Do not operate the wiper lever when the windshield wipers are lifted. Otherwise, the windshield wipers may contact the hood, possibly resulting in damage to the windshield wipers and/or hood.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-4.Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch off.
Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
WARNING
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
4-4. Refueling
185
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
4
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted surface.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
186
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
1 Press the opener switch.
2 Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and remove it, then put it into the holder on the fuel filler door.
WARNING
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.
■ If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
Closing the fuel tank cap
After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5.Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+A
*
* : If equipped
The Lexus Safety System+A consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:
Drive assist systems of Lexus
Safety System+A
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A)
→
■ FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
→
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
→
■ AHB (Automatic High Beam)
→
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
→
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
→
WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System+A
The Lexus Safety System+A is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.
Vehicle data recording
187
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor
(available only in situations when sudden inputs occur while driving
[sudden acceleration, etc.], the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating, the Parking Support
Brake function [static objects] was operating, or your vehicle was involved in a collision)
The pre-collision system does not
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
188
4-5. Using the driving support systems record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.
A Front radar sensor
B Front side radar sensors
C Camera sensor
Rear
Rear side radar sensors (
Sensors
Four types of sensors, located behind the front grille, front bumper, rear bumper and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
Front
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii
4-5. Using the driving support systems
189
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
190
4-5. Using the driving support systems
For vehicles sold in Canada
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the front radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ To avoid malfunction of the front side radar sensors
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the radar sensors and their surrounding areas on the front bumper clean at all times.
191
A Radar sensor
B Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers), or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and objects may not be detected correctly.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your
Lexus dealer.
If a radar sensor or its surrounding area on the front bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the system may not operate and a warning message ( →
be displayed.
If this occurs, clean off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle for approximately
10 minutes.
If the warning message does not disappear, have your vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers), aluminum tape or other items to the radar sensors or their surrounding area.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
192
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Do not subject a radar sensor or its surrounding area on the front bumper to a strong impact.
If a radar sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• If a radar sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact
• If the area on the front bumper around a radar sensor is scratched or dented, or the front bumper has become partially disengaged
● Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
● Do not modify the radar sensors or their surrounding area on the front bumper.
● If a radar sensor or the front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not paint the front bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield.
• As some glass coating agents may affect the detection performance of the camera sensor, consult your Lexus dealer when using a glass coating agent.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration).
A From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the camera sensor
B Approximately 14.2 in. (36 cm)
(Approximately 7.1 in. [18 cm] to the right and left from the center of the camera sensor)
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. (
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
193
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
194
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Lexus Safety System+
*
Vehicle data recording
* : If equipped
The Lexus Safety System+ consists of the following drive assist systems and contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:
Drive assist systems of Lexus
Safety System+
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+)
→
■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
→
■ AHB (Automatic High Beam)
→
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
→
WARNING
■ Lexus Safety System+
The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.
As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsible for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.
The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will record certain data, such as:
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions
• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead or other objects)
• Images from the camera sensor
(available only when the pre-collision braking function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)
The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.
Data usage
Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government agency
• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.
The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is disabled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.
Sensors
Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect information necessary to operate the drive assist systems.
195
4
A
B
Radar sensor
Camera sensor
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
196
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
For vehicles sold in Canada
4-5. Using the driving support systems
197
4
WARNING
■ To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
198
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Keep the radar sensor and front grille
A emblem clean at all times.
Radar sensor
B Front grille emblem
If the front of the radar sensor or the front or back of the front grille emblem is dirty or covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean it.
Clean the radar sensor and front grille emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.
● Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers), or other items to the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Do not disassemble the radar sensor.
● Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.
● If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or replaced, contact your
Lexus dealer.
■ To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Keep the windshield clean at all times.
• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc., clear the windshield.
• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach objects, such as stickers, transparent stickers, and so forth, to the outer side of the windshield in front of the camera sensor (shaded area in the illustration).
A
B
From the top of the windshield to approximately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the camera sensor
Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm)
(Approximately 4.0 in. [10 cm] to the right and left from the center of the camera sensor)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or ice. ( →
● If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper blade.
If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.
● Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.
If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not get the camera sensor wet.
● Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.
● Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.
When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens.
If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.
● Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.
● Do not disassemble the camera sensor.
● Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor
(inside rear view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.
199
● Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front grille or front bumper.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
● If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will not obstruct the camera sensor.
● Do not modify the headlights or other lights.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
200
4-5. Using the driving support systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)
The pre-collision system uses a front radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle and front side sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the front left or right side. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. (
System functions
■ Pedestrian alert
When the system determines that there is a possibility of a frontal collision with a stationary or moving pedestrian in front of your vehicle, a message will be displayed on the head-up display to warn the driver.
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Active steering assist
If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with an object, such as a guardrail, or pedestrian is high, even though the brakes are applied, and that the collision may be avoidable through steering control, the system will steer the vehicle automatically to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
■ Pre-collision seat belts (front seat only)
If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system will retract the seat belts. Additionally, the system may retract the seat belts if the brakes are applied suddenly or control of the vehicle is lost.
■ Pre-collision seatbacks (front passenger’s seat / power rear seat [if equipped])
If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, it may move the seatbacks of the front passenger’s seat and power rear seats to the upright position automatically, if reclined.
If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be moved by the pre-collision seat function.
■ Suspension control
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (
→ P.295) will control the damp-
ing force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.
201
■ Steering control
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high and the driver is operating the steering wheel, the LDH system (
control the turning angle of the front and rear wheels and effort necessary to turn the steering wheel to help enhance steering responsiveness.
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system.
Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision: →
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
202
WARNING
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and may prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.
■ Active steering assist
● The steering wheel may turn automatically when active steering assist is operating.
● As active steering assist operation will be canceled when the system determines that a collision has been avoided, operate the steering wheel as necessary.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● In the following situations, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action. In this case, the active steering assist may not operate or may be canceled.
• If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being operated. In this case the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the pre-collision braking may not operate.
• In some situations, while the active steering assist is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.
• When the active steering assist is operating, if the steering wheel is held firmly or is operated in the opposite direction to that which the system is generating torque, the function may be canceled.
• If the brake pedal is depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and the active steering assist operation may be delayed.
■ Pre-collision seat belts with comfort function
If the pre-collision seat belts have operated and the seat belts are locked in a retracted position, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, release and retract the seat belts to unlock them and then fasten them again.
Also, if a seat belt can be loosened, it can be unlocked by slightly retracting it without releasing it.
■ When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact has been applied to the front bumper, rear bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other situation
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct a sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle
4-5. Using the driving support systems
203
Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on (
the multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode
If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
If the pre-collision system is disabled, the pedestrian alert system will also be disabled. At this time, the FCTA (Front
Cross Traffic Alert) ( →
will also be disabled.
■ Enabling/Disabling the pedestrian alert system
The pedestrian alert can be enabled/disabled on (
the multi-information display. At this time, the FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Alert) system will also be enabled/disabled.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
204
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on ( →
multi-information display. The warning timing for the pedestrian and FCTA
(Front Cross Traffic Alert) system will also be changed.
The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off.
1 Far
The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing.
2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Near
The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.
■ Changing the pedestrian alert timing
If the pre-collision warning timing is changed, the pedestrian alert and
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert) timing will also be changed accordingly.
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle, pedestrian/bicyclist, guardrail, etc. or a front side collision with a vehicle is high. Each function is operational at the following speeds:
● Pedestrian alert:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
20 and 40 mph (30 and 65 km/h)
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 3 and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h] and for detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 37 mph
[10 and 60 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, the speed of the approaching vehicle is between approximately 10 and 37 mph [15 and 60 km/h].)
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph [30 and 80 km/h] and for detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, vehicle speed is between approximately 19 and 37 mph
[30 and 60 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or vehicle ahead is approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h) or more. (For detecting a vehicle approaching from the front left or right side, the speed of the approaching vehicle is between approximately 10 and
37 mph [15 and 60 km/h].)
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
3 and 110 mph (5 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian or bicyclist, vehicle speed is between approximately 3
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems and 50 mph [5 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the detected pedestrian, bicyclist or vehicle ahead is approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) or more.
● Active steering assist
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
25 and 50 mph (40 and 80 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 25 and 40 mph
[40 and 65 km/h] and for detecting a guardrail, vehicle speed is between approximately 37 and 50 mph [60 and
80 km/h].)
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift position is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pedestrian alert and pre-collision warning function will be operational)
● When there is insufficient safe or unobstructed space for the vehicle to be steered into
● When an object is approaching the area the vehicle is to be steered into
■ Pedestrian and bicyclist detection function
The pre-collision system detects pedestrians and bicyclists based on the size, profile, and motion of the person. However, a pedestrian or bicyclist may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the person, preventing the system from operating properly. ( →
205
■ Cancelation of pre-collision braking and active steering assist
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle, pedestrian or bicyclist
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn
• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
206
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road
• When passing through a place with a low structure above the road such as a low ceiling, underpass, bridge girder, traffic sign, etc.
• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• When the road surface is uneven or undulating
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, walls, etc.
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, bicyclist, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve
• When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road
• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, dips, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When a crossing pedestrian or bicyclist approaches very close to the vehicle
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the road, a wall, or billboard that may be mistaken for a vehicle, pedestrian, or bicyclist
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present
• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a narrow road
• When driving close to objects such as walls or poles on a median
• When passing an oncoming vehicle around a sharp curve
• When passing a vehicle which is making a left/right turn
• When being passed by a vehicle
4-5. Using the driving support systems approaching from the left or right side in front of your vehicle
• When making a left/right turn while a vehicle is approaching from the left or right side in front of your vehicle
207
• When passing an object on the side of the road, such as a parked vehicle
• When passing an oncoming vehicle on a
S curve
• When there is an object that may be mistaken for a pedestrian, such as a utility pole, tree, or pole on the roadside or at the entrance of a curve
• When there is a bicycle or motorcycle on the roadside at the entrance of a curve
• If the preceding vehicle is a bicycle or motorcycle
● The system may operate the pedestrian alert unnecessarily if it detects the following:
• Pedestrians on a sidewalk
• Bicycles and motorcycles
• Patterns or paint on the road, a wall, median, billboard, etc. that may be mistaken for a pedestrian or bicyclist
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations, such as the following, a vehicle or other object may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer
4
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
208
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle or guardrail ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor
• When driving in a location where there are many objects which reflect radar, such as a tunnel or parking garage
• When driving at night or in a tunnel with the headlights off
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel
• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If a sensor is misaligned
• If the headlights are misaligned
• When approaching a guardrail at a wide or narrow angle
• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle from the front left or right side while your vehicle is entering an intersection with poor visibility
• When a vehicle approaches your vehicle from the rear left or right side
• When a vehicle approaches the side of your vehicle at a shallow angle
• When driving on a road with a grade that changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)
● In some situations, such as the following, the sensors may not detect the lane lines or a safe space the vehicle can be steered into, preventing the active steering assist from operating properly:
• When the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see, such as when they are faint, diverging/merging, or a shadow is cast upon them
• When the lane is more wide or narrow than normal
• When there is a light and dark pattern on the road surface, such as due to road repairs
• If the system determines that a collision can be avoided by only using the brakes
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When a pedestrian is detected near the centerline of the vehicle
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force or steering force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
• If there are deep ruts in the road
• When driving on a slope
• When driving on a horizontally slanted road
● Some pedestrians and bicyclists, such as the following, may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians and bicyclists shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately 6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Bicyclists riding on unusual bicycles
(bicycles for small children, tricycles, folding bicycles, BMX bicycles, tandem bicycles, etc.)
• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are not illuminated by the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc.
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings
• Pedestrians and bicyclists near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are moving fast
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which change speed or direction abruptly
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which suddenly emerge from behind a vehicle or large object
• Pedestrians and bicyclists which are extremely close to the side of the vehicle
(outside rear view mirror, etc.)
209
• Pedestrians and bicyclists wearing oversized clothing, such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body
• Pedestrians and bicyclists behind an object that hides part of their body
• Pedestrians and bicyclists who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians/bicyclists which are close together
● Some guardrails, such as the following, may not be detected by the sensors, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Guardrails which are less than approximately 1.9 ft. (60 cm) tall
• Short guardrails
• Irregularly-shaped guardrails (wire cable guardrails, guardrails made of thin poles, etc.)
• Guardrails which are not illuminated by the headlights at night, in a tunnel, etc.
• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings
• Guardrails which appear to be nearly the same shape as their surroundings (walls, etc.)
• Guardrails which are over a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.)
• Guardrails which are hidden behind thick grass
• Guardrails which are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.)
• Curved guardrails or guardrails at the entrance of a curve
● In some situations such as the following, the system may detect a pedestrian and display a warning on the head-up display, even though no pedestrian exists:
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating (due to ruts, etc.)
• When driving on a slope
• When driving on a horizontally slanted road
• If the driver’s posture (driver seat position) is extreme, such as excessively
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
210
4-5. Using the driving support systems reclined
• If the head-up display position is set extremely high
■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is hot, such as in the sun
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
• When a sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled ( →
lision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
(vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+)
The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle. When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can be changed. ( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
System functions
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Pre-collision warning
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge the driver to take evasive action.
■ Pre-collision brake assist
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed.
■ Pre-collision braking
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.
211
■ Pre-collision seatbacks (front passenger’s seat / power rear seat [if equipped])
If the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, it may move the seatbacks of the front passenger’s seat and power rear seats to the upright position automatically, if reclined.
If a seat is being adjusted, it may not be moved by the pre-collision seat function.
■ Suspension control
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high, the Adaptive Variable Suspension System ( →
ing force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.
■ Steering control
When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high and the driver is operating the steering wheel, the LDH system (
control the turning angle of the front and rear wheels and effort necessary to turn the steering wheel to help enhance steering responsiveness.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
212
WARNING
■ Limitations of the pre-collision system
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.
Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system.
Failure to do so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.
Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always drive carefully.
• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision:
• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly:
● Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.
■ Pre-collision braking
● When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force will be applied.
● If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds. Depress the brake pedal as necessary.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are performed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steering wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.
● In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive action.
● If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking function.
■ When to disable the pre-collision system
In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● When the vehicle is being towed
● When your vehicle is towing another vehicle
● When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation
● When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to rotate freely
● When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer
● When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident or other reasons
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been in an accident or is malfunctioning
● When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road
● When the tires are not properly inflated
● When the tires are very worn
● When tires of a size other than specified are installed
● When tire chains are installed
● When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used
● If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is temporarily installed to the vehicle
■ Changing the pre-collision warning timing
The pre-collision warning timing can be changed on (
multi-information display.
The operation timing setting is retained when the engine switch is turned off.
213
4
Changing settings of the pre-collision system
■ Enabling/disabling the pre-collision system
The pre-collision system can be enabled/disabled on ( →
the multi-information display.
The system is automatically enabled each time the engine switch is turned to IGNI-
TION ON mode
If the system is disabled, the PCS warning light will turn on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
1 Far
The warning will begin to operate earlier than with the default timing.
2 Middle
This is the default setting.
3 Near
The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.
■ Operational conditions
The pre-collision system is enabled and the
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
214 speeds:
4-5. Using the driving support systems system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.
Each function is operational at the following
● Pre-collision warning:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph
[10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision brake assist:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph
[30 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.
● Pre-collision braking:
• Vehicle speed is between approximately
7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph
[10 and 80 km/h].)
• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
The system may not operate in the following situations:
● If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● If the shift position is in R
● If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)
■ Pedestrian detection function
The pre-collision system detects pedestrians based on the size, profile, and motion of a detected object. However, a pedestrian may not be detected depending on the surrounding brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of the detected object, preventing the system from operating properly. (
■ Cancelation of the pre-collision braking
If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will be canceled:
● The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.
● The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.
■ Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision
● In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possibility of a frontal collision and operate.
• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian
• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes
• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is making a left/right turn
• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
215
• When driving on a road where relative location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent lane may change, such as on a winding road
• When passing through a place with a low structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic sign, etc.)
• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is uneven or undulating
• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or walls
• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or object by the roadside at the entrance of a curve
• When passing under an object (billboard, etc.) at the top of an uphill road
• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other barrier that opens and closes
• When using an automatic car wash
• When driving through or under objects that may contact the vehicle, such as thick grass, tree branches, or a banner
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion on the road surface or roadside
• When a crossing pedestrian approaches very close to the vehicle
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When there are patterns or paint on the
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
216 road or a wall that may be mistaken for a vehicle or pedestrian
• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or guardrail
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle
• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle
• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck
• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end, such as a low bed trailer
• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper
• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high ground clearance emerges from beside a vehicle
• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, acceleration or deceleration)
• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle
• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front of your vehicle
• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead
• When driving through steam or smoke
• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel
• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines directly into the camera sensor
• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a tunnel
• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn
• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve
• If your vehicle is skidding
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered
• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car
• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead
• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or
• If the wheels are misaligned
• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• The vehicle is wobbling.
• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
• When driving on a hill
• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned
● In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained, preventing the system from performing properly:
• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet
• If the vehicle is not properly maintained
(brakes or tires are excessively worn, improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)
• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface
● Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
• Pedestrians shorter than approximately
3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately
6.5 ft. (2 m)
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing
(a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part of their body
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle
• Groups of pedestrians which are close together
• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright
• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel
• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as their surroundings
• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects
• Pedestrians who are on a metal object
(manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road
• Pedestrians who are walking fast
• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly
217
• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object
• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view mirror, etc.)
■ If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display
The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction in the system.
● In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot, such as in the sun
• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold, such as in an extremely cold environment
• When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.
• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield:
• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is attached to the windshield near the camera sensor
● If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning message does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system may be malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If VSC is disabled
● If VSC is disabled ( →
lision brake assist and pre-collision braking functions are also disabled.
● The PCS warning light will turn on and
“VSC Turned Off Pre-Collision Brake
System Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
218
4-5. Using the driving support systems
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic
Alert)
*
* : If equipped
When approaching an intersection at low speed, the radar sensors on the front side of the vehicle can detect approaching vehicles to the left and right of the front of the vehicle. In this case, the head-up display is used to inform the driver of detected vehicles.
Multi-information display
FCTA system functions
When the system detects a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle when approaching an intersection, a notification will be displayed on the head-up display and panoramic view monitor * .
* : Refer to “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
When the system determines that your vehicle may be about to enter an intersection even though a vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to urge you to depress the brake pedal.
Head-up display
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the function
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.
The FCTA system is a supplementary system that informs the driver of vehicles approaching from the left and right of the front of the vehicle.
Do not overly rely on the FCTA system.
Over reliance on the system may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
The details of the warning display may differ from the actual traffic conditions.
Although the warning display will stop being displayed after a certain amount of time, this does not indicate that vehicles or pedestrians are no longer around your vehicle.
■ The FCTA function is operational when
The system operates when all of the following conditions are met.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Setting for “PCS” and “CAUTION” in play.
( →
P.76) of the multi-information dis-
● A shift position other than P or R is selected.
● Your vehicle is approaching an intersection at approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
● A vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle at a speed between approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and 37 mph (60 km/h).
● There are no preceding vehicles ahead of your vehicle.
● The accelerator pedal is not strongly depressed.
● The brake pedal is not being strongly depressed.
■ Situations in which the system may operate even though no vehicles are approaching
In certain situations, such as the following, the system may operate even though no vehicles are approaching:
● When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, traffic signs, utility poles, street lights, trees, or walls
● When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present
● When passing an object on the side of the road, such as a parked vehicle
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle from far away
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving within a parking spot, etc. next to the lane your vehicle is driving in
● When a pedestrian or bicyclist is moving on a sidewalk
● When a vehicle or pedestrian is moving away from your vehicle
● When a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle is decelerating or stops
● When a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle makes a left/right turn immediately in front of your vehicle
● When a pedestrian is approaching your vehicle
● When an oncoming vehicle makes a left/right turn
● When your vehicle enters an intersection before a vehicle approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle
● When stopped at traffic light and a vehicle approaches from the left or right in front of your vehicle
● When driving in a location where there are objects which reflect radar, such as vehicles, guardrails, walls, traffic signs, etc.
● When making a left/right turn in front of an approaching vehicle
● When passing an oncoming vehicle
219
● When being overtaken by another vehicle
● When driving next to another vehicle or a pedestrian
● When a vehicle or pedestrian approaches the side of your vehicle
Some objects, such as the following, may be detected and cause the FCTA system to operate:
● Pedestrians
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by a front side radar sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:
● If the front end or side of an approaching vehicle is small (sports cars, etc.)
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
220
●
●
4-5. Using the driving support systems
If the front end of an approaching vehicle is low (low-slung sports cars, etc.)
If the ground clearance of an approaching vehicle is extremely high
● If the shape of an approaching vehicle is unusual (tractors, motorcycles with sidecars, etc.)
● If a vehicle suddenly enters the detection area on the left or right in front of your vehicle from a parking lot, etc.
■ When the PCS warning light is flashing and a message is displayed on the multi-information display
The system may be temporarily unavailable or may be malfunctioning.
● If an approaching vehicle moves suddenly (sudden steering, acceleration, deceleration, etc.)
● When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm
● After the engine has been started and the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of time
● When driving on a road with a grade that changes sharply (sharp incline/decline)
● When driving around a sharp curve or on an undulating road
● If a vehicle is approaching from the left or right of the front of your vehicle diagonally
● When a vehicle is approaching from the left or right in front of your vehicle from far away
● When there is an object between your vehicle and an approaching vehicle
● When driving in a location where there are objects which reflect radar, such as guardrails, walls, vehicles, etc.
● When a group of vehicles which are close together approach
● Immediately after the FCTA system has been enabled
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
*
* : If equipped
When driving on highways and freeways with white or yellow lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane. Furthermore, the system also provides steering assistance when dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LTA system recognizes white or yellow lane lines using a camera sensor. Additionally, it detects preceding and surrounding vehicles using the camera sensor and front radar sensor.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
221
WARNING
■ Before using LTA system
Do not rely solely upon the LTA system.
The LTA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LTA system by mistake
When not using the LTA system, use the
LTA switch to turn the system off.
Functions included in LTA system
■ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course * , a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and either a warning buzzer will sound or the steering wheel will vibrate to alert the driver.
*
: Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
When the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates, check the area around your vehicle and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
222
4-5. Using the driving support systems overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the lane departure alert will operate even if the turn signals are operating.
sound. If the steering assist function is canceled, release the steering wheel and then grip it again to enable the function.
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane and that the possibility of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in the adjacent lane is high, the steering assist function will operate even if the turn signals are operating.
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane or course * , the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.
* : Boundary between asphalt and the side of the road, such as grass, soil, or a curb
If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a certain amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, the steering assist function may be canceled temporarily, a warning message may be displayed on the multi-information display and a warning buzzer may
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying within a lane, the warning buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems wheel firmly.
223
■ Lane centering function
This function is linked with radar cruise control and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane.
When radar cruise control is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate.
In situations where the white (yellow) lane lines are difficult to see or are not visible, such as when in a traffic jam, this function will operate to help follow a preceding vehicle by monitoring the position of the preceding vehicle.
If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the warning buzzer sounds. Make sure to grip the steering
WARNING
■ Situations unsuitable for LTA system
Do not use the LTA system in the following situations, as doing so may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● When the follow-up cruising display is displayed ( →
ing vehicle changes lanes. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.)
● When the follow-up cruising display is displayed ( →
ing vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.)
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
224
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● When the follow-up cruising display is displayed (
ing vehicle is being driven extremely close to the left/right lane line. (Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and depart from the lane.)
● Vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.
● Vehicle is being driven around a sharp curve.
● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.
■ Preventing LTA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
225
Indications on multi-information display
Turning LTA system on
Press the LTA switch to turn the LTA system on.
The LTA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.
Press the LTA switch again to turn the
LTA system off.
When the LTA system is turned on or off, operation of the LTA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.
A LTA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.
Illuminated in white:
LTA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
B Operation display of steering wheel operation support
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.
Displayed on the outer side of both lane displays:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the lane centering function is operating.
Displayed on the outer side of a lane display:
Indicates that steering wheel assist of the steering assist function is operating.
Display flashing on the outer side of both lane displays:
Alerts the driver that their input is necessary to stay in the center of the lane (lane
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
226
4-5. Using the driving support systems centering function).
C Lane departure alert function display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen.
Inside of displayed white lines is white played, if the preceding vehicle changes lanes, your vehicle may change lanes as well. Always pay careful attention to your surroundings and operate the steering wheel as necessary to correct the path of the vehicle and ensure safety.
■ Warning display
Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.
Inside of displayed white lines is black
When the lane centering function is operating and the system determines that the vehicle may depart from its lane due to a sharp curve, etc., a warning display urging the driver to operate the steering wheel, will be displayed.
In some situations a warning display may not be displayed.
Indications on head-up display
Some displays, which are the same as those displayed on the multi-information display, will be displayed.
■ LTA system curve display on the head-up display
Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.
D Follow-up cruising display
Indicates that steering assist of the lane centering function is operating by monitoring the position of a preceding vehicle.
When the follow-up cruising display is dis-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
The curve display on the head-up display changes according to the direction and curvature of the curve.
■
●
4-5. Using the driving support systems
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lane lines. (When a white [yellow] line is recognized on only one side, the system will operate only for the recognized side.)
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated. (Except when a vehicle is in the lane on the side the turn signal was operated)
• Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”.
(
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. ( →
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the
(
Operation conditions of each function
Lane departure alert function multi-information display is set to “On”.
227
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
( →
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LTA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane
Center” in of the multi-information display are set to “On”. ( →
• This function recognizes white (yellow) lane lines or the position of a preceding vehicle (except when the preceding vehicle is small, such as a motorcycle).
• The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 10 to 13 ft. (3 to 4 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is not being driven around a sharp curve.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
( →
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. ( →
• The driver has one or both hands on the steering wheel.
• The vehicle is being driven in the center of a lane.
• Steering assist function is not operating.
■ Temporary cancellation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is automatically restored.
(
If the operating conditions are no longer met while the lane centering function is
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
228 operating, a buzzer may sound to indicate that the function has been temporarily canceled. If the alert type customization setting is set to vibrate the steering wheel, the buzzer will not sound. (The steering wheel will vibrate.)
If a message urging operation of the steering wheel is displayed, operate the steering wheel.
■ Steering assist function/lane centering function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
The steering control of the function is overrided by the driver’s steering wheel operation.
When the vehicle speed is approximately
31 mph (50 km/h) or less, the warning display of the lane centering function will not operate.
Do not attempt to activate the steering assist function.
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.
If the edge of the road is not clear or straight, the lane departure alert function or steering assist function may not operate.
In situations such as the following, it may not be possible for the system to determine if there is danger of a collision with an overtaking vehicle in an adjacent lane:
● When the relative speed between your vehicle and surrounding vehicles is large
● When driving around a curve
Do not attempt to activate the lane departure alert function.
■ Hands off steering wheel alert
When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the steering wheel while the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-infor-
4-5. Using the driving support systems mation display. If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel for
6 seconds, a buzzer sounds, a warning message is displayed and the function is temporarily canceled. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. If the steering assist function is canceled, release the steering wheel and then grip it again to enable the function.
In situations such as the following, the system may not be able to detect when the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel:
● If a steering wheel cover is installed.
● If the driver is wearing gloves.
● If something is attached to the steering wheel.
● If the driver is gripping the wood trim, stitched area, spokes, or other part of the steering wheel that does not have sensors.
In situations such as the following, the hands off steering wheel alert may not operate and the steering assist function and lane centering function may operate even if the driver’s hands are off the steering wheel:
● If an object contacts the steering wheel.
● If a wide object or arms are held in front of the steering wheel.
■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the functions may not operate properly:
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● If the edge of the road is not clear or straight.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The preceding vehicle changes lanes.
(Your vehicle may follow the preceding vehicle and also change lanes.)
● The preceding vehicle is swaying. (Your vehicle may sway accordingly and depart from the lane.)
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● When driving in a tunnel or at night with the headlights off or when a headlight is dim due to its lens being dirty or it being misaligned.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes
229 through operation of the steering wheel by the driver or crossed an intersection.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
● The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LTA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Warning message
“LTA Malfunction
Visit Your Dealer”
“Front Camera
Unavailable
Remove Debris
On Windshield”
Details/Actions
The system may not be operating properly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected at your
Lexus dealer.
Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LTA system off, remove any dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the windshield, and then turn the LTA system back on.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
230
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Warning message Details/Actions
“Front Camera
Unavailable”
The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met.
→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the LTA system will become available. Turn the LTA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LTA system back on.
“LTA Unavailable”
The LTA system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LTA system off and follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedures for the warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the
LTA system back on.
“LTA Unavailable at Current
Speed”
The LTA system cannot be used as the vehicle speed is too high.
→ Slow down.
If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
■ Customization
The following settings can be changed.
Function
Lane departure alert function
Steering assist function
Vehicle sway warning function
Lane centering function
Setting details
Adjust alert sensitivity
Adjust alert type
Turn steering wheel assistance on and off
Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity
Turn function on and off
For how to change settings, refer to
→
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
*
4-5. Using the driving support systems
* : If equipped
When driving on highways and freeways with white or yellow lines, this function alerts the driver when the vehicle might depart from its lane and provides assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its lane. Furthermore, the system also provides steering assistance when dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating to keep the vehicle in its lane.
The LKA system recognizes visible white or yellow lines with the camera sensor on the upper portion of the windshield.
231
When the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates, check the surrounding road situation and carefully operate the steering wheel to move the vehicle back to the center of the lane.
4
Functions included in LKA system
■ Lane departure alert function
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display, and either the warning buzzer sounds or the steering wheel vibrates to alert the driver.
■ Steering assist function
When the system determines that the vehicle might depart from its lane, the system provides assistance as necessary by operating the steering wheel in small amounts for a short period of time to keep the vehicle in its lane.
If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Lane centering function
This function is linked with radar cruise control and provides the required assistance by operating the steering wheel to keep the vehicle in its current lane.
When radar cruise control is not operating, the lane centering function does not operate.
If the system detects that the steering wheel has not been operated for a fixed amount of time or the steering wheel is not being firmly gripped, a warning is displayed on the multi-information display and the function is temporarily canceled.
■ Vehicle sway warning function
When the vehicle is swaying or appears as if it may depart from its lane multiple times, the warning buzzer sounds and a message is displayed on the multi-information display to alert the driver.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Before using LKA system
Do not rely solely upon the LKA system.
The LKA system does not automatically drive the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by paying careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.
Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ To avoid operating LKA system by mistake
When not using the LKA system, use the
LKA switch to turn the system off.
■ Situations unsuitable for LKA system
Do not use the LKA system in the following situations.
The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.
● When the tires have been excessively worn, or when the tire inflation pressure is low.
● Tires which differ by structure, manufacturer, brand or tread pattern are used.
● Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).
● Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.
● White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.
● Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.
● Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.
● Vehicle is driven on a road surface which is slippery due to rainy weather, fallen snow, freezing, etc.
● Vehicle is driven in traffic lanes other than on highways and freeways.
● Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.
■ Preventing LKA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake
● Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.
● Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).
● If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.
Turning LKA system on
233
Press the LKA switch to turn the LKA system on.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The LKA indicator illuminates and a message is displayed on the multi-information display.
Press the LKA switch again to turn the
LKA system off.
When the LKA system is turned on or off, operation of the LKA system continues in the same condition the next time the engine is started.
LKA system is operating.
Illuminated in green:
Steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.
Flashing in orange:
Lane departure alert function is operating.
B Operation display of steering wheel operation support
Indicates that steering wheel assistance of the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating.
C Lane departure alert function display
Displayed when the multi-information display is switched to the driving assist system information screen.
Inside of displayed white lines is white
Indications on multi-information display
Indicates that the system is recognizing white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle departs from its lane, the white line displayed on the side the vehicle departs from flashes orange.
A LKA indicator
The illumination condition of the indicator informs the driver of the system operation status.
Illuminated in white:
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Inside of displayed white lines is black
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Indicates that the system is not able to recognize white (yellow) lines or is temporarily canceled.
■ Operation conditions of each function
● Lane departure alert function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LKA is turned on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected.
(
● Steering assist function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met in addition to the operation conditions for the lane departure alert function.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”.
(
• Vehicle is not accelerated or decelerated by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
235
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. ( →
● Vehicle sway warning function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• Setting for “Sway Warning” in of the multi-information display is set to “On”.
( →
• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph
(50 km/h) or more.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.
• No system malfunctions are detected.
( →
● Lane centering function
This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.
• LKA is turned on.
• Setting for “Steering Assist” and “Lane
Center” in of the multi-information display are set to “On”. ( →
• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.
• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is operating.
• Width of traffic lane is approximately 8.2 to 13.5 ft. (2.5 to 4.1 m).
• Turn signal lever is not operated.
• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more than approximately 656 ft. (200 m).
• No system malfunctions are detected.
( →
• Vehicle does not accelerate or decelerate by a fixed amount or more.
• Steering wheel is not operated with a steering force level suitable for changing lanes.
• ABS, VSC, TRAC and PCS are not operating.
• TRAC or VSC is not turned off.
• Hands off steering wheel alert is not displayed. ( →
• Steering assist function is not operating.
■ Temporary cancellation of functions
When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled. However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
236 function is automatically restored.
( →
■ Steering assist function/lane centering function
Depending on the vehicle speed, lane departure situation, road conditions, etc., the driver may not feel the function is operating or the function may not operate at all.
■ Lane departure alert function
The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.
Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.
■ Hands off steering wheel alert
When the system determines that the driver has removed the hands from the steering wheel while the steering assist function or lane centering function is operating, a warning message is displayed on the multi-information display. If the driver continues to keep the hands off of the steering wheel, a warning message is displayed and the function is temporarily canceled. This alert also operates in the same way when the driver continuously operates the steering wheel only a small amount. However, depending on the road conditions, etc., the function may not cancel.
■ White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road
The LKA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be recognized.
■ Conditions in which functions may not operate properly
In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and various functions may not operate normally.
● There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.
● The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.
● The white (yellow) lines are cracked,
“Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker”
4-5. Using the driving support systems or stones are present.
● The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.
● The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are white).
● The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.
● The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.
● The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.
● Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.
● The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.
● The vehicle is driven on a slope.
● The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.
● The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.
● The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.
● The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.
● The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire pressure.
● The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.
● The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driving (poor roads or road seams).
● The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis has deviated.
● The vehicle is struck by a crosswind.
● The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.
● Snow tires, etc. are equipped.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Warning message
If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the LKA indicator illuminates in orange, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
Warning message Details/Actions
“Lane Keeping
Assist Malfunction Visit Your
Dealer”
The system may not be operating properly.
→ Have the vehicle inspected at your
Lexus dealer.
“Front Camera
Unavailable
Remove Debris
On Windshield”
Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., are present on the windshield in front of the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LKA system off, remove any dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc., from the windshield, and then turn the LKA system back on.
Warning message
“Front Camera
Unavailable”
“Lane Keeping
Assist Unavailable”
237
Details/Actions
The operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are not met.
→ When the operation conditions of the camera sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the LKA system will become available. Turn the LKA system off, wait for a little while, and then turn the LKA system back on.
The LKA system is temporarily canceled due to a malfunction in a sensor other than the camera sensor.
→ Turn the LKA system off and follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedures for the warning message. Afterward, drive the vehicle for a short time, and then turn the
LKA system back on.
If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
■ Customization
The following settings can be changed.
Function
Lane departure alert function
Setting details
Adjust alert sensitivity
Steering assist function
Adjust alert type
Turn steering wheel assistance on and off
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Function
Vehicle sway warning function
Lane centering function
Setting details
Turn function on and off
Adjust alert sensitivity
Turn function on and off
For how to change settings, refer to
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
* : If equipped
The RSA system recognizes specific road signs using the camera sensor and navigation system
(when data is available) to provide information to the driver via the multi-information display and head-up display.
If the system judges that the vehicle is being driven over the speed limit, performing prohibited actions, etc. in relation to the recognized road signs, it alerts the driver using a warning display and warning buzzer
*
.
* : This setting needs to be customized.
WARNING
■ Before using the RSA
Do not rely solely upon the RSA system.
RSA is a system which supports the driver by providing information, but it is not a replacement for a driver’s own vision and awareness. Drive safely by always paying careful attention to the traffic rules.
Inappropriate or negligent driving could lead to an unexpected accident.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Indication on the multi-information display
4-5. Using the driving support systems
When the camera sensor recognizes a sign or information of a sign is available from the navigation system, the sign will be displayed on the multi-information display.
When the driving support system information is selected, a maximum of 3 signs can be displayed. (
239
When a tab other than the driving support system information tab is selected, only a recognized speed limit sign or do not enter sign (when notification is necessary) will be displayed. ( →
If signs other than speed limit signs are recognized, they will be displayed in an overlapping stack under the current speed limit sign.
4
Supported types of road signs
The following types of road signs are recognized.
Non-official or recently introduced traffic signs may not be recognized.
Type Multi-information display
Speed limit begins/ends
*
Do Not Enter
Stop
Yield
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
* : Displayed when speed limit information for the road is available from the navigation system
Warning indication
In the following situations, the RSA system will alert the driver.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed warning threshold of the speed limit sign displayed, the sign display will be emphasized and a buzzer will sound.
When the RSA system recognizes a do not enter sign and determines that your vehicle has entered a no-entry area, the displayed sign will flash and a buzzer will sound.
Depending on the situation, traffic environment (traffic direction, speed, unit) may be detected incorrectly and a warning display may not operate properly.
■ Turning the system on/off
1 Select on of the multi-information display ( →
2 Press on the steering wheel.
■ Automatic turn-off of RSA sign display
In the following situations, a displayed speed limit sign will stop being displayed automatically:
● A new sign is not recognized for a certain distance. (When speed limit information is not available from the navigation system)
In the following situations, do not enter, stop and yield signs will stop being displayed automatically:
● The system determines that your vehicle has passed the sign.
● The road changes due to a left or right turn, etc.
■ Conditions in which the function may not operate or detect correctly
In the following situations, RSA does not operate normally and may not recognize signs, display the incorrect sign, etc. However, this does not indicate a malfunction.
● The camera sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact being applied to the sensor, etc.
● Dirt, snow, stickers, etc. are on the windshield near the camera sensor.
● In inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or sand storms
● Light from an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera sensor.
● The sign is dirty, faded, tilted or bent.
● All or part of the sign is hidden by the leaves of a tree, a pole, etc.
● The sign is only visible to the camera sensor for a short amount of time.
● The driving scene (turning, lane change, etc.) is judged incorrectly.
● Even if it is a sign not appropriate for the currently traveled lane, such a sign exists directly after a freeway branches, or in an adjacent lane just before merging.
● Stickers are attached to the rear of the preceding vehicle.
● A sign resembling a system compatible sign is recognized.
● The front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load.
● The surrounding brightness is not sufficient or changes suddenly.
● When a sign intended for trucks, etc. is recognized.
● The navigation system map data is old.
● The navigation system is not operating.
● Side road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the camera sensor) while the vehicle is traveling on the main road.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Roundabout exit road speed signs may be detected and displayed (if positioned in sight of the camera sensor) while traveling on a roundabout.
■ Speed limit sign display
If the engine switch was last turned off while a speed limit sign was displayed on the multi-information display, the same sign displays again when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates, decelerates and
241 stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed.
In constant speed control mode, the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.
Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and highways.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (
Constant speed control mode
( →
4
System Components
■ Meter display
A
B
C
Display
Set speed
Indicators
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
242
C
D
E
A
B
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Operation switches
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch
“+RES” switch
Cruise control main switch
Cancel switch
“-SET” switch
WARNING
■ Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system, and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to reduce the driver’s burden.
However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.
Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions, weather conditions, etc. The driver is responsible for checking the set speed.
Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. Therefore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive safely. Relying solely on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cautions regarding the driving assist systems
Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided by the system.
Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Assisting the driver to measure following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inattentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility conditions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.
● Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement. Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.
● Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle
The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range does not include functions which will prevent or avoid collisions with vehicles ahead of your vehicle. Therefore, if there is ever any possibility of danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activation
Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range setting to off, using the cruise control main switch when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
● Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● At entrances to freeways and highways
● When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)
● When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sensor
● In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration
● When an approach warning buzzer is heard often
243
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
244
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from the vehicle ahead.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill slopes.
A Example of constant speed cruising
When there are no vehicles ahead
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.
B Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising
When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.
When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pressing the “+RES” switch or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.
Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A: If your vehicle is being driven at approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) or more, when the turn signal is operated and a lane change is made to pass the vehicle ahead, the system will start accelerating your vehicle up to the set speed to assist smooth overtaking.
C Example of acceleration
When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
245 speed
The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to constant speed cruising.
mately 30 mph (50 km/h).
Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1 Press the cruise control main switch to activate the cruise control.
Radar cruise control indicator will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
Press the switch again to deactivate the cruise control.
If the cruise control main switch is pressed and held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system turns on in constant speed control mode. (
Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the
“+RES” or “-SET” switch until the desired set speed is displayed.
4
2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 30 mph [50 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.
If the switch is operated while the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50 km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present, the set speed will be adjusted to approxi-
1 Increases the speed
(Except when the vehicle has been stopped by system control in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
2 Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Press the switch.
Large adjustment: Press and hold the switch to change the speed, and release when the desired speed is reached.
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
246
4-5. Using the driving support systems increased or decreased as follows:
For the U.S. mainland, Hawaii
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) *1 or 1 km/h (0.6mph) pressed
*2 each time the switch is
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1mph (1.6 km/h) *1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) *2 increments for as long as the switch is held
For Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
*1
or 1 km/h (0.6mph) pressed
*2
each time the switch is
Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)
*1
or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)
*2 increments for as long as the switch is held
In the constant speed control mode
( →
increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h) *1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph) *2 pressed
each time the switch is
Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the switch is held.
*1 : When the set speed is shown in “MPH”
*2 : When the set speed is shown in “km/h”
Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
1 Long
2 Medium
3 Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set automatically to long mode when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark A will also be displayed.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
Select a distance from the table below.
Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle distance depending on the situation.
Pressing the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance as follows:
Distance options
Long
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Distance options
Medium
Short
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)
Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Canceling and resuming the speed control
247
Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by system control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
After the vehicle ahead of you starts off, press the “+RES” switch.
Your vehicle will also resume follow-up cruising if the accelerator pedal is depressed after the vehicle ahead of you starts off.
1 Pressing the cancel switch cancels the speed control.
The speed control is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.
(When the vehicle has been stopped by system control, depressing the brake pedal does not cancel the setting.)
2 Pressing the “+RES” switch resumes the cruise control and returns vehicle speed to the set speed.
However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected, cruise control does not resume when the vehicle speed is approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)
When your vehicle is too close to a vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic deceleration via the cruise control is not possible, the display will flash and the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.
An example of this would be if another driver cuts in front of you while you are following a vehicle. Depress the brake pedal to ensure an appropriate vehi-
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
248
4-5. Using the driving support systems cle-to-vehicle distance.
Immediately after the switch is pressed, the radar cruise control indicator will come on.
Afterwards, it switches to the cruise control indicator.
Switching to constant speed control mode is only possible when operating the switch with the cruise control off.
■ Warnings may not occur when
In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is small.
When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle speed
When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed
Immediately after the cruise control speed was set
When depressing the accelerator pedal
Selecting constant speed control mode
When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due to a dirty radar sensor, etc.
1 With the cruise control off, press and hold the cruise control main switch for 1.5 seconds or more.
2 Accelerate or decelerate, with accelerator pedal operation, to the desired vehicle speed (at or above approximately 25 mph [40 km/h]) and press the “-SET” switch to set the speed.
Cruise control “SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the moment the switch is released becomes the set speed.
Adjusting the speed setting: →
Canceling and resuming the speed setting:
→
■ Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when
● The shift position is in D.
● Range 4 or higher of D has been selected
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems by using the paddle shift switch.
● Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
However, when a preceding vehicle is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set even if the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the preceding vehicle.
■ When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising
● Pressing the “+RES” switch while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the switch is pressed.
● If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruising will be resumed.
■ Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no vehicles ahead.
● The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed at or below approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor cannot properly detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE
NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehicles” is displayed on the multi-information display.)
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● When snow mode is set.
249
● The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
● The parking brake is operated.
● The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.
● The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:
• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.
• The driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode
Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.
● Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
● TRAC is activated for a period of time.
● When the VSC or TRAC system is turned off.
● Pre-collision braking is activated.
If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ If “Radar Cruise Control Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display
The radar cruise control system cannot be used temporarily. Use the system when it becomes available again.
■ Brake system operation sound
When the brakes are operated in vehicle-to-vehicle distance mode, a brake operating sound may be heard. This is not a malfunction.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
250
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.
■ When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach warning (
→ P.247) may not be activated.
● Vehicles that cut in suddenly
● Vehicles traveling at low speeds
● Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane
● Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)
● Preceding vehicle has an extremely high ground clearance
■ Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function correctly
In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal, depending on the situation) as necessary.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not operate properly.
● When driving around a curve, on a narrow road, or on a bridge, in a tunnel, etc., where there are objects on the roadside
● Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
● When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of the sensor
● When your vehicle is pointing upwards
(caused by a heavy load in the luggage compartment, etc.)
● When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
● When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly
● While the vehicle speed is decreasing to the set speed after the vehicle accelerates by depressing the accelerator pedal.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
*
* : If equipped
The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that uses rear side radar sensors installed on the inner side of the rear bumper on the left and right side to assist the driver in confirming safety when changing lanes.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the system
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.
The Blind Spot Monitor is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the Blind Spot Monitor. As the function cannot judge if it is safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary.
251
B Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indicator on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator flashes.
C BSM indicator
Illuminates when the Blind Spot Monitor is enabled
■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.
■ When “BSM Not Available” is shown on the multi-information display
Ice, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors. (
The system should return to normal operation after removing the ice, snow, mud, etc. from the rear bumper. Additionally, the sensors may not operate normally when driving in extremely hot or cold environments.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
System components
4
A Meter control switches
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
252
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
For vehicles sold in Canada
WARNING
■ Handling the rear side radar sensor
Blind Spot Monitor sensors are installed behind the left and right sides of the rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can operate correctly.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas on the rear bumper clean at all times.
If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a warning message
( →
P.251) will be displayed. In this situa-
tion, clear off the dirt or snow and drive the vehicle with the operation conditions of the BSM function (
for approximately 10 minutes. If the warning message does not disappear, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
253
• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of them has become disconnected.
● Do not disassemble the sensor.
● Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.
● If a sensor or the rear bumper needs to be removed/installed or replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.
● Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.
Turning the Blind Spot Monitor on/off
Use the meter control switches to turn on/off the function.
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select and then press .
4
● Do not attach accessories, stickers
(including transparent stickers), aluminum tape, etc. to a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper.
● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong impact.
If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehicles may not be detected correctly.
In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
254
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Blind Spot Monitor operation
■ Vehicles that can be detected by the Blind Spot Monitor
The Blind Spot Monitor uses rear side radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.
A
B
Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)
■ The Blind Spot Monitor detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The range of each detection area is:
A Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle
*1
B Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper
C Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper
D Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper
*2
*1
: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle cannot be detected.
*2
: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
255
■
●
●
■
The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when
The Blind Spot Monitor is operational when all of the following conditions are met:
The Blind Spot Monitor is on.
● The shift position is in a position other than R.
The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle when
The Blind Spot Monitor will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situations:
● A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.
● You overtake a vehicle in adjacent lane slowly.
● Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.
■ Conditions under which the Blind Spot
Monitor will not detect a vehicle
The Blind Spot Monitor is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.
*
● Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects *
● Following vehicles that are in the same lane *
● Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle *
* : Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.
■
● the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror indicator to illuminate or flash.
Conditions under which the Blind Spot
Monitor may not function correctly
The Blind Spot Monitor may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Vehicles which are being overtaken rapidly by your vehicle.
• When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing
• When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle
• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle
• When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle that enters the detection area
• Immediately after the Blind Spot Monitor is turned on
● Instances of the Blind Spot Monitor unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:
• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its sur-
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
256
4-5. Using the driving support systems rounding area
• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the detection area is short
• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road, etc.
• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area
• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces
• When the tires are slipping or spinning
• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short
• When an accessory (such as a bicycle carrier) is installed to the rear of the vehicle
PKSA (Parking Support
Alert)
*
* : If equipped
The Parking Support Alert system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low speed or backing up, such as when parking. When the system determines that a collision with a detected object, such as a wall, or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action.
PKSA (Parking Support Alert) system
■ Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect static objects in the detection area when driving at a low speed or backing up. ( →
■ RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function (if equipped)
Radar sensors are used to detect approaching vehicles in the detection areas behind the vehicle when backing up. ( →
■ RCD (Rear camera detection) function (if equipped)
A rear camera sensor is used to detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up.
(
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Setting the buzzer volume
■ Adjusting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. The volume of buzzers for the intuitive parking assist, RCTA function and RCD function will be adjusted simultaneously.
Use the meter control switches to change settings. ( →
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select “PKSA” and then press .
3 Press or to select and then press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the volume level will change between 1, 2, and 3.
■ Muting a buzzer
A mute button will be displayed on the multi-information display when an object or pedestrian is detected. To mute the buzzer, press .
The buzzers for the intuitive parking assist, RCTA function and RCD function will be muted simultaneously.
Mute will be canceled automatically in the following situations:
When the shift position is changed.
When the operating function is temporarily canceled.
When the operating function is disabled manually.
When the engine switch is turned off.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Intuitive parking assist
*
System components
■ Types of sensors
257
* : If equipped
The distance from your vehicle to objects, such as a wall, when parallel parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via the multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped), Center Display and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this system.
A Front corner sensors
B Front center sensors
C Rear corner sensors
D Rear center sensors
■ Display
When the sensors detect an object, such as a wall, a graphic is shown on the multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and Center Display depending on the position and distance to the object.
Multi-information display and
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
258
4-5. Using the driving support systems head-up display
A Front corner sensor detection
B Front center sensor detection
C Rear corner sensor detection
D Rear center sensor detection
Center Display
A graphic is shown when the Lexus parking assist monitor (if equipped) is displayed.
A simplified image is displayed on the
Center Display when an object is detected.
• When the R shift position is selected
When an object is detected, a graphic will be displayed on the panoramic view monitor (if equipped).
• When the N, M or D shift position is selected (vehicle moving forward)
Turning intuitive parking assist on/off
Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the Lexus parking assist-sensor. (
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select “PKSA” and then press .
3 Press or to select and then press .
When the intuitive parking assist function is disabled, the intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (
nates on the multi-information display.
To re-enable the system when it was
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems disabled, select on the multi-information display, select and then On.
If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning the engine switch off and then to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
WARNING
■ When using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
● Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
● The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.
● Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.
● The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.
■ When to disable the function
In the following situations, disable the function as it may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.
● The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
● The front or rear bumper or a sensor receives a strong impact.
● A non-genuine Lexus suspension
(lowered suspension, etc.) is installed.
● Towing eyelets are installed.
● A backlit licence plate is installed.
259
■ When using intuitive parking assist
In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction, etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
● The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes or shows continuously, and a buzzer sounds when no objects are detected.
● If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.
● If the bumper or grille collides with something.
● If the display flashes or is displayed continuously and a buzzer does not sound, except when the mute function has been turned on.
● If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.
If the error occurs even when there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
● When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
■ The system can be operated when
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● Intuitive parking assist function is on.
● The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
260
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● A shift position other than P is selected.
■ Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. ( →
■ If “Parking Assist Unavailable Clean
Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information display
A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.
■ Sensor detection information
● The following situations may occur during use.
• Depending on the shape of the object and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.
• There will be a short delay between object detection and display. Even at low speeds, there is a possibility that the object will come within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.
• It might be difficult to hear the buzzer due to the volume of the audio system or air flow noise of the air conditioning system.
■ Conditions under which the function may not function correctly
Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a sensor to correctly detect objects. Particular instances where this may occur are listed below.
● There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
(Cleaning the sensors will resolve this problem.)
● A sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)
In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the sensor display may be displayed abnormally, or objects, such as a wall, may not be detected.
● A sensor is covered in any way.
● When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold.
● On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.
● The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
● There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
● A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.
● If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road.
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted.
● The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
● If objects draw too close to the sensor.
■ Objects which may not be properly detected
The shape of the object may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particular attention to the following objects:
● Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
● Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves
● Sharply-angled objects
● Low objects
● Tall objects with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle
People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
261
For vehicles sold in Canada
Sensor detection display, object distance
■ Detection range of the sensors
A Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
B Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
C Approximately 1.9 ft. (65 cm)
The diagram shows the detection range of the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot detect objects that are extremely close to the vehicle.
The range of the sensors may change depending on the shape of the object, etc.
4
■ Multi-information display, head-up display (if equipped) and Center Display
When an object is detected by a sensor, the approximate distance to the object will
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
262
4-5. Using the driving support systems be displayed on the multi-information display, Center Display, and head-up display
(if equipped). (As the distance to the object becomes short, the distance segments may blink.)
Approximate distance to object: 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)
*
(Rear center sensor)
Multi-information display Center Display Head-up display
* : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (
Approximate distance to object: 3.3 ft. (100 cm) to 1.9 ft. (65 cm)
*
(Front center sensor)
Multi-information display Center Display Head-up display
* : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (
Approximate distance to object: 1.9 ft. (65 cm) to 1.5 ft. (45 cm)
*
Multi-information display Center Display Head-up display
* : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (
Approximate distance to object: 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
*
Multi-information display Center Display Head-up display
* : Automatic buzzer mute function is enabled. (
Approximate distance to object: 1.0 ft. (30 cm) to 0.5 ft. (15 cm)
*1
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Multi-information display *2
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Center Display *2 Head-up display
263
*1 : Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (
*2 : The distance segments will blink slowly.
Approximate distance to object: Less than 0.5 ft. (15 cm) *1
Multi-information display *2 Center Display *2 Head-up display
*1 : Automatic buzzer mute function is disabled. (
*2 : The distance segments will blink rapidly.
■ Buzzer operation and distance to an object
A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.
and the detected object does not become shorter, the buzzer will be muted automatically. (However, if the distance between the vehicle and object is 1.0 ft. (30 cm) or less, this function will not operate.)
The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an object. When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the object, the buzzer sounds continuously:
The buzzer sounds volume can be adjusted. ( →
Approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm)
When 2 or more objects are detected simultaneously, the buzzer sounds for the nearest object. If one or more objects come within approximately 1.0 ft. (30 cm) of the vehicle, the buzzer will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.
Automatic buzzer mute function:
After a buzzer begins sounding, if the distance between the vehicle
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
264
4-5. Using the driving support systems
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function
* : If equipped
*
The RCTA function uses the BSM rear side radar sensors installed behind the rear bumper. This function is intended to assist the driver in checking areas that are not easily visible when backing up.
System components
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the RCTA icon ( →
side will be displayed on the Center Display. This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from both sides of the vehicle.
D RCTA buzzer
If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately after the RCTA function is turned on.
Turning the RCTA function on/off
Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the RCTA function.
(
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select “PKSA” and then press .
3 Press or to select “RCTA” and then press .
When the RCTA function is disabled, the
RCTA OFF indicator (
on the multi-information display. (Each time the engine switch is turned off then changed to IGNITION ON mode, the
RCTA function will be enabled automatically.)
A Meter control switches
Turning the RCTA function on/off.
When the RCTA function is disabled, the
RCTA OFF indicator illuminates.
B Outside rear view mirror indicators
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.
C Center Display
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ Cautions regarding the use of the function
The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings.
The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the
RCTA function may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirmation of safety is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident resulting death or serious injury.
■ Outside rear view mirror indicator visibility
In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mir-
265 ror indicator may be difficult to see.
■ Hearing the RCTA buzzer
The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system volume is high.
■ When “RCTA NOT AVAILABLE” is shown on the multi-information display
Water, snow, mud, etc., may be attached to the rear bumper around the sensors.
(
→ P.253) Removing the water, snow, mud,
etc., from the attached to the rear bumper around the sensors to normal.
Additionally, the function may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold environments.
■ Rear side radar sensors
→
4
RCTA function
■ Operation of the RCTA function
The RCTA function uses rear side radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a buzzer.
A Approaching vehicles
B Detection areas of approaching vehicles
■ RCTA icon display
When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the following will be displayed on the Center Display.
Example (Lexus parking assist mon-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
266
4-5. Using the driving support systems itor) (if equipped): Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the vehicle
■ RCTA function detection areas
The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.
The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away.
Example:
Approaching vehicle speed
18 mph (28 km/h)
(fast)
5 mph (8 km/h)
(slow)
A Approximate alert distance
65 ft. (20 m)
18 ft. (5.5 m)
■ The RCTA function is operational when
The RCTA function operates when all of the following conditions are met:
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The RCTA function is on.
● The shift position is in R.
● The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
● The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph (28 km/h).
■ Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. (
■ Conditions under which the RCTA function will not detect a vehicle
The RCTA function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
267
● Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects
● Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.
● Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle
■ Conditions under which the RCTA function may not function correctly
● The RCTA function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:
• When a sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surrounding area
• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper
• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather, such as heavy rain, snow, or fog
• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
• If a vehicle is approaching the rear of your vehicle rapidly
• When a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle.
• When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade
• When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot
• Immediately after the RCTA function is turned on
• Immediately after the engine is started with the RCTA function on
• When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle due to obstructions
4
● Instances of the RCTA function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may increase in the following situations:
• When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle
• When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
268
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short
• When a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle
RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function
*
* : If equipped
When the vehicle is backing up, the rear camera detection function can detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle. If a pedestrian is detected, a buzzer will sound and an icon will be displayed on the Center Display to inform the driver of the pedestrian.
Center Display
A Pedestrian detection icon
Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected.
B RCD OFF icon
When the RCD function is disabled, the
RCD OFF icon illuminates. (Each time the engine switch is turned off then changed to
IGNITION ON mode, the RCD function will be enabled automatically.)
Turning the RCD function on/off
Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the RCD function.
(
1 Press or to select .
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
2 Press or to select “PKSA” and then press .
3 Press or to select “RCD” and then press .
When the RCD function is disabled, the
RCD OFF icon ( →
multi-information display.
269
C
Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3 times and then stays on
If the system determines that your vehicle may collide with a pedestrian in area C
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3 times and then stays on
When a pedestrian is detected
If the rear camera detection function detects a pedestrian in the detection area, the buzzer and pedestrian detection will operate as follows:
A
B
If a pedestrian is detected in area
A
Buzzer: Sounds repeatedly
Pedestrian detection icon: Blinks 3 times and then stays on
If a pedestrian is detected in area
B
Buzzer (When the vehicle is stationary): Sounds 3 times
Buzzer (When the vehicle is backing up, when a pedestrian approaches the rear of the vehicle):
■ The rear camera detection function is operational when
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● RCD function is on.
● The shift position is in R.
■ Setting the buzzer volume
The buzzer volume can be adjusted on the multi-information display. (
■ If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable
Remove the Dirt of Rear Camera” is displayed on the multi-information display
A rear camera lens may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the rear camera lens, the system should return to normal. (It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for some time before the system returns to normal.)
■ If “Rear Camera Detection Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display
● If this message is displayed after the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, fully turn the steering wheel to the left and then the right on level ground.
● If this message is displayed only when the
R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the rear camera lens.
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
270
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are lying down
• Pedestrians who are running
• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the detection area
• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard, or other light vehicle
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by an object, such as a cart or umbrella
• Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night
● In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the rear camera detection function, preventing the function from operating properly:
• When backing up in inclement weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.)
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera
• When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot
• When backing up in a dim environment such as during dusk or in an underground parking lot
● Even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area, some objects, such as the following, may be detected, possibly causing the rear camera detection function to operate.
• Three dimensional objects, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle
• Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle
• Objects moving toward your vehicle when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow)
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails, road repairs, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the road
• Metal covers (gratings), such as those used for drainage ditches
• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface
• The roadside or bumps on the road
• Shadows on the road
● In some situations, such as the following, the rear camera detection function may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area.
• When backing up toward the roadside or a bump on the road
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as when carrying a heavy load
• When backing up toward an incline/decline
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate or rear fog light, is installed near the rear camera
• If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper
• If the orientation of the rear camera has been changed due to a collision or other impact, or removal and installation
• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When water is flowing over the rear camera lens
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emergency flashers of another vehicle
● Situations in which the rear camera detection function may be difficult to notice
• If buzzer may be difficult to hear if the surrounding area is noisy, the volume of the audio system volume is high, the air conditioning system is being used, etc.
• If the temperature in the cabin is extremely high or low, the audio system screen may not operate correctly.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake)
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system
*
4-5. Using the driving support systems
* : If equipped
The Parking Support Brake system consists of the following functions that operate when driving at a low speed or backing up, such as when parking. When the system determines that a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is high, a warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action. If the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.
271
■ Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) (if equipped)
A rear camera sensor is used to detect pedestrians in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up.
(
WARNING
■ Limitations of the Parking Support
Brake system
Do not overly rely on the system, as doing so may lead to an accident.
● The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive carefully, taking care to observe your surroundings.
The Parking Support Brake system is designed to provide support to lessen the severity of collisions. However, it may not operate in some situations.
● The Parking Support Brake system is not designed to stop the vehicle completely. Additionally, even if the system has stopped the vehicle, it is necessary to depress the brake pedal immediately as brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.
■ Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) (if equipped)
Ultrasonic sensors are used to detect static objects, such as a wall, in the detection area when driving at a low speed or backing up. ( →
■ Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) (if equipped)
Rear radar sensors are used to detect approaching vehicles in the detection area behind the vehicle when backing up. (
NOTICE
■ If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing
If this message is displayed immediately after the engine switch is changed to
IGNITION ON mode, operate the vehicle carefully, paying attention to your surroundings. It may be necessary to drive the vehicle for a certain amount of time before the system returns to normal. (If the system is not return to normal after driving for a while, clean the rear camera lens.)
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
272
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Enabling/Disabling the Parking
Support Brake
The Parking Support Brake can be enabled/disabled on the multi-information display. All of the Parking Support
Brake functions (static objects, rear-crossing vehicles, and rear pedestrians) are enabled/disabled simultaneously.
Use the meter control switches to enable/disable the parking support brake. (
1 Press or to select .
2 Press or to select and then press .
When the Parking Support Brake is disabled, the PKSB OFF indicator (
illuminates on the multi-information display.
To re-enable the system when it was disabled, select on the multi-information display, select and then On. If disabled using this method, the system will not be re-enabled by turning the engine switch off and then to IGNITION ON mode.
Displays and buzzers for engine output restriction control and brake control
If the engine output restriction control or brake control operates, a buzzer will sound and a message will be displayed on the
Center Display and multi-information display, to alert the driver. On vehicles with a head-up display, the head-up display will display the same message as the multi-information display.
Depending on the situation, engine output restriction control will operate to either limit acceleration or restrict output as much as possible.
Engine output restriction control is operating (acceleration restriction)
Acceleration greater than a certain amount is restricted by the system.
Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
No warning displayed
Multi-information display: “Object
Detected Acceleration Reduced”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Does not sound
Engine output restriction control is operating (output restricted as much as possible)
The system has determined that stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary.
Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
“BRAKE!”
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Brake control is operating
The system determined that emergency braking is necessary.
Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
“BRAKE!”
Multi-information display: “BRAKE!”
PKSB OFF indicator: Not illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
Vehicle stopped by system operation
The vehicle has been stopped by brake control operation.
Center Display (Panoramic view monitor):
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
“Press Brake Pedal”
Multi-information display: “Switch to
Brake” (If the accelerator pedal is not depressed, “Press Brake Pedal” will be displayed.)
PKSB OFF indicator: Illuminated
Buzzer: Short beep
273
System overview
If the Parking Support Brake determines that a collision with a detected object or pedestrian is possible, the engine output will be restricted to restrain any increase in the vehicle speed. (Engine output restriction control: See figure 2 below.)
Additionally, if the accelerator pedal continues to be depressed, the brakes will be applied automatically to reduce the vehicle speed. (Brake control: See figure 3 below.)
Figure 1 When the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) is disabled
4
A Engine output
B Braking force
C Time
Figure 2 When engine output restriction control operates
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
274
4-5. Using the driving support systems
C
D
A
B
E
F
G
Engine output
Braking force
Time
Engine output restriction control begins operating
System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high
Engine output reduced
Example: Multi-infomation display:
“BRAKE!”
Figure 3 When brake control operates
A
B
C
Engine output
Braking force
Time
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
275
H
I
J
F
G
D
E
Engine output restriction control begins operating
System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is high
Engine output reduced
System determines that possibility of collision with detected object is extremely high
Brake control begins operating
K
Brake control strength increased
Example: Multi-infomation display:
“BRAKE!”
Example: Multi-infomation display: “Switch to Brake”
■ If the Parking Support Brake has operated
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, the Parking
Support Brake will be disabled and the
PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate. If the
Parking Support Brake operates unnecessarily, brake control can be canceled by depressing the brake pedal or waiting for approximately 2 seconds for it to automatically be canceled. Then, the vehicle can be operated by depressing the accelerator pedal.
■ Re-enabling the Parking Support Brake
To re-enable the Parking Support Brake when it is disabled due to operation of the
Parking Support Brake, either enable the system again ( →
switch off and then back to IGNITION ON mode. Additionally, if the object becomes no longer in the traveling direction of the vehicle or if the traveling direction of the vehicle changes (such as changing from moving forward to backing up, or from backing up to moving forward), the system will be re-enabled automatically.
■ If “Parking Support Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-information display and the PKSB OFF indicator is flashing
If the vehicle is stopped due to operation of the Parking Support Brake, the Parking
Support Brake will be disabled and the
PKSB OFF indicator will illuminate.
● A sensor may be covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. Remove the ice, snow, dirt, etc., from the sensor to return the system to normal.
Also, due to ice forming on a sensor at low temperatures, a warning message may be displayed or the sensor may not be able to detect an object. Once the ice melts, the system will return to normal.
● If this message is displayed only when the
R shift position is selected, the rear camera lens may be dirty. Clean the camera lens. If this message is displayed in any forward shift position, a sensor on the front or rear bumper may be dirty. Clean the sensors and their surrounding area on the bumpers.
● If this message continues to be displayed even after cleaning the sensor, or is displayed even though the sensor is clean, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
● Initialization may not have been performed after a battery terminal was disconnected and reconnected. Initialize the system. ( →
If this message continues to be displayed even after initialization, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected
The system needs to be initialized. To initialize the system, drive the vehicle straight ahead for 5 seconds or more at a speed of approximately 22 mph (35 km/h) or more.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
276
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Additionally, for vehicles with the Parking
Support Brake function, turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right with the vehicle stopped.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Parking Support Brake function (static objects)
*
277
* : If equipped
If the sensors detect a static object, such as a wall, in the travelling direction of the vehicle and the system determines that a collision may occur due to the vehicle suddenly moving forward due to an accidental accelerator pedal operation, the vehicle moving the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected, or while parking or traveling at low speeds, the system will operate to lessen the impact with the detected static object and reduce the resulting damage.
Examples of function operation
This function will operate in situations such as the following if an object is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When traveling at a low speed and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
278
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ When the accelerator pedal is depressed excessively
■ When the vehicle moves in the unintended direction due to the wrong shift position being selected
Types of sensors
→
WARNING
■ To ensure the Parking Support Brake can operate properly
Observe the following precautions regarding the sensors (
to do so may cause a sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.
● Do not replace a sensor with a part other than a genuine part.
● Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area to a strong impact.
● Do not damage the sensors, and always keep them clean.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
● If the area around a radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Handling the suspension
Do not modify the suspension, as changes to the height or inclination of the vehicle may prevent the sensors from detecting objects correctly or cause the system to not operate or operate unnecessarily.
■ If the Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing
In the event that the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) operates unnecessarily, such as at a railroad crossing, brake control will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds, allowing you to proceed forward and leave the area, brake control can also be canceled by depressing the brake pedal. Depressing the accelerator pedal after brake control is canceled will allow you to proceed forward and leave the area.
■ Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
● When using a high pressure washer to wash the vehicle, do not spray the sensors directly, as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
● When using steam to clean the vehicle, do not direct steam too close to the sensors as doing so may cause a sensor to malfunction.
■ When to disable the Parking Support
Brake
In the following situations, disable the
Parking Support Brake as the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.
● When inspecting the vehicle using a chassis roller, chassis dynamo or free roller
● When loading the vehicle onto a boat, truck or other transport vessel
● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
● When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eyelet, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
■ The Parking Support Brake function
(static object) will operate when
279
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing
(
→ P.65, 66) and all of the following condi-
tions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• There is a static object in the traveling direction of the vehicle and 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away.
• The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger-than-normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an immediate brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision.
■ The Parking Support Brake function
(static objects) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The system determines that the collision has become avoidable with normal brake operation.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
280
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The static object is no longer 6 to 13 ft. (2 to 4 m) away from the vehicle or in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ Detection range of the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects)
The detection range of the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) differs from the detection range of the intuitive parking assist. (
→ P.261) Therefore, even if the intui-
tive parking assist detects an object and provides a warning, the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may not start operating.
■ Objects that the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may not detect
The sensors may not be able to detect certain objects, such as the following:
● Pedestrian
● Cotton cloth, snow, and other materials that are poor reflectors of ultrasonic waves
● Objects which are not perpendicular to the ground, are not perpendicular to the traveling direction of the vehicle, are uneven or are waving
● Low objects
● Thin objects such as wires, fences, ropes and signposts
● Objects that are extremely close to the bumper
■ Intuitive parking assist buzzer
Regardless of whether the intuitive parking assist system is enabled or not ( →
the Parking Support Brake function (static objects) is enabled ( →
rear sensors detect an object and brake control is performed, the intuitive parking assist buzzer will sound to notify the driver of the approximate distance to the object.
■ Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may operate even if there is no possibility of a collision
In some situations, such as the following, the
Parking Support Brake function (static objects) may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.
● Vehicle surroundings
• When driving on a narrow road
• When driving on a gravel road or in an area with tall grass
• When driving toward a banner, flag, low-hanging branch or boom barrier
(such as those used at railroad crossings, toll gates and parking lots)
• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on an iron bridge
• When parallel parking
• When there is a rut or hole in the surface of the road
• When driving on a metal cover (grating), such as those used for drainage ditches
• When driving on a steep slope
• If a sensor is hit by a large amount of water, such as when driving on a flooded road
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Weather
• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
• When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
● Other ultrasonic wave sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact
■ Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (static objects) may not operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, this function may not operate properly.
● Weather
• When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold
281
• If a sensor is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc. (when cleared, the system will return to normal)
• If heavy rain or water strikes a sensor
• When driving in inclement weather such as fog, snow or a sandstorm
● Vehicle surroundings
• When an object that cannot be detected is between the vehicle and a detected object
• If an object such as a vehicle, motorcycle, bicycle or pedestrian cuts in front of the vehicle or runs out from the side of the vehicle
● Other ultrasonic waves sources
• When vehicle horns, vehicle detectors, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, the clearance sonar of other vehicles or other devices which produce ultrasonic waves are near the vehicle
• If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a sensor
● Changes in the vehicle posture
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted
• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If the orientation of a sensor has been changed due to a collision or other impact
4
• When strong winds are blowing
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
282
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
*
* : If equipped
If a rear radar sensor detects a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle and the system determines that the possibility of a collision is high, this function will perform brake control to reduce the likelihood of an impact with the approaching vehicle.
Examples of function operation
This function will operate in situations such as the following if a vehicle is detected in the traveling direction of the vehicle.
■ When reversing, a vehicle is approaching and the brake pedal is not depressed, or is depressed late
Types of sensors
→
WARNING
Observe the following precautions regarding the rear radar sensors
( →
P.253). Failure to do so may cause a
sensor to not operate properly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not modify, disassemble or paint the sensors.
● Do not replace a rear radar sensor with a part other than a genuine part.
● Do not damage the rear radar sensors, and always keep the radar sensors and their surrounding area on the bumper clean.
■ To prevent a rear radar sensor from malfunctioning
● If the area around a rear radar sensor is subjected to an impact, the system may not operate properly due to a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Observe the rear radar sensor handling precautions. ( →
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) will operate when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing
( →
P.65, 66) and all of the following condi-
tions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
• The shift position is in R.
• The Parking Support Brake determines that a stronger than normal brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle.
■ The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• A vehicle is no longer approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle.
■ Detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles)
The detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) differs from the detection area of the RCTA function ( →
P.266). Therefore, even if the
RCTA function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating.
■ Conditions under which the Parking
Support Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) will not detect a vehicle
The Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or objects:
● Vehicles approaching from directly behind
● Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle
● Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to obstructions
●
●
●
●
●
●
283
Vehicles which suddenly accelerate or decelerate near your vehicle
Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects
Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.
Vehicles moving away from your vehicle
● Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle
Objects which are extremely close to a radar sensor
Vehicles which are approaching from the
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
284
4-5. Using the driving support systems right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
● Vehicles which are approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle at a traveling speed of more than approximately 15 mph (24 km/h)
■ PKSB buzzer
If the Parking Support Brake is enabled and brake control is performed, a buzzer will sound to notify the driver.
■ Situations in which the system may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision
In some situations such as the following, the
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) may operate even though there is no possibility of a collision.
● When the parking space faces a street and vehicles are being driven on the street
● When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail, wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of the vehicle, is short
● When a detected vehicle turns while approaching the vehicle
● When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle
● When there are spinning objects near your vehicle such as the fan of an air conditioning unit
● When water is splashed or sprayed toward the rear bumper, such as from a sprinkler
■ Situations in which the Parking Support
Brake function (rear-crossing vehicles) may not operate properly
In some situations, such as the following, the radar sensors may not detect an object and this function may not operate properly
● Stationary objects
● When a sensor or the area around a sensor is extremely hot or cold
● If the rear bumper is covered with ice, snow, dirt, etc.
● When it is raining heavily or water strikes the vehicle
● If the vehicle is significantly tilted
● When equipment that may obstruct a sensor is installed, such as a towing eye-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems let, bumper protector (an additional trim strip, etc.), bicycle carrier, or snow plow
● If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
● If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
● If a sticker or an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate (especially fluorescent type), fog lights, fender pole or wireless antenna is installed near a radar sensor
● If the orientation of a radar sensor has been changed
● When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle
● If a vehicle is approaching the rear of your vehicle rapidly
● Situations in which the radar sensor may not detect a vehicle
• When a vehicle approaches from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle while you are turning while backing up
• When turning while backing up
285
• When backing up on a slope with a sharp change in grade
• When a vehicle turns into the detection area 4
• When backing out of a shallow angle parking spot
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
286
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians)
*
* : If equipped
If the rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is high, a buzzer will sound. If the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is extremely high, the brakes will be applied automatically to help reduce the impact of the collision.
Examples of system operation
When a pedestrian is detected behind the vehicle while backing up, the brake pedal is not depressed or is depressed late.
Center Display
Displays a message to urge the driver to take evasive action when a pedestrian is detected in the detection area behind the vehicle. (A message will also be displayed on the multi-information display and head-up display (if equipped).)
A Pedestrian detection icon with brake reminder
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ If the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) operates unnecessarily
Depress the brake pedal immediately after the Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) operates. (Operation of the function is canceled by depressing the brake pedal.)
■ Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) will operate when
The function will operate when the PKSB
OFF indicator is not illuminated or flashing
( →
P.65, 66) and all of the following condi-
tions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is enabled.
• The vehicle speed is 10 mph (15 km/h) or less.
• The shift position is in R.
• The rear camera sensor detects a pedestrian behind the vehicle while backing up and the system determines that the possibility of colliding with the detected pedestrian is high.
● Brake control
• Engine output restriction control is operating
• The Parking Support Brake determines that an emergency brake operation is necessary to avoid a collision with a pedestrians.
■ The Parking Support Brake function
(rear pedestrians) will stop operating when
The function will stop operating if any of the following conditions are met:
● Engine output restriction control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• The collision becomes avoidable with normal brake operation.
• The pedestrian is no longer detected behind your vehicle.
● Brake control
• The Parking Support Brake is disabled.
• Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the vehicle was stopped by brake
287 control.
• The brake pedal is depressed after the vehicle is stopped by brake control.
• The pedestrian is no longer detected behind your vehicle.
■ Detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear pedestrians)
The detection area of the Parking Support
Brake function (rear pedestrians) differs from the detection area of the RCD function ( →
P.269). Therefore, even if the RCD
function detects a vehicle and provides an alert, the Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles) may not start operating.
■ Situations in which the system may not operate properly
● Some pedestrians, such as the following, may not be detected by the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians), preventing the function from operating properly:
• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting
• Pedestrians who are lying down
• Pedestrians who are running
• Pedestrians who suddenly enter the detection area
• Pedestrians riding a bicycle, skateboard, or other light vehicle
• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing such as a rain coat, long skirt, etc., making their silhouette obscure
• Pedestrians whose body is partially hidden by an object, such as a cart or umbrella
• Pedestrians which are obscured by darkness, such as at night
● In some situations, such as the following, pedestrians may not be detected by the
Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians), preventing the function from operating properly:
• When backing up in inclement weather
(rain, snow, fog, etc.)
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• When a very bright light, such as the sun, or the headlights of another vehicle, shines directly into the rear camera
• When backing up in a place where the surrounding brightness changes sud-
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
288
4-5. Using the driving support systems denly, such as at the entrance or exit of a garage or underground parking lot
• When backing up in a dim environment such as during dusk or in an underground parking lot
● Even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area, some objects, such as the following, may be detected, possibly causing the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) to operate.
• Three dimensional objects, such as a pole, traffic cone, fence, or parked vehicle
• Moving objects, such as a car or motorcycle
• Objects moving toward your vehicle when backing up, such as flags or puddles (or airborne matter, such as smoke, steam, rain, or snow)
• Cobblestone or gravel roads, tram rails, road repairs, white lines, pedestrian crossings or fallen leaves on the road
• Metal covers (gratings), such as those used for drainage ditches
• Objects reflected in a puddle or on a wet road surface
• The roadside or bumps on the road
• Shadows on the road
● In some situations, such as the following, the Parking Support Brake function (rear pedestrians) may operate even though there are no pedestrians in the detection area.
• When backing up toward the roadside or a bump on the road
• If the vehicle is significantly tilted, such as when carrying a heavy load
• When backing up toward an incline/decline
• If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
• If the rear of the vehicle is raised or lowered due to the carried load
• If an electronic component, such as a backlit license plate or rear fog light, is installed near the rear camera
• If a bumper protector, such as an additional trim strip, is installed to the rear bumper
• If the orientation of the rear camera has been changed due to a collision or other impact, or removal and installation
• If a towing eyelet is installed to the rear of the vehicle
• When water is flowing over the rear camera lens
• When the rear camera is obscured (dirt, snow, ice, etc. are attached) or scratched
• If there is a flashing light in the detection area, such as the emergency flashers of another vehicle
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Driving mode select switch
The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.
4-5. Using the driving support systems
289 on roads with many curves.
When not in sport mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned forward, the sport mode indicator will comes on.
Vehicles with Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
Selecting a drive mode
Vehicles without Adaptive Variable
Suspension System
1 Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance.
Suitable for city driving.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when not in normal mode.
2 Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel economy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
When not in Eco drive mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned backward, the
Eco drive mode indicator will come on.
3 Sport mode
Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This mode also changes the steering feel, making it suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such as when driving
A Except F SPORT models
B F SPORT models
1 Normal mode/Custom mode
Normal mode and custom mode are selected by pressing the driving mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode changes between normal mode and custom mode.
When normal mode is selected, the normal mode indicator comes on.
When custom mode is selected, the custom mode indicator comes on.
Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when not in normal mode.
• Normal mode
Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic performance.
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
290
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Suitable for city driving.
When the shift position is in D, an appropriate gear for sporty driving may automatically be selected according to driver performance and driving conditions.
• Custom mode
Allows you to drive with the powertrain, chassis and air conditioning system functions set to your preferred settings. Custom mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode customization display of the Center Display. ( →
2 Comfort mode
By controlling the suspension, riding comfort is further enhanced. Suitable for city driving.
When not in comfort mode and the driving mode select switch is turned backward, the comfort mode indicator comes on.
3 Eco drive mode
Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel economy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the operation of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).
When in comfort mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned backward, the Eco drive mode indicator comes on.
4 Sport mode
• Sport S mode
Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful acceleration. This mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such as when driving on roads with many curves.
When not in Sport S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned forward, the
Sport S mode indicator comes on.
• Sport S+ mode
Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultaneously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the transmission and engine.
Suitable for sportier driving.
When in Sport S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned forward, the Sport
S+ mode indicator comes on.
■ If the driving mode select switch is operated while the opening screen is being displayed
If the driving mode select switch is operated while the opening screen is being displayed, the driving mode will be changed and the meter display will change accordingly after the opening screen operation has completed.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air conditioning system to enhance fuel efficiency.
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode
( →
● Adjust the fan speed ( →
● Turn off Eco drive mode
■ Automatic deactivation of sport mode and custom mode
If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or custom mode, the drive mode will be changed to normal mode.
■ Driving mode pop-up display
When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily displayed on the side display. (
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Electronically modulated air suspension
*
* : If equipped
The height of the vehicle when driving can be selected using the vehicle height adjustment switch. The selected height level will be maintained regardless of the number of passengers or weight of cargo.
Additionally, settings of the following functions can be changed:
Access mode control
Parking height control
Vehicle height control
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Situations in which the vehicle height control may not operate properly
● In the following situations, the vehicle height may change slowly or may not change to the correct height:
• When the vehicle comes into contact with snow, ice, stone, etc.
• When the ambient temperature is low
• When the accumulator tank pressure is low
● In the following situations, the vehicle height may not change:
• If the hood or trunk is not fully closed
• If the brake pedal depressed and the vehicle is stopped
• When the vehicle is on a significantly uneven or undulating road
• When the vehicle is on a slanted road or a slope
■ Operating sound of the air suspension compressor and valves
When the vehicle height is changed, such as due to passengers entering the vehicle or cargo being loaded, or when the vehicle height is changed using the vehicle height adjustment switch, the air suspension compressor and valves may operate and a sound may be heard. This does not indicate
291 a malfunction.
■ When the accumulator tank pressure is low
When the accumulator tank pressure is low, the air suspension compressor and valves may operate repeatedly even though the vehicle height is not being changed. This does not indicate a malfunction.
WARNING
■ Situations in which the operation of the electronically modulated air suspension should be canceled
In the following situations, make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension and then stopping the engine. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change and part of your body may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury.
● When the vehicle is parked on a curb
● If any of the wheels is not touching the ground
● If the vehicle needs to be jacked up
● If the vehicle is to be tied down
● If the vehicle is to be towed
■ Vehicle height control precautions
In the following situations, make sure to check the safety of the area around the vehicle, as the vehicle height may change and part of someone’s body may be caught in the vehicle, possibly causing injury or the vehicle may be damaged.
● When opening a door
● When unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start
● When changing the vehicle height using the vehicle height adjustment switch
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
292
4-5. Using the driving support systems
NOTICE
■ Parking precaution
If the vehicle is parked for a long time, the vehicle height may change due to changes in the ambient temperature.
When parking the vehicle, make sure that the area above and below the vehicle is clear, so that the vehicle will not contact anything if its height changes.
Be careful when parking the vehicle in an area with a low ceiling or near low hanging objects, as the vehicle height will increase when passengers exit the vehicle and the access mode control operates.
Selecting the vehicle height
To adjust the vehicle height to one appropriate for road and driving conditions, press the vehicle height adjustment switch.
When high mode is enabled, the high mode indicator on the meter will illuminate.
When the vehicle height is increased by the access mode control function, press the vehicle height adjustment switch twice to enable/disable high mode.
■ The vehicle height adjustment switch can be changed when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ System protection function
If the vehicle height is repeatedly increased and decreased using the vehicle height adjustment switch, etc., the system may not operate temporarily.
Changing setting of the access mode control and parking height control
The following settings can be changed using the meter control switches for the easy access to the vehicle. (
1
2 Press or to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
3
Press
Press
or
or and then press
to select
to select
.
.
4 Press or to select “Access
Mode” or “Select Parking Height” and then press .
These settings are memorized even if the engine switch is turned off.
Access mode control (“Access
Mode”)
When access mode control is enabled, the vehicle height will increase automatically in the following situations:
• When the doors are unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start
• When the doors are unlocked using the wireless remote control and then a door is opened.
The vehicle height will increase by approximately 1.2 in. (30 mm) from its normal position.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
The vehicle height may not increase, if the vehicle height already reaches the selected height.
The vehicle will return to its normal height when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
When access mode control is disabled, the parking height control will also be disabled.
Parking height control (“Select
Parking Height”)
When “High” is selected, the vehicle height will automatically increase when the P shift position is selected and a door is opened.
The vehicle height will increase by approximately 0.4 in. (10 mm) from its normal position.
The vehicle height may not increase, if the vehicle height already reaches the selected height.
The vehicle will return to its normal height when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h).
■ When the vehicle height has been increased by the access mode control function
Press the vehicle height adjustment switch with the engine switch in any mode to return the vehicle to its previous vehicle height.
■ Situations in which the access mode control function will not operate
The access mode control function will not operate if the vehicle is not parked on a level road surface.
2
3
Press
Press
or
or and then press
293
to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press
to select
.
.
4 Press or to select “Height
Control” and then press .
This setting is memorized even if the engine switch is turned off.
Even if the vehicle height control functions are disabled, they will be enabled automatically when the vehicle speed reaches approximately 19 mph (30 km/h).
■ When “Check Air Suspension System” is displayed on the multi-information display
The system may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
4
Disabling the vehicle height control functions
The vehicle height control functions can be disabled using the meter control switches. (
1 Press or to select .
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
294
■
Summary of the driving assist systems
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving assist systems
To keep driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
ECB (Electronically Controlled
Brake System) (if equipped)
The electronically controlled system generates braking force corresponding to the brake operation
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
■
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.
■
Brake assist
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Secondary Collision Brake
When the airbag sensor detects a collision, the brakes and brake lights are automatically controlled to reduce the vehicle speed and that helps reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
■ Hill-start assist control
Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an uphill
■ VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (if equipped)
Adjusts the front wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and steering wheel movement
■ DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) (if equipped)
Contributes to the turning characteristics and responsiveness of the vehicle by adjusting the rear wheel angle of the vehicle in accordance with steering wheel movement.
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel.
■ Active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped)
Reduces sway when cornering according to steering wheel movement in order to maintain a stable vehicle posture.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
■ Adaptive Variable Suspension System (if equipped)
By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system helps riding comfort with superior vehicle stability, and helps good vehicle posture.
Also, the damping force changes depending on the selected driving mode. ( →
■ LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling system) (if equipped)
Provides integrated control of the
VGRS, DRS and EPS. Contributes to turning characteristics at low speeds, responsiveness at medium speeds and safety at high speeds by controlling the steering angle of the front and rear wheels in accordance with the steering wheel operation and vehicle speed.
■ VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management)
Provides integrated control of the
ABS, brake assist, TRAC, VSC, hill-start assist control, EPS, VGRS (if equipped), DRS (if equipped), active stabilizer suspension system (if equipped) and Adaptive Variable Suspension System (if equipped)
Helps to maintain vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, engine output, steering assist, and steering ratio
295
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating (vehicles without Lexus
Safety System+A)
The slip indicator light will flash while the
TRAC/VSC systems are operating.
■ When the TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)
The slip indicator light will flash while the
TRAC/VSC/ABS systems are operating.
■ Disabling the TRAC system
If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing the switch to turn the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the switch.
The “Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.
Press the tem back on.
switch again to turn the sys-
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
296
■ Disabling both TRAC and VSC systems
To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold the switch for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.
The VSC OFF indicator light will come on and the “Traction Control Turned Off” will be shown on the multi-information display.
*
Press the tem back on.
switch again to turn the sys-
* : On vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision
System), PCS will also be disabled (only
Pre-Collision warning is available). The
PCS warning light will come on and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display. (
■ When the message is displayed on the multi-information display showing that
TRAC has been disabled even if the
switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your
Lexus dealer.
■ Operating conditions of hill-start assist control
When the following four conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will operate:
● The shift position is in a position other than P or N (when stating off forward/backward on an upward incline)
● The vehicle is stopped
● The accelerator pedal is not depressed
● The parking brake is not engaged
■ Automatic system cancelation of hill-start assist control
The hill-start assist control will turn off in any of the following situations:
4-5. Using the driving support systems
● Shift the shift position to P or N
● The accelerator pedal is depressed
● The parking brake is engaged
● 2 seconds at maximum elapsed after the brake pedal is released
■ VGRS is disabled when
VGRS may stop operating in the following situations.
In this event, the steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but it will return when the system restarts.
● When the steering wheel is operated for an extended period of time while the vehicle is stopped or is moving very slowly (on vehicles with LDH, DRS is disabled together with VGRS)
● When the steering wheel has been held fully to the left or right
The center position of the steering wheel may change when VGRS is disabled. However, the position will return to normal after
VGRS is reactivated.
■ When the battery is disconnected (vehicles with VGRS)
The steering wheel may move from its straight forward position, but this will be corrected automatically when driving.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the
ABS, brake assist, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control and VGRS systems
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard also after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A: The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-5. Using the driving support systems
• Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A: The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ ECB operating sound
ECB operating sound may be heard in the following cases, but it does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred.
● Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when the brake pedal is operated.
● Motor sound of the brake system heard from the front part of the vehicle when the driver’s door is opened.
● Operating sound heard from the engine compartment when one or two minutes passed after the stop of the engine.
■ EPS, VGRS and DRS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and
VSC systems
After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automatically re-enabled in the following situations:
● When the engine switch is turned off
● If only the TRAC system is turned off, the
TRAC will turn on when vehicle speed increases
If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic re-enabling will not occur when vehicle speed increases.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result.
Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
■ Secondary Collision Brake operating conditions
The vehicle speed is approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or more and the airbag sensor detects a collision. (The Secondary Collision Brake will not operate when the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph [10 km/h].)
■ Secondary Collision Brake automatic cancellation
The Secondary Collision Brake is automatically canceled in the following situations:
● The vehicle speed drops below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
● A certain amount of time elapses during operation
● The accelerator pedal is depressed a large amount
■ When “Check VGRS System” or
“CHECK DRS” is displayed on the multi-information display
The VGRS or DRS may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
WARNING
297
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of normal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
298
4-5. Using the driving support systems
WARNING
■ TRAC/VSC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC/VSC system is operating. Drive the vehicle carefully in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ Hill-start assist control does not operate effectively when
● Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice.
● Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.
■ When the TRAC/VSC is activated
(vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A)
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/ABS/VSC is activated (vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A)
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Secondary Collision Brake
Do not overly rely on the Secondary Collision Brake. This system is designed to help reduce the possibility of further damage due to a secondary collision, however, that effect changes according to various conditions. Overly relying on the system may result in death or serious injury.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4-6.Driving tips
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Preparation for winter
Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.
*
Ensure that all tires are the specified size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.
*
: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes.
WARNING
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
4-6. Driving tips
299
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ When installing tire chains
Before installing tire chains, make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change while installing the tire chains and part or your body may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury. (
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failure to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.
● Do not use LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) system. (if equipped)
● Do not use LKA (Lane-Keeping
Assist) system. (if equipped)
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
300
4-6. Driving tips
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.
Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.
Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.
When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.
When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and shift the shift position to P without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the wheels.
Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.
Selecting tire chains
Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
A Side chain (0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter)
B Cross chain (0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter)
Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes
Tire chains cannot be mounted.
Snow tires should be used instead.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Regulations on the use of tire chains
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 ⎯ 1/2 mile (0.5
⎯ 1.0 km).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
NOTICE
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.
Windshield wipers
To enable the windshield wipers to be lifted when heavy snow or icy conditions are expected, change the rest position of the windshield wipers from the retracted position below the hood to the service position using the wiper lever. (
4-6. Driving tips
301
4
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
302
4-6. Driving tips
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Interior features
5
.
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Remote Touch............................
Center Display...........................
Rear Multi Operation Panel
........................................................
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge.......
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning system ..........................................
Rear air conditioning system
........................................................
Heated steering wheel/seat heaters/seat ventilators................
5-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.........................
5-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features............
Trunk features.............................
5-6. Using the other interior features
Other interior features ...........
Garage door opener...............
Lexus Enform Safety Connect
........................................................
303
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
304
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
5-1.Remote Touch/Display
Remote Touch
The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Center Display.
For details on the Remote touch, refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Remote Touch operation
■ Switches function, letter or screen button. Certain finger movements on the touchpad can perform functions, such as changing map scalings and scrolling list screens.
E Sub function button
When is displayed on the screen, a function screen assigned to the screen can be displayed.
■ Using the touchpad
A “MAP” button
Vehicles with navigation function:
Press this button to display the vehicle’s current position.
Vehicles without navigation function:
Press this button to display the compass mode screen.
B “MENU” button
Press this button to display the menu screen.
C Back button
Press this button to display the previous screen.
D Touchpad
Slide your finger on the touchpad and move the pointer to select a function, letter and screen button.
Press the touchpad to enter the selected
1 Select: Touch the touchpad to select the desired button on the screen.
2 Enter: Buttons on the screen can be selected by either depressing or double tapping the touchpad.
Once a button has been selected, the screen will change.
■ Touch operation
Operations are performed by touching the touchpad with your finger.
Trace
Trace the pad surface while maintaining contact with the touchpad. Moving the cursor and the pointer.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
305
Double tap
Tap the touchpad twice, quickly. Select the button on the screen.
Flick
Quick and short movement along the touchpad with you finger. Move the list screen.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Remote
Touch
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the
Remote Touch.
● Do not allow food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes to contact the Remote
Touch.
● Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact.
● Do not push the touchpad with a strong force or use a sharp pointed object to operate the pad.
5
Pinch in/Pinch out
Slide fingers toward each other or apart on the touchpad. Change the scale of the map.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
306
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Center Display
Center Display overview
■ Menu screen
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the menu screen.
The displays shown in the illustrations are used for example only and may differ from the actual vehicle.
Switch Function
Select to display the
“Destination” screen.
*1
Select to display the radio control screen.
*1
Switch Function
Select to display the media control screen.
*1
Select to display the hands-free control screen.
*1
Select to display the
“Apps” screen.
*1, 2
Select to display the information screen.
*1
(
Select to display the setup screen.
*1
Select to display the air conditioning control screen.
(
*1 : Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
*2 : This function is not available on some models.
■ Split-screen display
Different information can be displayed on the left and right sides of the screen. For example, air conditioning system screen can be displayed and operated while the fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The large screen on the left of the display is called the main display, and the small screen to the right is called the side display.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
307
■ Main display
For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the respective section and “NAVIGA-
TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Side display
The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Select or to display the desired screen.
E Show/hide the side display
*
*
: Refer to the “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
■ Screen display during low temperatures
When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even if the Remote Touch is operated.
5
A
B
C
D
Navigation system *
Audio
*
Vehicle information ( →
Air conditioning system ( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
308
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Rear Multi Operation Panel
*
* : If equipped
The Rear Multi Operation Panel built-into the rear armrest can be used to operate the rear audio system, air conditioning system, etc.
Rear Multi Operation Panel overview
■ Home screen
F
G
(if equipped)/rear interior light control screen. ( →
Touch to display the Rear Multi
Operation Panel settings screen.
(
Show the progress of unlocking the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
H Touch and hold to unlock the Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
I Shortcut button
Shortcut screen is displayed. Touch to display/hide commonly used buttons for a selected mode on the bottom portion of the screen.
J button
Press to display the home screen.
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel settings screen
Screen operation settings and the brightness of the screen can be changed.
A Touch to display the audio control screen.
Refer to “NAVIGATION AND
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
B
C
D
E
Touch to display the rear air conditioning control screen. ( →
Touch to display the rear seat adjustment screen. ( →
Touch to display the relaxation seat
(if equipped) control screen.
( →
Touch to display the rear sunshade
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
A
B
C
Touch to turn the screen off.
Touch to lock the Rear Multi Operation Panel.
Touch to adjust the brightness of the screen.
D
E
Touch to display the automatic screen transition settings screen.
( →
Touch to display the rear seat return function settings screen.
( →
■ Auto screen change settings screen
A
B
C
Touch to turn the automatic screen transition function on/off.
Touch to set whether the screen will transition to the home screen or turn off when the automatic screen transition function operates.
Touch to set the amount of time
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
309
(10/30/60/120 seconds) the Rear
Multi Operation Panel must be idle before the automatic screen transition function operates.
■ Operating the Rear Multi Operation
Panel
● When operating the Rear Multi Operation Panel, only use the tip of a finger. The
Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be operated with a fingernail, pen, etc.
● Use only one finger when operating the
Rear Multi Operation Panel. The Rear
Multi Operation Panel cannot be operated with multiple fingers.
● When the engine switch is changed to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, if a hand object, liquid or foreign matter is touching the Rear Multi Operation Panel, it may not operate correctly. In this case, remove anything touching the Rear Multi
Operation Panel and wait for approximately 30 seconds before operating it again.
If the Rear Multi Operation Panel still cannot be operated normally, press and hold the button to turn the Rear
Multi Operation Panel off, and then press the button again to turn it back on and operate it.
● In the following situations, the Rear Multi
Operation Panel may not operate properly:
• If wearing gloves during operation, non response may occur.
• If a wet hand is used to operate the Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
• If a screen cover or coating is applied to on the Rear Multi Operation Panel.
• If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty or has liquid attached to it, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
• If the Rear Multi Operation Panel receives electro magnetic waves, incorrect operation or non-response may occur.
• If a mobile phone or other wireless communication device brought near the Rear
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
310
5-1. Remote Touch/Display
Multi Operation Panel.
● If the a metal object, such as the following, is touching or covering the Rear
Multi Operation Panel:
• Coins
• Keys
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Magnetic isolation cards
• Metallic foil, such as the inner packaging of a cigarette box
• Disposable heat packs
• Discs, such as a CD or DVD, Cables, such as a USB cable
• Mobile devices, such as smartphones, mobile phones, tablets, etc.
● Make sure to keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel clean. If the Rear Multi Operation Panel is dirty, it may not operate correctly. (When cleaning the Rear Multi
Operation Panel, turn the screen off to avoid unexpected operation.)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the Rear Multi
Operation Panel
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
● Keep the Rear Multi Operation Panel free of liquids, such as drinks or rain, as they may cause a short circuit.
● Do not sit on or set heavy objects on the Rear Multi Operation Panel.
● Do not push the Rear Multi Operation
Panel with a strong force or use a sharp pointed object to operate the panel.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge
311
5-2.Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge
The seat heaters (if equipped), seat ventilators (if equipped) and heated steering wheel (if equipped) are each automatically controlled according to the set temperature of the air conditioning system, the outside and cabin temperature, etc.
Lexus Climate Concierge allows a comfortable condition to be maintained without adjusting each system.
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then, select to display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen.
Turning on Lexus Climate Concierge
Select
The indicator on the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen illuminates, and the automatic air conditioning system, seat heaters and ventilators, and heated steering wheel operate in automatic mode.
If any of the system is operated manually, the indicator turns off. However, all other functions continue to operate in automatic mode.
■ Changing Lexus Climate Concierge control screen between front/rear (vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control)
Select “Rear” to display the rear air conditioning system screen.
Select “Front” to display the front air conditioning system screen.
■ When using the Lexus Climate Concierge
Lexus Climate Concierge can be operated on the sub function menu or option control screen. (
Operation of each system
■ Automatic air conditioning system
( →
The temperature can be adjusted independently for each seat.
■ Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped) (
Heating or ventilation is automatically selected according to the set temperature of the air conditioning system, the outside temperature, etc.
■ Heated steering wheel (if equipped) (
Heated steering wheel operates automatically according to the set tempera-
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
312
5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge ture of the air conditioning system, the outside temperature, etc.
■ Passenger detection functions
● When a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat, the seat heater and ventilator will operate automatically.
● When a passenger is detected in a rear seat, the seat heater and ventilator will operate automatically. (vehicles with
4-ZONE climate control)
■ Seat heater/ventilator operation
When automatic mode is selected using the seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger detection is not performed.
■ Rear seat heater operation (vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control)
The rear seat heaters are not controlled by the Lexus Climate Concierge.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5-3.Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Front automatic air conditioning system
313
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons. Then, select to display the air conditioning control screen.
The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.
Air conditioning controls
A Left-hand side temperature control switch
B Automatic mode switch
C Off switch
D Fan speed decreases switch
E Fan speed increases switch
F Windshield defogger switch
G Rear window defogger and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch
H Outside/recirculated air mode switch
I Right-hand side temperature control switch
■ Adjusting the temperature ■ Setting the fan speed
Operate the temperature control switch upwards to increase the temperature and downwards to decrease the temperature.
Operate the switch to increase the fan speed and the switch to decrease the fan speed.
Press the off switch to turn the fan off.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
314
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Changing the air flow mode
→
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch.
The mode changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
automatic mode → (outside air mode) → (recirculated air mode)
→ automatic mode
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.
■ Defogging the windshield
Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.
Press the windshield defogger switch.
Set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the side windows quickly, turn the air flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode, press the windshield defogger switch again when the windshield is defogged.
■ Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Press the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch.
The defoggers will automatically turn off after a while. The operation time changes according to the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
■ When the outside temperature exceeds
75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system is on
● In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system may switch to recirculated air mode automatically. This may also reduce fuel consumption.
● It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing the outside/recirculated air mode switch.
■ Fogging up of the windows
The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Turning “A/C” on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.
● If you turn “A/C” off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode switch to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.
■ Registering air conditioning settings to electronic keys
● Unlocking the vehicle using an electronic key and turning the engine switch to
IGNITION ON mode will recall that key’s registered air conditioning settings.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
● When the engine switch is turned off, the current air conditioning settings will automatically be registered to the electronic key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
● The system may not operate correctly if more than one electronic key is in the vicinity or if the smart access system with push-button start is used to unlock a passenger door.
● The doors that can recall the air conditioning setting * when unlocked using the smart access system with push-button start can be changed. For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
* : The doors that can recall the driving position memory are changed at the same time.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode
In Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize fuel efficiency:
● Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling capacity
● Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected
To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations:
● Turn off eco air conditioning mode
(
● Adjust the fan speed
● Turn off Eco drive mode ( →
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32°F (0°C)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when “A/C” is selected.
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode or with the micro dust and pollen filter on.
● When parking, the system automatically switches to outside air mode to encourage better air circulation throughout the vehicle, helping to reduce odors that occur when starting the vehicle.
■ Using the voice command system
Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA
SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.
■ Air conditioning filter
→
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
(
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
315
Do not use the windshield defogger switch during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the outside rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
316
■
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
Air conditioning control screen
Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
B to and can be adjusted by performing the following operations.
Flick operation: Move the pointer to the desired item and flick the touchpad up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.
Trace operation: After selecting the desired item, trace the pad surface.
The item can be adjusted by the amount that you trace.
Trace operation cannot be used while driving.
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control
A
Main control screen
Sub menu
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the main screen.
: Display the air conditioning control screen
: Display the heated steering wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen (if equipped)
: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat ventilator control screen (if equipped)
: Display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen
: Display the option control screen
B Adjust the left side seat temperature setting
C
D
Adjust the fan speed setting
Select the air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
: Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates
E Adjust the right side seat temperature setting
F Function on/off indicators
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
G Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off.
: Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(
“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off
(
“OFF”: Turn the fan off
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification function
“DUAL”: Adjust the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) ( →
: Set eco air conditioning mode
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control
A Sub menu
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Selecting the sub menu item to switch the main screen.
: Display the front air conditioning control screen
: Display the heated steering wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen
: Display the rear air conditioning control screen
: Display the rear seat heater/rear seat ventilator control screen
: Display the Lexus Climate Concierge control screen
: Display the option control screen
B Adjust the left side seat temperature setting
C Select the right side seat air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the feet
317
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates
D Select the left side seat air flow mode
E Adjust the fan speed setting
F Function on/off indicators
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
G Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off.
: Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(
“AUTO”: Set automatic mode on/off
(
“OFF”: Turn the fan off
“A/C”: Set cooling and dehumidification function
“4-ZONE”: Adjust the temperature for the driver, front passenger and left and right rear passenger seats separately
(“4-ZONE” mode) (
: Set eco air conditioning mode
H Adjust the right side seat temperature setting
■ Option control screen
Select on the sub menu to display the option control screen.
The functions can be switched on and off.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
318
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the screen.
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control
A
B
Set Lexus Climate Concierge
( →
Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) ( →
C Set eco air conditioning mode
Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy.
D Cooling and dehumidification function
E
F
Select the S-FLOW mode
( →
Prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if equipped)
G Removing pollen from the air
(Micro dust and pollen filter)
A
B
Set Lexus Climate Concierge
(
Adjust the temperature for driver, passenger and rear seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) ( →
C Set eco air conditioning mode
Air conditioning and heater output is limited to prioritize fuel economy.
D Cooling and dehumidification function
E
F
Select the S-FLOW mode
(
Prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades
(Windshield wiper de-icer) (if equipped)
G Removing pollen from the air
(Micro dust and pollen filter)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Side display
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control
A
B
C
D
E
(
Display the front seat heaters/front seat ventilators control screen
→
Adjust the left side seat temperature setting
Adjust the fan speed setting
Adjust the right side seat temperature setting
Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
F Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately (“DUAL” mode) ( →
Select the air flow mode G
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control
A Display the front seat heaters/front
B seat ventilators control screen
(
Adjust the left side seat temperature setting
319
C
D
Adjust the fan speed setting
Adjust the right side seat temperature setting
E Select the left side seat air flow mode
F
G
H
Set cooling and dehumidification function on/off
Adjust the temperature for driver, passenger and rear seats separately (“4-ZONE” mode) (
Select the right side seat air flow mode
■ Windshield wiper de-icer (if equipped)
This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and wiper blades.
The windshield de-icer will automatically turn off after a while.
■ Eco air conditioning mode
When Eco drive mode is selected using the driving mode select switch, eco air conditioning mode turns on.
When a drive mode other than Eco drive mode is selected, eco air conditioning mode may turn off.
■ Micro dust and pollen filter
Outside air mode switches to
(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.
Usually the system will automatically turn off after a while.
In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the dehumidification function may operate or the outside/recirculated air mode may not
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
320
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger switch to (recirculated air) mode.
Pollen is filtered even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.
WARNING
■ To prevent burns (vehicles with windshield wiper de-icer)
Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.
■ Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic mode on will activate the dehumidification function.
S-FLOW mode
Using automatic mode
1 Press the automatic mode switch or select “AUTO” on the sub function menu. (
2 Press the outside/recirculated air mode switch to switch to automatic air intake mode.
The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
3 Adjust the temperature setting.
4 To stop the operation, press the off switch or select “OFF” on the sub function menu. ( →
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after the automatic mode switch is pressed or “AUTO” is selected.
Cool air may blow around the upper body even when the heater is on due to sunlight.
In S-FLOW mode, priority for the airflow is given to the front seats, reducing the airflow and air conditioning effect on the rear seats.
The system determines whether or not a front passenger is in the vehicle by the opening and closing of the front passenger’s door.
When a front passenger is determined not to be in the vehicle, the temperature indicator and air flow indicator for the front passenger side will turn off. In this case, depending on the set temperature and ambient temperature, priority for the airflow will be given to the driver’s seat only.
The following S-FLOW modes are available:
Automatic S-FLOW mode
In this mode, the system determines whether or not a rear passenger is in the vehicle by the opening and closing of a rear door. When a rear passenger is determined to be in the vehicle,
S-FLOW mode will be automatically disabled.
The indicator will illuminate on the air conditioning control screen when S-FLOW mode is enabled.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
To enable/disable S-FLOW mode and enter manual S-FLOW mode, select the
S-FLOW mode switch.
Manual S-FLOW mode
When the S-FLOW mode switch is selected, S-FLOW mode will be manually enabled/ disabled.
The indicator will illuminate on the air conditioning control screen when S-FLOW mode is enabled.
■ Operation of the air conditioning system in S-FLOW mode
If the front passenger’s door or a rear door is opened then closed, the air conditioning system determines that a passenger is in the vehicle. In this case, priority for the airflow will be changed from the driver’s seat only to the front seats only or all seats, respectively.
(Depending on the set temperature or ambient temperature, priority for the airflow may not be given to the driver’s seat only.)
If a passenger is judged to be in the vehicle, the system will retain the judgement for a certain amount of time after the engine switch is turned off.
■ Operation of automatic S-FLOW mode
When the system is operating in automatic
S-FLOW mode, if a rear door is opened and then closed, S-FLOW mode will be disabled. To enable S-FLOW mode, select the
S-FLOW mode switch.
■ Changing from manual S-FLOW mode to automatic S-FLOW mode
1 Select the S-FLOW mode switch to disable S-FLOW mode.
2 Turn the engine switch off.
3 After 60 minutes have elapsed, change the engine switch to ON mode.
Adjusting the temperature for the driver and passenger seats separately
Vehicles with DUAL-ZONE climate control
Adjust the passenger’s side temperature setting.
■
321
To turn on the “DUAL” mode, perform any of the following procedures:
Select “DUAL” on the sub function menu. ( →
Select “DUAL” on the option control screen.
The indicator on the main control screen comes on when the “DUAL” mode is on.
Vehicles with 4-ZONE climate control
To turn on the “4-ZONE” mode, perform any of the following procedures:
Select “4-ZONE” on the sub function menu. ( →
Select “4-ZONE” on the option control screen.
Adjust a passenger seat temperature setting.
The indicator on the main control screen comes on when the “4-ZONE” mode is on.
Air outlet layout and operations
Location of air outlets
The air outlets and air volume changes according to the selected air flow mode.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
322
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
WARNING
■ To prevent the windshield defogger from operating improperly
Do not place anything on the instrument panel which may cover the air outlets.
Otherwise, air flow may be obstructed, preventing the windshield defoggers from defogging.
■ Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Front center/front side
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent
Rear center/rear side
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear air conditioning system
*
* : If equipped
The air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.
The rear air conditioning system can be operated using the Center
Display and Rear Multi Operation
Panel.
Center Display
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to to display the climate control shortcut buttons.
Then, select to display the rear air conditioning control screen.
Rear Multi Operation Panel *
Touch “Climate” on the home screen to display the rear air conditioning control screen.( →
)
Touching the shortcut button on the home screen will also display operation buttons for some of the rear air conditioning system functions.
* : The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be used to operate the rear air conditioning system if the function is disabled. (
Rear air conditioning control screen
■ Center Display
Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
A to can be adjusted by performing the following operations.
Flick operation: Move the pointer to the desired item and flick the touchpad up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.
Trace operation: After selecting the desired item, trace the pad surface.
The item can be adjusted by the amount that you trace.
Trace operation cannot be used while driving.
A
B
Adjust the left side rear seat temperature setting
: Air flows to the upper body
323
Select the left side rear seat air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
C Adjust the rear seats fan speed setting
D Select the right side rear seat air flow mode
E
F
Adjust the right side rear seat temperature setting
Function on/off indicators
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
324
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
When the function is on, the indicator illuminates on the control screen.
G Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be switched on and off.
“Rear off”: Turn the rear seats fan off
“Rear AUTO”: Set the rear seats automatic mode on/off ( →
: Disables operation of the rear air conditioning system using the Rear Multi
Operation Panel
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel
*
Various functions can be operated by touching the displayed buttons on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
* : The Rear Multi Operation Panel cannot be used to operate the rear air conditioning system if the function is disabled.
(
Rear air conditioning control screen
C
D
E
F
Set the rear seats automatic mode on/off ( →
Select the right side rear seat air flow mode
Turn the rear seats fan off
Adjust the right side rear seat temperature setting
G Adjust the rear seats fan speed setting
Shortcut screen
A Adjust the left side rear seat temperature setting
B Adjust the right side rear seat temperature setting
A
B
Adjust the left side rear seat temperature setting
Select the left side rear seat air flow mode
: Air flows to the upper body
: Air flows to the upper body and feet
: Air flows to the feet
Using automatic mode
Center Display
1 Select “Rear AUTO” on the sub function menu. (
2 To stop the operation, select “Rear off” on the sub function menu.
(
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Rear Multi Operation Panel
1 Select “AUTO” on the rear air conditioning control screen. (
2 To stop the operation, select “OFF” on the rear air conditioning control screen. (
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that operated is maintained.
■
325
The temperature setting of each rear seat can be changed independently.
Air outlet layout and operations
Rear center outlets and rear side outlets
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately after “Rear AUTO” is selected or
“AUTO” is touched.
Cool air may blow around the upper body even when the heater is on due to sunlight.
Adjusting the temperature setting of the rear seats
The temperature setting of the rear seats can be adjusted using the following methods:
When the “4-ZONE” indicator is off: Adjust the driver’s seat temperature.
Adjust the temperature setting of each rear seat using the Center Display or Rear
Multi Operation Panel.
Adjust the temperature setting of each rear seat using the Center Display (rear air conditioning control screen) or Rear Multi Operation
Panel.
1 Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down
2 Turn the knob to open or close the vent
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is off.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
326
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Heated steering wheel heaters
*
*
/seat
/seat ventilators
*
* : If equipped
Heated steering wheel
Warms up the grip of the steering wheel
Front seat heaters/Rear seat heaters
Warm up the seat upholstery
Front seat ventilators/Rear seat ventilators
Maintain good ventilation by pulling air through the seat upholstery
The Center Display and Rear Multi
Operation Panel/rear control panel can be used to operate the heated steering wheel, seat heaters and seat ventilators as follows:
Center Display
Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch to display the main menu and move the cursor to to display the shortcut buttons. Then, select to display the heated steering wheel/front seat heater/front seat ventilator control screen.
To display the rear seat heater/rear seat ventilator control screen, select equipped)
Rear Multi Operation Panel
. (if
Touch “Climate” on the home screen to display the air conditioning control screen.(
Touching the shortcut button on the home screen will display operation buttons for the rear seat heaters and rear seat ventilators.
Rear control panel
The rear seat heaters can be operated.
WARNING
■ To prevent minor burn injuries
Care should be taken if anyone in the following categories comes in contact with the steering wheel or seats when the heater is on:
● Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged
● Persons with sensitive skin
● Persons who are fatigued
● Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the seat heaters and seat ventilators
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the functions when the engine is off.
Control screen
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Center Display
Main screen
Using the touchpad of the Remote
Touch, select the button on the screen.
A to can be adjusted by performing the following operations.
Flick operation: Move the pointer to the desired item and flick the touchpad up or down.
The item can be adjusted by one level.
Trace operation: After selecting the desired item, trace the touchpad surface.
The item can be adjusted by the amount that you trace.
Trace operation cannot be used while driving.
327
A Adjust the seat ventilator fan speed level
The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi)
B Adjust the seat heater temperature level
The seat heater can be adjusted in 3 levels.
(Low, Mid or Hi)
C Adjust the heated steering wheel temperature level
*
The heated steering wheel can be adjusted in 2 levels. (Low or Hi)
D Automatic mode on/off indicators
When the automatic mode is on, the indicator illuminates on the screen.
E Sub function menu
When the sub function button on the
Remote Touch is pressed, the following functions can be set to automatic mode.
: Left-hand side seat heater/seat ventilator
: Heated steering wheel * ventilator
: Right-hand side seat heater/seat
* : Available on the front seat control screen only
Side screen
5
A Display the air conditioning control screen
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
328
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
B
C
Adjust the front seat heater temperature level
Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange) change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Mid → Lo → OFF
Adjust the front seat ventilator fan speed level
Each time the switch is selected, the fan speed level and level indicator (blue) change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Mid → Lo → OFF
D Adjust the heated steering wheel temperature level
Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Lo → OFF
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped)
Rear air conditioning control screen speed level and level indicator (blue) change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Mid → Lo → OFF
Shortcut screen
A Adjust the rear seat heater temperature level
Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange) change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Mid → Lo → OFF
B Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan speed level
Each time the switch is selected, the fan speed level and level indicator (blue) change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Mid → Lo → OFF
■ Rear control panel (if equipped)
A
B
Adjust the rear seat heater temperature level
Each time the switch is selected, the temperature level and level indicator (orange) change as follows:
AUTO → Hi → Mid → Lo → OFF
Adjust the rear seat ventilator fan speed level
Each time the switch is selected, the fan
A Increases the rear seat heater temperature level
The seat ventilator can be adjusted in 3 levels. (Low, Mid or Hi)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
B Enables/Disables the automatic mode of the rear seat heaters
C Decreases the rear seat heater temperature level
If this switch is selected when the rear seat heater temperature level is set to Lo, the rear seat heater will turn off.
■ The heated steering wheel, seat heaters and seat ventilators wheel can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■ Air conditioning system-linked control mode
When the seat ventilator fan speed level is
Hi, the seat ventilator fan speed becomes higher according to the fan speed of the air conditioning system.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
WARNING
■ To prevent overheating and minor burn injuries
Observe the following precautions when using the seat heaters.
● Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.
● Do not use seat heater more than necessary.
329
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
330
5-4. Using the interior lights
5-4.Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Location of the interior lights
L
M
N
J
I
G
H
K
A
D
E
B
C
F
Rear personal lights ( →
Inside door handle lights
Instrument panel ornament lights (if equipped)
Front personal lights ( →
Front interior lights (
Clock light
Footwell lights
Engine switch light
Door trim ornament lights
Door courtesy lights
Seat belt buckle lights
Outer foot lights
Rear interior light (
Shift lever lights
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-4. Using the interior lights
331
Operating the interior lights
■ Turning the door position on
Press the door-linked interior light switch
The lights are turned on and off according to whether the doors are opened/closed.
When the door position is on, the indicator
A illuminates.
Rear (vehicles with a panoramic moon roof)
On/off
The rear interior light turns on/off together the front interior lights.
When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on.
■ Turning the lights on/off
Front
Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)
When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on.
■ Using the Rear Multi Operation
Panel (if equipped)
1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(
5
Rear (vehicles without a panoramic moon roof)
On/off
The rear interior light turns on/off together the front interior lights.
When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
332
5-4. Using the interior lights
2 To turn on/off the rear interior lights, touch the respective button.
Operating the personal lights
■ Turning the lights on/off
Front
Turns the lights on/off (touch the light)
When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on.
Rear (vehicles with a panoramic moon roof)
On/dimmed/off
When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on.
Rear (vehicles without a panoramic moon roof)
On/dimmed/off
When a door is opened while the door position is on, the lights turn on.
■ Using the Rear Multi Operation
Panel (if equipped)
1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(
2 To turn on/dimmed/off the rear personal lights, touch the respective button.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Illuminated entry system
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are opened/closed.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ When front interior light or front personal lights do not respond as normal
● When water, dirt, etc., have adhered to the lens surface
● When operated with a wet hand
● When wearing gloves, etc.
■ Customization
Some functions can be customized.
( →
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
■ Removing light lenses
Never remove the lens for the front interior light and front personal lights. Otherwise, the lights will be damaged. If a lens needs to be removed, contact your Lexus dealer.
5-4. Using the interior lights
333
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
334
5-5. Using the storage features
5-5.Using the storage features
List of storage features
Location of the storage features
Vehicles without power rear seat
C
D
A
B
E
Glove box ( →
Auxiliary boxes ( →
Cup holders (
Console box (
Coin holder (
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Vehicles with power rear seat
5-5. Using the storage features
335
C
D
A
B
E
Glove box ( →
Auxiliary boxes ( →
Cup holders (
Console box (
Coin holder (
WARNING
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.
Glove box
1 Open (push button)
2 Unlock with the mechanical key
3 Lock with the mechanical key
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
336
5-5. Using the storage features
■ Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
■ Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. ( →
■ Removing the partition
The partition inside the glove box can be removed by pulling it.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the coin holder closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Cup holders
Front
Press in and release the button.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.
Coin holder
Push the button.
Rear (vehicles without power rear seat)
Pull the armrest down then push in the cup holder trim to extend the cup holders.
Rear (vehicles with power rear seat)
Press in and release the button.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5-5. Using the storage features
Console box
337
■ When stowing the rear cup holders
(vehicles without power rear seat)
Stow the cup holder with the armrest down.
The cup holder cannot be stowed if the armrest is not down.
WARNING
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Inappropriate items must not be stored in the cup holders even if the lid is closed.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the rear cup holder (vehicles without power rear seat)
Stow the cup holder before stowing the armrest.
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the lid of the power outlet in the front cup holder when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
Press a button to open the console box.
The console box can be opened from either side.
■ Tray in the console box
The tray can be slid and removed.
■ Console box light
The console box light turns on when the tail lights are on.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ Tray
NOTICE
Do not insert items exceeding the height of the tray. Doing so may prevent opening and closing of the lid.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
338
5-5. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
Overhead
Press in the button.
This box is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.
Rear seat (vehicles without power rear seat)
Pull the armrest down then push the knob and lift the lid to open it.
WARNING
■ Caution while driving
Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop.
■ Items unsuitable for storing (overhead)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb.
(0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall out, resulting in an accident.
Rear seat (vehicles with power rear seat)
Pull the armrest down then press the button to open the lid.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Trunk features
Cargo net (if equipped)
The cargo net is provided for securing loose items on the floor or items inside the trunk.
Raise the cargo hooks on the floor.
Hook the net on the cargo hooks.
5-5. Using the storage features
Shopping bag hooks
339
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the grocery bag hooks
Do not hang any object heavier than 11 lb.
(5 kg) on the grocery bag hooks.
Luggage mats
Side
Pull the strap upwards to lift the luggage mat and remove it.
5
WARNING
■ When the cargo net is not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks on the floor to their stowed positions.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
340
5-5. Using the storage features
Front
1 Pull the strap upwards and lift up the luggage mat.
Auxiliary boxes
2 Lift the luggage mat until it engages with the hook.
Auxiliary boxes are under the luggage mats.
First-aid kit storage belt
To return the luggage mat to its original position, push the hook and lower the luggage mat.
1 Loosen the belt
2 Tighten the belt
Warning reflector storage belt
■ Using a belt to hold an object
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the hook for the front luggage mat
Do not hang a grocery bag or any other object from the hook.
1 Loosen the belt
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2 Pass the belt through the clip
3 Tighten the belt
Depending on the size and shape of an object, such as the case of a warning reflector, the object may not be able to be secured with the belts or stowed in an auxiliary box.
■ Stowing the belt
5-5. Using the storage features
341
1 Fold the belt
2 Secure the belt with the clip
To prevent damage to the warning reflector storage belt when it is not in use, stow the belt.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
342
5-6. Using the other interior features
5-6.Using the other interior features
Other interior features
USB charging ports
The USB charging ports are used to supply 2.1 A of electricity at 5 V to external devices.
The USB charging ports are for charging only. They are not designed for data transfer or other purposes.
Depending on the external device, it may not charge properly. Refer to the manual included with the device before using a USB charging port.
■ Using the USB charging ports
Open the console box lid and open the lid.
Vehicles without power rear seat
■ The USB charging ports can be used when
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.
■ Situations in which the USB charging ports may not operate correctly
● If a device which consumes more than 2.1
A at 5 V is connected
● If a device designed to communicate with a personal computer, such as a USB memory device, is connected
● If the connected external device is turned off (depending on device)
● If the temperature inside the vehicle is high, such as after the vehicle has been parked in the sun
■ About connected external devices
Depending on the connected external device, charging may occasionally be suspended and then start again. This is not a malfunction.
Vehicles with power rear seat
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the USB charging ports
● Do not insert foreign objects into the ports.
● Do not spill water or other liquids into the ports.
● When the USB charging ports are not in use, close the lids. If a foreign object or liquid enters a port may cause a short circuit.
● Do not apply excessive force to or impact the USB charging ports.
● Do not disassemble or modify the USB charging ports.
■ To prevent damage to external devices
● Do not leave external devices in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to an external device.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
NOTICE
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary force to an external device or the cable of an external device while it is connected.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the USB charging ports for a long period of time with the engine stopped.
5-6. Using the other interior features
Assist grips
An assist grip installed on the ceiling can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.
343
Armrest
Vehicle without power rear seat
Pull the armrest down for use.
WARNING
■ Assist grip
Do not use the assist grip when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from your seat.
Doing so could damage the assist grip, or could cause you to injure yourself by falling over.
5
Vehicle with power rear seat
Pull the lock release lever and fold the rear seatback down.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the assist grip
Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.
Coat hooks
To use the coat hook, push it on.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
344
5-6. Using the other interior features
WARNING
■ Items that must not be hung on the hook
Do not hang a coat hanger or other hard or sharp object on the hook. If the SRS curtain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles that cause death or serious injury.
Clock
The GPS clock’s time is automatically adjusted by utilizing GPS time information. For details, refer to “NAVIGA-
TION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MANUAL”.
Console box
Open the console box and open the lid.
Rear (if equipped)
Open the lid.
Power outlets
The power outlet can be used for the following components:
12 V: Accessories that run on less than
10 A.
120 VAC: Accessories that use less than 100 W.
■ 12 V
Front
Open the cup holder, and open the lid.
■ 120 VAC (if equipped)
Open the lid.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ The power outlet can be used when
● 12 V
The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.
● 120 VAC
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
5-6. Using the other interior features
345
■ Appliances that may not operate properly (120 VAC)
The following 120 VAC appliances may not operate properly even if their power consumption is under 100 W.
● Appliances with high initial peak wattage
● Measuring devices that process precise data
● Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply
Sun visors
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
● 12 V
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
● 120 VAC
Do not use a 120 VAC appliance that requires more than 100 W. If a 120 VAC appliance that consumes more than 100
W is used, the protection circuit will cut the power supply.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
1 To set the visor in the forward position, flip it down.
2 To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.
3 To use the side extender, place the visor in the side position, then slide it backward.
Vanity mirrors
Front
Slide the cover to open.
The vanity light turns on.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
346
5-6. Using the other interior features the driver’s power window switch and
Rear Multi Operation Panel.
■ From driver’s seat
Operate the driver’s power window switch.
Rear
Press the button to open.
The vanity light turns on.
■ To prevent battery discharge
If the vanity lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
NOTICE
■ When not in use
Keep the rear vanity mirror closed.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is stopped.
A Rear quarter sunshade (if equipped)
B Rear door sunshade
1 Extend
2 Retract
*
*
: If the driver’s power window switch is operated when a rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade is retracted or being retracted, the rear window will open.
■ From rear seat
The rear seat power window switches cannot be used to extend the rear door sunshades/rear quarter sunshades.
1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
(
Rear door/rear quarter sunshades (if equipped)
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can be extended and retracted using
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
2 To fully extend/retract a rear door/rear quarter sunshade, touch the respective button.
5-6. Using the other interior features
347
WARNING
■ When the rear door/rear quarter sunshades are being extended or retracted
Do not place fingers or other objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as injury may result.
■ Jam protection function
Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.
■ Operating conditions
● The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
● The rear side windows are fully closed.
■ Operation of rear door sunshades/rear quarter sunshades when extended
If a rear door power window switch is operated when the rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade is extended, the rear door sunshade/rear quarter sunshade will retract while the rear window is opening.
■ Operating the rear door/rear quarter sunshades after turning the engine switch off
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades can be operated for a while even after the engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or off.
However, they cannot be operated using the driver’s power window switch after either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between a rear door sunshade and the window frame, the rear door sunshade will stop and then extend/retract slightly.
■ When reconnecting the battery
The rear door/rear quarter sunshades will always be retracted the first time the button is pressed.
NOTICE
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshades
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear door/rear quarter sunshades.
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear door/rear quarter sunshades continuously for long periods of time.
Rear sunshade (if equipped)
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating any of the switches shown below.
■ From front seat
Extend/retract
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
348
5-6. Using the other interior features
■ From rear seat
Vehicles without power rear seat
Extend/retract
■ Operating the rear sunshade after turning the engine switch off
The rear sunshade can be operated for a while even after the engine switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.
■ Reverse operation feature
To ensure adequate rear visibility, the rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift position is shifted to R.
However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:
● The switch is pressed again.
● The shift position is shifted to P.
● The shift position is shifted out of P and R, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h).
If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch.
Vehicles with power rear seat
1 Display the home screen and then touch “Rear Shade/Lamp”.
( →
2 To fully extend/retract a rear door sunshade, touch the respective button.
WARNING
■ When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the shade mechanism or in the opening as injury may result.
■ The rear sunshade can be used when
The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■ To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions:
● Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
● Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
● Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
NOTICE
● Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
● Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously for long periods of time.
5-6. Using the other interior features
Garage door opener
349
The garage door opener can be programmed using the Home-
Link ® to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other devices.
System components
The HomeLink
®
wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming methods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the device.
5
A HomeLink ® indicator light
B Garage door operation indicators
C HomeLink ® icon
Illuminates while HomeLink
®
is operating.
D Buttons
■ Codes stored in the HomeLink ® ory
mem-
● The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.
● If learning failed when registering a dif-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
350
5-6. Using the other interior features ferent code to a HomeLink ® button that already has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.
■ Certification for the garage door opener
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
For vehicles sold in Canada
■ When support is necessary
Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515.
WARNING
■ When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink ® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
■ When operating or programming
HomeLink ®
Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink ® buttons.
Programming the HomeLink
®
5-6. Using the other interior features
351
■ Programming HomeLink
®
Steps 1 through 3 must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be completed.
1 Press and release the HomeLink
® button you want to program and check that the HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes (orange).
2 Point the remote control transmitter for the device at the rear view mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink ® buttons.
Keep the HomeLink ® indicator light in view while programming.
■ Before programming HomeLink ®
During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other potential harm.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control transmitter for more accurate programming.
Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or
“Smart” button on the garage door opener motor.
3 Program a device.
Programming a device other than an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)
Press and hold the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green (rolling code) or continuously lit green
(fixed code), then release the button.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
352
5-6. Using the other interior features
Programming an entry gate (for
U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device in the Canadian market
Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second intervals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink ® indicator light changes from slowly flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing
(green) (rolling code) or continuously lit (green) (fixed code).
4 Test the HomeLink
®
operation by pressing the newly programmed button and observing the indicator light:
Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has completed. The garage door or other device should operate when a
HomeLink ® button is pressed and released.
Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly press and hold the Home-
Link ® button for 2 seconds then release it.
If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Programming a rolling code system”.
5 Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining HomeLink
®
buttons.
■ Programming a rolling code system
2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.
1 Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage door opener motor in the garage.
This button can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. Refer to the owner’s manual supplied with the garage door opener motor for details.
2 Press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button.
Perform 3 within 30 seconds after performing 2 .
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3 Press and hold the desired Home-
Link ® button (inside the vehicle) for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat this sequence (press/hold/release) up to 3 times to complete programming.
If the garage door opener motor operates when the HomeLink
® button is pressed, the garage door opener motor recognizes the
HomeLink ® signal.
■ Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for compatible devices)
When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.
2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.)
1 Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to Home-
Link
®
, both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door
5-6. Using the other interior features
353 opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform 2 and
3 within the first 10 presses of the Home-
Link
®
button after programming has been completed.
2 Press a programmed HomeLink ® button to operate a garage door.
3 Within 1 minute of pressing the
HomeLink
®
button, after the garage door operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or
“Smart” button on the garage door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way communication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indicators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that
2-way communication is enabled.
■ Reprogramming a single Home-
Link
®
button
When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have devices registered to them can be overwritten:
1 With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink ®
button.
2 When the HomeLink ® indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold the HomeLink ® button and perform “Programming Home-
Link
®
” 1 (it takes 20 seconds for
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
354
5-6. Using the other interior features the HomeLink flashing).
®
indicator to start
■ Before programming
● Install a new battery in the transmitter.
● The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink ® .
Operating HomeLink
®
The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door may not be received.
To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either Home-
Link
®
buttons and or
Press the appropriate HomeLink ® button. The HomeLink
®
indicator light should turn on.
The status of the opening and closing of a garage door is shown by the indicators.
and simultaneously. The last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.
Erasing the entire HomeLink
®
memory (all three codes)
Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for 10 seconds until the HomeLink ® indicator light changes from continuously lit (orange) to rapidly flashing
(green).
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the HomeLink ® ory.
mem-
A Opening
B Closing
This function is only available if the garage door opener motor used is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.homelink.com.)
Color
Orange (flashing)
Green
Red (flashing)
Status
Currently opening/closing
Opening/closing has completed
Feedback signals cannot be received
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Lexus Enform Safety Connect
*
* : If equipped
Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global Positioning System
(GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security features to subscribers.
Safety Connect is supported by
Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.
Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped vehicles.
By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and
Conditions, as in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available at
Lexus.com. All use of the Safety
Connect service is subject to such then-applicable Terms and Conditions.
5-6. Using the other interior features
System components
A
B
C
“SOS” button
LED light indicators
Microphone
355
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
356
5-6. Using the other interior features
■ Certification for Lexus Enform
Services
Subscribers have the following Safety
Connect services available:
Automatic Collision Notification *
Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers.
(
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
* : U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2
Stolen Vehicle Location
Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft.
( →
Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
Connects drivers to response-center support. (
)
Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Provides drivers various on-road assistance. ( →
Subscription
After you have signed the Telematics
Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) in the Unites
States (1-877-539-8777 in Puerto
Rico, 1-800-26-LEXUS in Canada) or push the “SOS” button in your vehicle for further subscription details.
5-6. Using the other interior features
■ Safety Connect Services Information
● Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth
®
technology will not be possible during Safety Connect.
● Safety Connect is available beginning Fall
2009 on select Lexus models (in the contiguous United States only). Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service
Safety Connect LED light Indicators
357
Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription term selected and location.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle
Location will function in the United
States, including Hawaii and Alaska,
Puerto Rico and in Canada, and
Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States, Puerto Rico and in Canada.
● Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location and Enhanced Roadside Assistance will not function in the United States Virgin Islands.
No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in countries other than Canada.
For vehicles first sold in the USVI, no
Safety Connect services will function in and outside the United States Virgin
Islands.
● Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act and the device is not TTY compatible.
■ Languages
The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The
Safety Connect system will offer voice prompts in English, Spanish, and French.
Please indicate your language of choice when enrolling.
■ When contacting the response center
You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.
When the engine switch is turned to
IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light comes on, indicating that the service is active.
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
358
5-6. Using the other interior features
The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:
Green indicator light on = Active service
Green indicator light flashing =
Safety Connect call in process
Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction
(contact your Lexus dealer)
No indicator light (off) = Safety
Connect service not active
Safety Connect services
■ Automatic Collision Notification
In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occupants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to communicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests that assistance be sent to the location.
■ Stolen Vehicle Location
If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report, call the Safety Connect response center at
1-800-25-LEXUS
(1-800-255-3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.
In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle,
Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circumstances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further information is available at Lexus.com.
■ Emergency Assistance Button
(“SOS”)
In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the Safety Connect response center.
The answering agent will determine your vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assistance required.
If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you are not experiencing an emergency.
■ Enhanced Roadside Assistance
Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds
GPS data to the already included warranty-based Lexus roadside service.
Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and
Conditions, which are available at
Lexus.com.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Safety information for Safety
Connect
Important! Read this information about exposure to radio frequency signals before using Safety Connect;
The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted
RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the following U.S. and international standards bodies.
ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]
NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)
Report 86 [1986]
ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over
120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, and government health agencies and industries reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard (C95.1).
The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.
5-6. Using the other interior features
359
5
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
360
5-6. Using the other interior features
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Maintenance and care
6
.
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior................................
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior .................................
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
........................................................
General maintenance.............
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs .........
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
........................................................
Hood...............................................
Positioning a floor jack............
Engine compartment...............
Battery ...........................................
Tires ................................................
Replacing the tire......................
Tire inflation pressure..............
Wheels............................................
Air conditioning filter...............
Electronic key battery.............
Checking and replacing fuses
........................................................
Light bulbs....................................
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
361
6
362
6-1.Maintenance and care
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each component and its material.
Cleaning instructions
Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.
For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.
Wipe away any water.
Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.
■ Self-restoring coat
The vehicle body has a self-restoring coating that is resistant to small surface scratches caused in a car wash etc.
● The coating lasts for 5 to 8 years from when the vehicle is delivered from the plant.
● The restoration time differs depending on the depth of the scratch and outside temperature.
The restoration time may become shorter when the coating is warmed by applying warm water.
● Deep scratches caused by keys, coins, etc. cannot be restored.
● Do not use wax that contains abrasives.
■ Automatic car washes
● Before washing the vehicle:
• Fold the mirrors
• Turn off the power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)
Start washing from the front of the vehicle.
Extend the mirrors before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows and the air suspension unit (if equipped).
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed properly.
■ When using a car wash
If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In that case, follow the following correction procedures to wash the vehicle:
● Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)
● Set the electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with push-button start. ( →
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent.
● Wash detergent off with water immediately after use.
● To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following precautions.
• Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent
• Do not use hard brushes
• Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after driving or parking in hot weather
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Brake caliper coating (F SPORT models)
● When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the coating.
● Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot.
● Wash detergent off immediately after use.
■ Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■ Front side windows water-repellent coating (if equipped)
● The following precautions can extend the effectiveness of the water-repellent coating.
• Remove any dirt, etc. from the front side windows regularly.
• Do not allow dirt and dust to accumulate on the windows for a long period.
Clean the windows with a soft, damp cloth as soon as possible.
• Do not use wax or glass cleaners that contain abrasives when cleaning the windows.
• Do not use any metallic objects to remove condensation build up.
● When the water-repellent performance has become insufficient, the coating can be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Plated portions
If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows:
● Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral detergent and water to clean the dirt off.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
● To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product.
6-1. Maintenance and care
363
WARNING
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components, etc. to catch fire.
■ When cleaning the windshield
Set the wiper switch to off.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate unexpectedly in the following situations, and may result in hands being caught or other serious injuries and cause damage to the wiper blades.
A Off
B AUTO
● When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is touched by hand
● When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor
● If something bumps against the windshield
● If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop sensor
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers
Exhaust gases cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers can cause burns.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
364
6-1. Maintenance and care
WARNING
■ Precaution regarding the front bumper (vehicles with Lexus Safety
System+A)
If the paint of the front bumper is chipped or scratched, the Lexus Safety System+A may not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Precaution regarding the rear bumper
If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the following systems may not function correctly. If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.
● Lexus Safety System+A (if equipped)
● BSM (if equipped)
● RCTA (if equipped)
● PKSB (if equipped)
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum wheels, etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ When using an automatic car wash
Set the wiper switch to the off position.
If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.
■ When using a high pressure car wash
● When washing the vehicle, do not spray the camera or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.
● Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water.
• Traction related parts
• Steering parts
• Suspension parts
• Brake parts
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
Perform cleaning in a manner appropriate to each component and its material.
Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Handling the seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
■ When cleaning the carpeted portions of the glove box, console box, etc.
If a strong adhesive tape is used, there is a possibility that the surface of the carpet could be damaged.
6-1. Maintenance and care
365
WARNING
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components, etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner.
The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Areas other than the seats and steering wheel: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol
• Steering wheel: Organic substances, such as thinner, and cleaner that contains alcohol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
366
6-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ When cleaning the inside of the windshield
Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the camera sensor lens. Also, do not touch the lens. ( →
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents
Remove dirt using a water-dampened soft cloth or synthetic chamois.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.
■ Cleaning the areas with satin-finish metal accents
The metal areas use a layer of real metal for the surface. It is necessary to clean them regularly. If dirty areas are left uncleaned for long periods of time, they may be difficult to clean.
Cleaning the leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
■ Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.
Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.
Cleaning fabric portions of the instrument panel
To remove dust from the fabric, use a vacuum cleaner or adhesive tape.
Use a cloth dampened with water to gently wipe the fabric clean.
Do not use detergents to clean the fabric.
6-1. Maintenance and care
367
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
368
6-2. Maintenance
6-2.Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the maintenance below.
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
● Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operation of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
WARNING
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible death or serious injury.
■ Handling of the battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (
General maintenance
General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.
■ Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule, please reset the message.
To reset the message, follow the procedure described below:
1 Press or of the meter control switch to select .
2 Press or to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press .
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
3 Press or to select “Scheduled
Maintenance” and then press .
4 Press or to select “Yes” and then press .
A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed.
Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.
The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
6-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
369
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.
WARNING
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.
Engine compartment
Items
Brake fluid
Engine/intercooler coolant
Engine oil
Exhaust system
Check points
Is the brake fluid at the correct level?
(
Is the engine/intercooler coolant at the correct level?
(
Is the engine oil at the correct level?
(
There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
370
6-2. Maintenance
Items
Radiator, condenser, intercooler radiator and intercooler sub radiator
Washer fluid
Check points
The radiator, condenser, intercooler radiator and intercooler sub radiator should be free from foreign objects.
( →
Is there sufficient washer fluid?
( →
Trunk
Items
Battery
Check points
Check the connections. ( →
Vehicle interior
Accelerator pedal
Items
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Check points
• The accelerator pedal should move smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching).
• When parked on a slope and the shift position is in P, is the vehicle securely stopped?
Items
Brake pedal
Brakes
Head restraints
Indicators/buzzers
Lights
Check points
• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?
• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance from the floor?
• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of free play?
• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the brakes are applied.
• The brakes should work effectively.
• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.
• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor when the brakes are applied.
• Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock securely?
• Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?
• Do all the lights come on?
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Items
Parking brake
Seat belts
Seats
Steering wheel
Check points
• Does the parking brake operate normally?
• When parked on a slope and the parking brake is on, is the vehicle securely stopped?
• Do the seat belts operate smoothly?
• The seat belts should not be damaged.
• Do the seat controls operate properly?
• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?
• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of free play?
• There should not be any strange sounds coming from the steering wheel.
Vehicle exterior
Items
Doors/trunk
Engine hood
Fluid leaks
Check points
• Do the doors/trunk operate smoothly?
• Does the engine hood lock system work properly?
• There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after the vehicle has been parked.
6-2. Maintenance
371
Tires
Items
Windshield wipers
Check points
• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?
• The tires should not be damaged or excessively worn.
• Have the tires been rotated according to the maintenance schedule?
• The wheel nuts should not be loose.
• The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.
• The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
372
6-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.
If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not pass the
I/M test in the following situations:
When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.
When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
If your vehicle does not pass the
I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
6-3.Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.
Maintenance
(
Items
Brake fluid level
→
Parts and tools
Battery condition
( →
• Grease
• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT
3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT
4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
373
(
Items
Engine/intercooler coolant level ( →
Engine oil level
Fuses ( →
Parts and tools
• “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and 45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)
• “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” or equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)
• Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Radiator, condenser, intercooler radiator and intercooler sub radiator
(
⎯
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
374
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
(
Items
Washer fluid
→
Parts and tools
Tire inflation pressure ( →
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)
WARNING
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel. Fuel fumes are flammable.
■ When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille
Be sure the engine switch is off.
With the engine switch in IGNITION
ON mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in your eyes.
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Hood
Opening the hood
1 Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Positioning a floor jack
375
When using a floor jack, follow the instructions in the manual provided with the jack and perform the operation safely.
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
2 Pull up the auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
Location of the jack point
■ Front
2WD models
6
WARNING
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
376
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
AWD models
■ Rear
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Engine compartment
Components
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
377
A
B
C
D
E
F
Fuse boxes (
Engine oil filler cap ( →
Engine coolant reservoir ( →
Intercooler coolant reservoir (
Engine oil level dipstick (
Brake fluid reservoir ( →
Washer fluid tank ( →
G
H
I
Radiator ( →
Intercooler radiator ( →
Electric cooling fan J
K Condenser ( →
L Intercooler sub radiator (
For AWD models:
The engine oil level dipstick is located on the opposite side of the engine.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
378
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Battery
Engine compartment cover
■ Removing the engine compartment cover
Outside
Front
■ Installing the clips
NOTICE
■ Checking the engine compartment cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
1 Push up center portion
2 Insert
3 Press
A
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Service cover
■ Removing the service cover
1 Pull up the passenger side end of the rubber strip to disengage it from the vehicle body.
2 Remove the service cover.
Push the tabs and lift away the service cover.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
379
2 Engage the rubber strip to the vehicle body.
NOTICE
■ Checking the service cover after installation
Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.
Checking and adding the engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
1 Park the vehicle on level ground.
After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out.
2WD models
6
■ Installing the service cover
1 Install the service cover.
Make sure to engage the claws on the windshield side of the service cover when installing the service cover.
AWD models
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
380
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Oil quantity (Low → Full)
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)
Item
Clean funnel
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as that already in the engine.
2WD models
3 Wipe the dipstick clean.
4 Reinsert the dipstick fully.
5 Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.
AWD models
A Low
B Normal
C Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may differ depending on the type of vehicle or engine.
6 Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
■ Checking the oil type and preparing the item needed
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.
Engine oil selection
→
1 Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2 Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
3 Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations, oil consumption may increase, and
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through heavy traffic
■ After changing the engine oil
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:
1 Press or of the meter control switch to select .
2 Press or to select “Vehicle Settings” and then press .
3 Press or to select “Oil Maintenance” and then press .
4 Press or to select “Yes” and then press .
A message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the reset procedure has been completed.
WARNING
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
381
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
Checking the coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
■ Engine coolant reservoir
6
A Reservoir cap
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
382
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
B “F” line
C “L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line. (
■ Intercooler coolant reservoir
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap, the intercooler coolant reservoir cap and the coolant inlet cap.
(
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
A Reservoir cap
B “F” line
C “L” line
If the level is on or below the “L” line, add coolant up to the “F” line. (
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F
[-35°C])
Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F
[-42°C])
For more details about coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
Checking the radiator, condenser, intercooler radiator (if equipped) and intercooler sub radiator (if equipped)
Check the radiator, condenser, intercooler radiator and intercooler sub radiator and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator, condenser, intercooler radiator or intercooler sub radiator as they may be hot and cause serious injuries, such as burns.
Checking and adding the brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
383
WARNING
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care as brake fluid can harm your hands and eyes and damage painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear out or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, there may be a serious problem.
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.
Fluid type
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704 brake fluid
Item
Clean funnel
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the brake fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
Adding the washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.
WARNING
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine, etc.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
384
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.
Battery
Location
The battery is located in the trunk under the luggage mat.
Removing the luggage mat:
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, observe the following precautions before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.
● Make sure the engine switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging/reconnecting the battery
● Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.
● Start the engine with the engine switch in
ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not start with the engine switch turned off.
However, the engine will operate normally from the second attempt.
● The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
battery was disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnecting the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.
If the system will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.
WARNING
■ Chemicals in the battery
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
385
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk.
Get emergency medical attention immediately.
■ When replacing the battery
Use a battery designed for this vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause gas (hydrogen) to enter the passenger compartment, causing a fire or explosion.
For replacement of the battery, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.
Exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
386
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
A
B
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Checking the battery condition
Check the battery condition by indicator color.
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.
Checking tires
Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.
A
B
C
Blue: Good condition
Red: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
Clear: Replacement is necessary.
Have the battery checked by your
Lexus dealer.
A New tread
B Worn tread
C Treadwear indicator
The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire.
Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification Label.
For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. ( →
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
387 roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
● All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions as well as for use year-round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
● Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
(
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
6
■ Tire types
● Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy
WARNING
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
388
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
WARNING
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
Tire rotation
Vehicles with front and rear tires of the same size
Rotate the tires in the order shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.
Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure warning system after tire rotation.
Vehicles with front and rear tires of differing sizes
Tires cannot be rotated.
Run-flat tires
When run-flat tires are installed, the vehicle can be driven for a maximum of
100 miles (160 km) at a speed below
50 mph (80 km/h) after any tire goes flat. (However, the vehicle speed may not increase to near 50 mph [80 km/h] depending on weather or driving conditions.)
A run-flat tire has a the side wall.
mark on
Make sure to replace the flat tire before the vehicle has been driven for near 100 miles
(160 km). Also, do not use a repaired tire.
■ Run-flat tires
● The run-flat tires are for only this vehicle.
Do not use the tires on other vehicles.
● Do not mix run-flat tires and normal tires.
● If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used, it may be impossible to sufficiently demonstrate the performance of run-flat tires.
Tire pressure warning system
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
before serious problems arise.
The tire pressure detected by the tire pressure warning system can be displayed on the multi-information display. ( →
If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by a screen display and a warning light. ( →
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Tire inflation pressure
● It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.
It may also take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.
● Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
389 be different from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.
■ Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly
● In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.
• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.
• If a tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.
• If tire chains, etc. are installed.
• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.
• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel housings.
• If the tire inflation pressure is much higher than the specified level.
• If wheels not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitter are used.
• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● Performance may be affected in the following situations.
• When driving near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication device
If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions, the display may be corrected by changing the location of the vehicle as the radio wave conditions may change.
● When the vehicle is stopped, the time taken for the warning to start or turn off may be longer.
● When the inflation pressure of a tire drops rapidly, for example when a tire has burst, the warning may not operate.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
390
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Warning performance of the tire pressure warning system
The warning of the tire pressure warning system will change in accordance with driving conditions. For this reason, the system may give a warning even if the tire pressure does not reach a low enough level, or if the pressure is higher than the pressure that was adjusted to when the system was initialized.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
For vehicles sold in Canada
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
391
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
392
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing the tires or wheels, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters must be installed to the wheels which will be installed to the vehicle.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire pressure warning system must be initialized. ( →
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID codes of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters are not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. In this case, after driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute and then illuminate to indicate a system malfunction.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, contact your
Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.
● Make sure to install the tire valve caps.
If the tire valve caps are not installed, water may enter the valves of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters and the valves may become stuck.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■ The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances:
When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
When the tire inflation pressure is changed such as when the tire size is changed.
When rotating the tires.
After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure.
(
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
1 Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the engine switch off.
The initialization procedure cannot be started while the vehicle is moving.
2 Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level.
The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.
3 Turn the engine switch to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
4 Press or of the meter control switch to select .
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
5 Press or to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
6 Press or to select “TPWS” and then press .
7 Press or to select “Set
Pressure”. Then press and hold until the tire pressure warning light blinks 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
“--” will be displayed on the multiinformation display for the inflation pressure of each tire while initialization is being performed.
8 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Initialization is complete when the position of each tire is determined and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multi-information display.
Initialization may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at traffic lights, etc. ( →
■ Initialization procedure
● Make sure to perform the initialization procedure after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Also, make sure the tires are cold before
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
393 performing the initialization procedure or adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
● If the engine switch is turned off during initialization, it is not necessary to restart the initialization procedure from the beginning as it will begin automatically when the engine switch is turned back to
IGNITION ON mode.
● If initialization has accidentally been started when it is not necessary, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold and then perform the initialization procedure again.
● While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops, the tire pressure warning light will come on.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is not initialized properly
● In the following situations, initialization may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete initialization.) If initialization is not complete after driving approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.
• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer to complete initialization.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing initialization, data collected during initialization will be cleared and it will take longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.
If initialization is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then drive the vehicle again.
● In the following situations, initialization will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the initialization proce-
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
394
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance dure again.
• If, when attempting to start initialization, the tire pressure warning light does not blink 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.
● If initialization cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.
4 Press or to select “Change
Wheel Set”. Then press and hold
until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly 3 times.
Then a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.
When registration is being performed, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute then illuminate and
“--” will be displayed for the inflation pressure of each tire on the multi-information display.
WARNING
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not initialize the tire pressure warning system without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.
Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Registering ID codes
Every tire pressure warning valve and transmitter has a unique ID code.
When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID codes.
The ID codes can be registered on of the multi-information display.
1 Press or of the meter control switch to select .
2 Press or to select “Vehicle
Settings” and then press .
3 Press or to select “TPWS” and then press .
5 Drive straight (with occasional left and right turns) at approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approximately 10 to 30 minutes.
Registration is complete when the tire pressure warning light turns off and the inflation pressure of each tire is displayed on the multiinformation display.
Registration may take longer than approximately 1 hour in certain situations, such as when the vehicle is stopped for a long time at traffic lights, etc. (
After registering the ID codes, make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system. ( →
■ When registering ID codes
● Before performing ID code registration, make sure that no wheels with tire pressure warning valve and transmitters installed are near the vehicle.
● Make sure to initialize the tire pressure warning system after registering the ID
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
codes. If the system is initialized before registering the ID codes, the initialized values will be invalid.
● As the tires will be warm when registration is completed, make sure to allow the tires to cool before performing initialization.
■ Canceling ID code registration
● To cancel ID code registration after it has been started, turn the engine switch off before driving the vehicle.
If the vehicle is driven after ID code registration is started, to cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and turn the engine switch off before driving.
● If ID code registration has been canceled, the tire pressure warning light will blink for approximately 1 minute when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode and then illuminate. The tire pressure warning system will be operational when the tire pressure warning light turns off.
● If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, ID code registration may not have been cancelled correctly. To cancel registration, perform the ID code registration start procedure again and then turn the engine switch off before driving.
■ If ID codes are not registered properly
● In the following situations, ID code registration may take longer than usual to be completed or may not be possible. (Usually, the vehicle will need to be driven for approximately 10 to 30 minutes to complete ID code registration.)
If ID code registration is not complete after driving for approximately 30 minutes, continue driving for a while.
• If the vehicle is driven on an unpaved road, it may take longer than normal to complete registration.
• If the vehicle is backed up while performing registration, data collected during registration will be cleared, and it will take longer than normal to complete.
• If the vehicle is driven in heavy traffic or another situation where other vehicles are driven close by, it may take time for
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
395 the system to recognize the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters of your vehicle over those of other vehicles.
• If a wheel with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter installed is inside or near the vehicle, registration of the ID codes for the installed wheels may not be possible.
If ID registration is not complete after driving for approximately 1 hour, park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes and then perform the ID code registration procedure again.
● In the following situations, ID code registration will not be started or was not completed properly and the system will not operate properly. Perform the ID code registration procedure again.
• If, when attempting to start ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light does not blink slowly 3 times.
• If, when the vehicle has been driven for about 20 minutes after performing ID code registration, the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then illuminates.
● If ID code registration cannot be completed after performing the above procedure, contact your Lexus dealer.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
396
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing the tire
When raising your vehicle with a jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
If necessary tire replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Lexus dealer.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift position to P.
Disabling the height control. (if equipped) ( →
Stop the engine.
■ Jack and tools
As your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires, the following tools for replacing a tire are not included with your vehicle. They can be purchased at your Lexus dealer.
● Wheel nut wrench
● Jack
● Jack handle
WARNING
■ Using the tire jack
Observe the following precautions.
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.
● Do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Put the jack properly in its jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by the jack.
● Do not start the engine or drive the vehicle while the vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
● Make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension and then stopping the engine.
(
● When lowering the vehicle, make sure that there is no-one near the vehicle. If there are people nearby, warn them vocally before lowering.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power trunk opener and closer (if equipped)
In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the trunk opener main switch (
may cause the trunk lid to operate unintentionally if the power trunk opener and closer switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
397
2 Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).
Removing a tire
1 Chock the tires.
3 Turn the tire jack portion by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate the jack point positions.
Tire
Wheel chock positions
Front
Left-hand side
Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side
In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side
In front of the front left-hand side tire
4 Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.
5 Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.
When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
398
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance avoid scratching the wheel surface.
into contact with the disc wheel.
WARNING
■ Replacing a tire
Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
Installing the tire
1 Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, causing the tire to come off.
A Disc wheel
B Washer
3 Lower the vehicle.
4 Firmly tighten each wheel nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
2 Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by approximately the same amount.
Turn the wheel nuts until the washers come
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ When installing the tire
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 103 ft•lbf (140 N•m,
14.3 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.
● When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for that wheel.
● If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
399
Checking the specified tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size are displayed on the tire and loading information label.
(
Inspection and adjustment procedure
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps
→
6
A
B
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
400
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
1 Remove the tire valve cap.
2 Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
3 Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.
4 If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.
5 After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.
6 Put the tire valve cap back on.
ing.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.
● It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel economy
● Reduced driving comfort and poor handling
● Reduced tire life due to wear
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure read-
WARNING
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated.
If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Air leaking from between tire and wheel
● Wheel deformation and/or tire damage
● Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion joints, sharp edges on the road, etc.)
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause a loss of handling control.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
401
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and inset * .
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
* : Conventionally referred to as offset.
Lexus does not recommend using the following:
Wheels of different sizes or types
Used wheels
Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure.
Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (
WARNING
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop.
In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.
Aluminum wheel precautions
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wheel nut wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.
When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.
Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
402
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
5 Remove the filter case.
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.
Removing the air conditioning filter
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the glove box. Remove the partition. ( →
3 Remove the panel.
6 Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.
The “ UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.
4 Unlock the filter cover ( ), pull the and remove the filter cover.
■ Checking interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule.
In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
■ Air conditioning filter with deodorizing function
When fragrances are placed in your vehicle, the deodorizing effect may become significantly weakened in a short period.
When an air conditioning odor comes out continuously, replace the air conditioning
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
filter.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.
■ To prevent damage to the filter cover
When moving the filter cover in the direction of arrow to release the fitting, pay attention not to apply excessive force to the claws. Otherwise, the claws may be damaged.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
403
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
As the key may be damaged if the following procedure is not performed properly, it is recommended that key battery replacement be performed by your
Lexus dealer.
■ If the electronic key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
■ When the card key battery needs to be replaced (if equipped)
The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can replace the battery for you.
Items to prepare
Flathead screwdriver
Small flathead screwdriver
Lithium battery CR2032
■ Use a CR2032 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
404
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing the battery
1 Take out the mechanical key.
WARNING
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.
2 Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the flathead screwdriver with a tape.
NOTICE
■ When replacing the battery
Use a flathead screwdriver of appropriate size. Applying excessive force may deform or damage the cover.
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
3 Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver’s side instrument panel
Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during removal or installation.
405
Checking and replacing fuses
1 Turn the engine switch off.
2 Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment: type A fuse box
Remove the service cover ( →
push the tabs in and lift the lid off.
Passenger’s side instrument panel
Push the tab in and remove the lid.
Make sure to push the tab in during removal or installation.
6
Engine compartment: type B fuse box
Remove the engine compartment cover
( →
P.378) and push the tabs in and lift the
lid off.
Trunk
Remove the luggage mat. ( →
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
406
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type A
3 Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be removed using the pullout tool.
A Normal fuse
B Blown fuse
Type B
4 Check if the fuse is blown.
Type A and B:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type C and D:
Contact your Lexus dealer.
A Normal fuse
B Blown fuse
Type C
A
B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Type D
A
B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
■ After a fuse is replaced
● When installing the lid, make sure that the tab is installed securely.
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement.
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
WARNING
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
407
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
6
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
408
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Light bulbs
If any lights burn out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.
■ LED Lights
The lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
When trouble arises
7
.
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...................
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency...........................
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
.........................................................
If you think something is wrong
.........................................................
Fuel pump shut off system ......
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds ........
If a warning message is displayed
........................................................
If you have a flat tire..................
If the engine will not start .......
If you lose your keys.................
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened........................................
If the electronic key does not operate properly ....................
If the vehicle battery is discharged
........................................................
If your vehicle overheats ........
If the vehicle becomes stuck
........................................................
409
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
410
7-1.Essential information
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped on the road due to a breakdown, etc.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:
Operating instructions
Press the switch to flash all of the turn signal lights.
To turn them off, press the switch once again.
■ Emergency flashers
● If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not running, the battery may discharge.
● If any of the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) or in the event of a strong rear impact, the emergency flashers will turn on automatically.
The emergency flashers will turn off automatically after operating for approximately 20 minutes. To manually turn the emergency flashers off, press the switch twice.
(The emergency flashers may not turn on automatically depending on the force of the impact and conditions of the collision.)
Stopping the vehicle
1 Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.
2 Shift the shift position to N.
If the shift position is shifted to N
3 After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
4 Stop the engine.
If the shift position cannot be shifted to N
3 Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.
4 To stop the engine, press and hold the engine switch for 2 consecutive
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
seconds or more, or press it briefly
3 times or more in succession.
7-1. Essential information
411
5 Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
WARNING
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
Power assist for the steering wheel will be lost, making the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
412
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7-2.Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle needs to be towed
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.
AWD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain or related parts may be damaged, the vehicle may fly off the truck.
WARNING
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
2WD models
Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is towed with the tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain and related parts may be damaged or an accident may occur due to a change in direction of the vehicle.
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eyelets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit people, and cause serious damage.
● Make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may change and part of your body may be caught under the vehicle, possibly causing injury. ( →
● Do not turn the engine switch off.
This may lead to an accident as the rear wheels will be locked by the parking lock.
Also, there is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
■ Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelets are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck
● Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
● When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle.
Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing
Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
413 control system. (
There is a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (
There is a malfunction in the smart access system with push-button start. (
The battery is discharged.
(
Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your
Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing.
The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.
The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck to prevent body damage.
7
Situations when it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle
In the following situations, it is not possible to be towed by another vehicle using cables or chains, as the rear wheels may be locked due to the parking lock. Contact your Lexus dealer or commercial towing service.
There is a malfunction in the shift
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
414
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
From the front
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
From the rear
If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.
Make sure to disable all functions of the vehicle height control of the electronically modulated air suspension.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may change and the vehicle may be damaged. (
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
Using a flatbed truck
If your vehicle is transported by a flatbed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing eyelets. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at under 18 mph (30 km/h).
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
3 Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.
415
Emergency towing procedure
To have your vehicle towed by another vehicle, the towing eyelet must be installed to your vehicle. Install the towing eyelet using the following procedure.
1 Take out the phillips-head screwdriver and towing eyelet.
4 Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a phillips-head screwdriver or hard metal bar.
A Phillips-head screwdriver
B Towing eyelet
2 Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body as shown in the illustration.
5 Securely attach cables or chains to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
6 Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
7 Shift the shift position to N and release the parking brake.
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
416
If you think something is wrong
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor
Visible symptoms
Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal.
Audible symptoms
Changes in exhaust sound
Excessive tire squeal when cornering
Strange noises related to the suspension system
Pinging or other noises related to the engine
Operational symptoms
Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
Appreciable loss of power
Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Fuel pump shut off system
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
Restarting the engine
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.
1 Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or turn it off.
2 Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
417
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
418
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Actions to the warning lights or warning buzzers
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(U.S.A.) or
(red)
(Canada)
Details/Actions
Indicates that:
The brake fluid level is low; or
The brake system is malfunctioning
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
Indicates that the brake pads are worn out (only the right-side pads can be detected)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
■ Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(yellow)
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronically controlled brake system (if equipped); or
The parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ High coolant temperature warning light
*
(warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine coolant temperature is too high
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (
* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Charging system warning light * (warning buzzer)
419
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
*
: This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Low engine oil pressure warning light * (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
■ Malfunction indicator lamp (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.) or
Indicates a malfunction in:
The electronic engine control system;
The electronic throttle control system; or
The electronic automatic transmission control system
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
(Canada)
■ SRS warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The SRS airbag system;
The front passenger occupant classification system; or
The seat belt pretensioner system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
420
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Pop Up Hood warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that the Pop Up Hood system has operated
→ The Pop Up Hood system cannot be reused once it has operated.
Have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.
Indicates a malfunction in the Pop Up Hood system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ ABS warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
(U.S.A.) or
Indicates a malfunction in:
The ABS; or
The brake assist system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(Canada)
■ Brake Override System warning light/Drive-Start Control warning light
(warning buzzer)
*
Warning light Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Brake Override System is malfunctioning;
Drive-Start Control is operating;
Drive-Start Control is malfunctioning; or
Parking Support Brake function (for static objects) is operating
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Brake Override System is operating
→ Release the accelerator pedal and depress the brake pedal.
* : This light illuminates on the multi-information display.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
421
(red) or
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(yellow)
■ Low fuel level warning light
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 3.4 gal. (13 L, 2.8 Imp. gal.) or less
→ Refuel the vehicle.
■ Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)
*
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the driver and/or front passenger to fasten their seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.
If the front passenger’s seat is occupied, the front passenger’s seat belt also needs to be fastened to make the warning light (warning buzzer) turn off.
* : Driver’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for
6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for
90 more seconds.
Front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer:
The front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more seconds.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
422
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Rear passengers’ seat belt reminder lights *1 (warning buzzer) *2
Warning light Details/Actions
Warns the rear passengers to fasten their seat belts
→ Fasten the seat belt.
*1
: This light illuminates on the center panel.
*2
: Rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer:
The rear passengers’ seat belt warning buzzer sounds to alert the rear passengers that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 6 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 30 more seconds.
■ Tire pressure warning light
Warning light Details/Actions
When the light comes on after blinking for approximately 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system
→ Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure such as
Natural causes
Flat tire
→ Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Handling method (
■ LTA indicator/LKA indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(orange)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) or LKA
(Lane-Keeping Assist)
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
423
Warning light
(flashes)
(if equipped)
Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the intuitive parking assist function
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
( →
■ RCTA OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(flashes)
(if equipped)
Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the rear bumper around the radar sensor is covered with dirt, etc. ( →
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
( →
■ RCD OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(flashes)
(if equipped)
Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the RCD (Rear Camera Detection) function
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the function temporarily cannot be used due to the camera being dirty, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
( →
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
424
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ PKSB OFF indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(flashes)
(if equipped)
Details/Actions
When a buzzer sounds:
Indicates a malfunction in the PKSB (Parking Support Brake) system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
When a buzzer does not sound:
Indicates that the system is temporarily unavailable, possibly due to a sensor being dirty or covered with ice, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
( →
■ PCS warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light
(flashes or illuminates)
Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc.
→ Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information display.
( →
If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.
→
■ Slip indicator
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in:
The VSC system;
The TRAC system;
The hill-start assist control system;
The VGRS system (if equipped); or
The DRS system (if equipped)
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Parking brake indicator
Warning light
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
425
Details/Actions
(flashes)
(U.S.A.) or
Indicates a malfunction in the parking brake system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(flashes)
(Canada)
■ Brake hold operated indicator (warning buzzer)
Warning light Details/Actions
Indicates a malfunction in the brake hold system
→ Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(flashes)
■ Master warning light (warning buzzer)
Warning light
■ Warning buzzer
Details/Actions
A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.
→
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound.
■ Front passenger detection sensor, seat
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the
■ belt reminder and warning buzzer even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.
warning light may not operate properly.
SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, Pop Up Hood computer assembly, front impact sensors, side impact sensors (front door), side impact sensors (front), side impact sensors (rear), driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch, front passenger occupant classification system (ECU and sensors), rear seat belt buckle switches (if equipped), “AIR BAG ON” indicator light,
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioners, airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
426
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If it is, tighten it securely.
The light will go off after several driving trips.
If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Electric power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)
When the battery charge becomes insufficient or the voltage temporarily drops, the electric power steering system warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound.
■ When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.
If a tire is punctured: →
If none of the tires are punctured:
Turn the engine switch off then turn it to
IGNITION ON mode. Check if the tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks.
If the tire pressure warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute then stays on
There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
If the tire pressure warning light comes on
1 After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.
2 If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization. ( →
■ The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may come on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks and tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
■ Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly
→
WARNING
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ When the electric power steering system warning light comes on
When the light comes on yellow, the assist to the power steering is restricted.
When the light comes on red, the assist to the power steering is lost and handling operations of the steering wheel become extremely heavy.
When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).
● Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the flat tire replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
WARNING
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking.
If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
427
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
(tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly
Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
428
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incorrectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for maintenance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure appropriate to the message.
Except F SPORT models:
A Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
B Multi-information display
Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
F SPORT models (main meter moved to the right): A Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
B Multi-information display
Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
F SPORT models (main meter in center position):
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
429
A Master warning light
The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.
B Multi-information display
Follow the instructions of the message on the multi-information display.
If any of the warning messages are shown again after the appropriate actions have been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.
Messages and warnings
The master warning light and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Comes on
Flashes
Warning buzzer *
Sounds
Sounds
Warning
Indicates an important situation, such as when a system related to driving is malfunctioning or that danger may result if the correction procedure is not performed
Indicates a situation, such as when damage to the vehicle or danger may result
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
430
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning buzzer * Warning
Comes on
Flashes
Does not sound
Does not sound
Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of electrical components, their condition, or indicates the need for maintenance
Indicates a situation, such as when an operation has been performed incorrectly, or indicates how to perform an operation correctly
In some situations, the master warning light and warning buzzer may not operate as specified. In this case, follow the instructions displayed in the warning message.
If a warning light comes on or flashes at the same time that a warning message is displayed, take corrective action according to the warning light. ( →
* : A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.
■ Warning messages
The warning messages explained below may differ from the actual messages according to operation conditions and vehicle specifications.
■ Warning buzzer
In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio sound.
■ If “Engine Oil Level Low Add or
Replace” is displayed
The engine oil level is low. Check the level of the engine oil, and add if necessary.
This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope. Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears.
■ If “Engine Stopped Steering Power
Low” is displayed
This message is displayed if the engine is stopped while driving.
When steering wheel operations are heavier than usual, grip the steering wheel firmly and operate it using more force than usual.
■ If “Auto Power Off to Conserve Battery” is displayed
Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function. Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.
■ If “Headlight System Malfunction Visit
Your Dealer” is displayed
The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
● The LED headlight system
● AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System)
● The automatic headlight leveling system
● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
■ If “Front Camera Unavailable” or “Front
Camera Unavailable Remove Debris
On Windshield” is displayed
The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is resolved. ( →
● PCS (Pre-Collision system)
● LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) (if equipped)
● LKA (Lane Keeping Assist) (if equipped)
● Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
● RSA (Road Sign Assist) (if equipped)
● AHB (Automatic High Beam)
■ If “Maintenance Required Soon” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule * should be performed soon.
Comes on approximately 4500 miles
(7200 km) after the message has been reset. If necessary, perform maintenance.
Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. ( →
* : Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Maintenance Required Visit Your
Dealer” is displayed
Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the maintenance schedule * .
Comes on approximately 5000 miles
(8000 km) after the message has been reset. (The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.) Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is performed. ( →
* : Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should be scheduled to be changed.
Check the engine oil and change it if necessary. After changing the engine oil, make sure to reset the message. (
■ If “Oil Maintenance Required” is displayed
Indicates that the engine oil should be changed.
Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
431 engine oil, make sure to reset the message.
(
■ If “Shift System Malfunction Driving
Unavailable” is displayed
There is a malfunction in the shift control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If a message that indicates the need for the shift lever operation is displayed
To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift position may be displayed on the multi-information display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message and shift the shift position.
■ If a message that indicates the need for visiting your Lexus dealer is displayed
The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
■ If a message that indicates the need for referring to Owner’s Manual is displayed
● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, follow the instructions.
• “Engine Coolant Temp High” (
• “Battery Low” (
• “Transmission Fluid Temp High” ( →
● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, it may indicate a malfunction. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
• “Access System with Elec. Key Malfunction”
• “Shift System Malfunction”
• “P Switch Malfunction”
• “Shift System Unavailable”
● If any of the following messages are shown on the multi-information display, it may indicate a malfunction. Immediately stop the vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.
• “Braking Power Low”
• “Charging System Malfunction”
• “Oil Pressure Low”
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
432
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ If “High Power Consumption Partial
Limit On AC/Heater Operation” is displayed frequently
There is a possible malfunction relating to the charging system or the battery may be deteriorating. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
If you have a flat tire
Your vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire, but instead you can continue driving the vehicle with run-flat tires even if any tire goes flat.
In this case, slow down and drive with extra caution.
Run-flat tires
Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible if any tire goes flat.
The vehicle can be driven for a maximum of 100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 50 mph (80 km/h) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. ( →
A run-flat tire has a side wall.
mark on the
■ In some conditions (such as at high temperatures)
You cannot continue driving for up to 160 miles (100 km).
■ For the detailed information on run-flat tires
See the tire warranty booklet.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
NOTICE
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■ When driving over bumps
If a vehicle has a flat tire, the vehicle height will be lower than usual. Ensure that nothing strikes the bottom of the vehicle.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
433
If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed ( →
sider each of the following points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(
There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(
There may be a malfunction in the shift control system.
*
( →
* : It may not be possible to shift the shift position from P.
7
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
The battery may be discharged.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
434
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
( →
The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
( →
The starter motor does not turn over
The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as electronic key battery depletion or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
mally.
Do not use this starting procedure except in cases of emergency.
1 Press the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set.
(
Parking brake indicator will come on.
2 Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY mode.
3 Press and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected. (
The battery may be discharged.
( →
There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.
Starting the engine in an emergency
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning nor-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
If you lose your keys
New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
435
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
If the fuel filler door opener switch cannot be operated, contact your
Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
In case where refueling is urgently necessary, the following procedure can be used to open the fuel filler door.
NOTICE
■ When an electronic key is lost
If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.
Visit your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key (if equipped) that were provided with your vehicle.
Opening the fuel filler door
Remove the cover inside the trunk and pull the lever.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
436
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
1 Pull the driver’s door handle and insert the mechanical key.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted ( →
key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened and the engine can be started by following the procedure below.
2 Unlock the door.
■ When the electronic key does not work properly
● Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been disabled at your Lexus dealer. If it has been disabled, re-enable it.
● Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. ( →
NOTICE
■ In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-related problems
Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
3 Remove the key, return the handle, and then pull the handle again.
■ Locking the door
1 With the door open, push down the inside lock button.
Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk
■ Unlocking the door
Use the mechanical key (
order to perform the following operations:
2 Close the door.
■ Trunk
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open. (
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
■ Key linked functions
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
437
Starting the engine
1 Depress the brake pedal.
2 Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.
When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the engine switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode.
When the smart access system with push-button start is deactivated in customization setting, the engine switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.
1 Closes the windows and the moon roof
*
or panoramic moon roof
*
(turn and hold)
2 Opens the windows and the moon roof * or panoramic moon roof *
(turn and hold)
These settings must be customized at your
Lexus dealer.
* : If equipped
WARNING
■ When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof
Operate the power window or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof.
Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window or the moon roof or panoramic moon roof.
3 Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on the multi-information display.
4 Press the engine switch.
In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Stopping the engine
Set the parking brake, shift the shift position to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Electronic key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. ( →
■ Changing engine switch modes
Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step 3 above. The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. ( →
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
438
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked.
(
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call your Lexus dealer or a qualified repair shop.
Restarting the engine
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a
12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the steps below.
2 Open the trunk lid and remove the luggage mat. (
In the event that the trunk opener cannot be used, use the mechanical key to open the trunk. ( →
Method connecting jumper (or booster) cables to the battery
1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.
3 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the
A
B
C
D
Positive (+) battery terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (your vehicle)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
4 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
5 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.
6 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
7 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Method connecting jumper (or booster) cables to the exclusive jump starting terminal
1 Confirm that the electronic key is being carried.
When connecting the jumper (or booster) cables, depending on the situation, the alarm may activate and doors locked.
( →
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
439
2 Open the hood. Remove the passenger side engine compartment cover. (
3 Remove the service cover.(
4 Open the fuse box cover.
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
5 Open the exclusive jump starting terminal cover.
7
6 Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to on your vehicle and connect the
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
440
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
A
B
C
D
Exclusive jump starting terminal (your vehicle)
Positive (+) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Negative (-) battery terminal (second vehicle)
Solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the exclusive jump starting terminal and any moving parts as shown in the illustration
7 Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
8 Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the engine switch off.
9 Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the engine of your vehicle by turning the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.
10 Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
11 Close the exclusive jump starting terminal cover, and reinstall the fuse box cover to its original position.
12 Install the service cover.( →
13 Install the engine compartment cover.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ When the battery is removed or discharged
● Information stored in the ECU is cleared.
When the battery is depleted, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.
● Some systems may require initialization.
(
■ When removing the battery terminals
When the battery terminals are removed, the information stored in the ECU is cleared. Before removing the battery terminals, contact your Lexus dealer.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)
■ When recharging or replacing the battery
● In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart access system with push-button start when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.
● The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.
● The engine switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the battery, turn the engine switch off.
If you are unsure what mode the engine switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.
■ When replacing the battery
● Use a Central Degassing type battery
(European Regulations).
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
441
● Use a battery with the same case size as the previous battery and an epuivalent
20 hour rate capacity (20HR) or greater.
• If the sizes differ, the battery cannot be properly secured.
• If the 20 hour rate capacity is low, even if the time period where the vehicle is not used is a short time, the battery may discharge and the engine may not be able to start.
● Use a battery with a handle. If a battery without a handle is used, removal is more difficult.
● After replacing, firmly attach the following items to the exhaust hole of the battery.
• Use the exhaust hose that was attached to the battery before replacing and confirm that it is firmly connected to the hole section of the vehicle.
• Use the exhaust hole plug included with the battery replaced or the one installed on the battery prior to the replacement.
(Depending on the battery to be replaced, the exhaust hole may be plugged.)
A
B
Exhaust hole plug
Exhaust hole
C Exhaust hose
For details, consult your Lexus dealer.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
442
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
WARNING
■ When removing the battery terminals
Always remove the negative (-) terminal first. If the positive (+) terminal contacts any metal in the surrounding area when the positive (+) terminal is removed, a spark may occur, leading to a fire in addition to electrical shocks and death or serious injury.
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the other end of the jumper cable connected to the “+” terminal to come into contact with any other parts or metal surfaces in the area, such as brackets or unpainted metal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds.
Observe the following precautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
■ After recharging the battery
Have the battery inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the battery is deteriorating, continued use may cause the battery to emit a malodorous gas, which may be detrimental to the health of passengers.
■ When replacing the battery
● When the vent plug and indicator are close to the hold down clamp, the battery fluid (sulfuric acid) may leak.
● For information regarding battery replacement, contact your Lexus dealer.
● After replacing, securely attach the exhaust hose and exhaust hole plug to the exhaust hole of the replaced battery. If not properly installed, gases
(hydrogen) may leak into the vehicle interior, and there is the possible danger of the gas igniting and exploding.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entangled in the cooling fan or engine drive belt.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
The exclusive jump starting terminal is to be used when charging the battery from another vehicle in an emergency. It cannot be used to jump start another vehicle.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
If your vehicle overheats
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
The engine coolant temperature gauge ( →
zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
“Engine Coolant Temp High Stop in a Safe Place See Owner’s
Manual” is shown on the multi-information display.
Steam comes out from under the hood.
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
443
A Radiators
B Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.
4 The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
Engine
Correction procedures
1 Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and then stop the engine.
2 If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
3 After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
A Reservoir
B “F” line
C “L” line
D Coolant inlet cap
Intercooler
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
444
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
A Reservoir
B “F” line
C “L” line
5 Add coolant if necessary.
Water can be used in an emergency if coolant is unavailable.
Engine
Intercooler
Remove the engine compartment cover and add coolant.
6 Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
The fan operates when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fan is operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.
(The fan may not operate in freezing temperatures.)
7 If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant in accordance with the following procedure.
1 Remove the engine compartment cover.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
445
2 Remove the engine cover.
Lift the front of the engine cover straight up and then pull it forward.
3 Remove the caps A and B .
WARNING
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fan and belts.
Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the coolant inlet cap, the engine coolant reservoir cap or the intercooler coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.
4 Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
A up to the “F” line C , and then replace the cap A .
5 Add coolant through the inlet of the cap
B until it is full, and then replace the
B
6 Install the engine compartment cover and engine cover.
Engage the claws of the engine cover to install it.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
7
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
446
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
Recovering procedure
1 Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift position to
P.
2 Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.
3 Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction.
4 Restart the engine.
5 Shift the shift position to D or R and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.
WARNING
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift position
Be careful not to shift the shift position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
■ When it is difficult to free the vehicle
Press the switch to turn off TRAC.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
447
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
448
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Vehicle specifications
8
.
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.) ..............................................
Fuel information.........................
Tire information..........................
8-2. Customization
Customizable features............
8-3. Initialization
Items to initialize ........................
447
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
448
8-1. Specifications
8-1.Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheelbase
Tread *1
*1
Front
Rear
2WD models
206.1 in. (5235 mm)
74.8 in. (1900 mm)
57.5 in. (1460 mm) *2
57.1 in. (1450 mm) *3
AWD models
57.9 in. (1470 mm) *2
57.5 in. (1460 mm) *3
123.0 in. (3125 mm)
2WD models 64.2 in. (1630 mm)
AWD models
64.2 in. (1630 mm) *2
64.4 in. (1635 mm) *3
64.4 in. (1635 mm) *4
63.6 in. (1615 mm) *5
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage)
*1 : Unladen vehicles
*2 : Without electronically modulated air suspension
*3 : With electronically modulated air suspension
*4 : Except F SPORT models
*5 : F SPORT models
870 lb. (395 kg)
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
449
This number is also stamped under the right-hand front seat.
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
This number is also on the Certification
Label.
Engine
Model
Type
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Valve clearance
Drive belt tension
3.5 L 6-cylinder (V35A-FTS)
6-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline (with turbocharger)
3.37 × 3.94 in. (85.5 × 100.0 mm)
210.2 cu. in. (3445 cm 3 )
Automatic adjustment
Automatic adjustment
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
450
8-1. Specifications
Octane Rating
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher
21.7 gal. (82.0 L, 18.0 Imp. gal.)
Lubrication system
■ Oil capacity (Drain and refill [Reference
*
])
With filter
2WD models
6.7 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 Imp. qt.)
AWD models
7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp. qt.)
Without filter
2WD models
6.1 qt. (5.8 L, 5.1 Imp. qt.)
AWD models
7.0 qt. (6.6 L, 5.8 Imp. qt.)
* : The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE
5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
A Outside temperature
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC)
Certification Mark is added to some oil
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
8-1. Specifications
451
Cooling system
Capacity
Coolant type
Engine
2WD models: 11.2 qt. (10.6 L, 9.3 Imp. qt.)
AWD models: 11.1 qt. (10.5 L, 9.2 Imp. qt.)
Intercooler
4.5 qt. (4.3 L, 3.8 Imp. qt.)
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system (spark plug)
Make
Gap
DENSO EC22HPR-D7
0.028 in. (0.7 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
452
8-1. Specifications
Electrical system (battery)
Specific gravity reading at 68°F
(20°C):
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
12.3 V or higher
(Turn the engine switch off and turn on the headlights for 20 to 30 seconds.)
15 A max.
5 A max.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity *
Fluid type
9.5 qt. (9.0 L, 7.9 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
* : The fluid capacity is a reference quantity.
If replacement is necessary, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
Transfer (AWD models)
Oil capacity
Oil type and viscosity
*
0.74 qt. (0.70 L, 0.62 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine Transfer gear oil LL 80 or equivalent
* : Your Lexus vehicle is filled with Toyota genuine gear oil at the factory. Use Lexus approved Toyota genuine gear oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Front differential (AWD models)
Oil capacity
Oil type and viscosity
*
0.69 qt. (0.65 L, 0.57 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent
* : Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
453 matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Rear differential
2WD models
Oil capacity
Oil type and viscosity
*
0.90 qt. (0.85 L, 0.75 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent
AWD models
Oil capacity
Oil type and viscosity *
1.42 qt. (1.35 L, 1.19 Imp. qt.)
Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT 75W-85
GL-5 or equivalent
* : Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the factory.
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent oil of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Brakes
Pedal clearance
Pedal free play
*1
Brake pad wear limit
Parking brake lining wear limit
Parking brake indicator
Fluid type
*2
4.8 in. (121 mm) Min.
*3
4.8 in. (122 mm) Min.
*4
0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)
0.04 in. (1 mm)
0.04 in. (1 mm)
When pushing the parking brake switch for 1 to 2 seconds: comes on
When pulling the parking brake switch for 1 to 2 seconds: turns off
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
FMVSS No.116 DOT 4 or SAE J1704
*1 : Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51 kgf) while the engine is running.
When performing the brake pedal inspection, also be sure to check that the brake system warning light is not illuminated when the engine is running. (If the brake system
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
454
8-1. Specifications
warning light is illuminated, refer to P.418.)
*2 : Make sure to confirm that the brake warning light (yellow) does not illuminate. (If the
brake warning light illuminates, refer to P.418.)
*3 : Vehicles without Lexus Safety System+A
*4 : Vehicles with Lexus Safety System+A
Steering
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tires and wheels
19-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
245/50RF19 101W
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 118 mph (190 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm
2
or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
19 × 8J
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
19-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
245/50RF19 101V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
20-inch tires (type A)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
20-inch tires (type B)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
8-1. Specifications
19 × 8J
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
455
245/45RF20 99Y
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 137 mph (220 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
20 × 8 1/2J
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
Front tires: 245/45RF20 99Y
Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102Y
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 137 mph (220 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Front wheels: 20 × 8 1/2J
Rear wheels: 20 × 9 1/2J
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
456
8-1. Specifications
20-inch tires (type C)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
20-inch tires (type D)
245/45RF20 99V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
20 × 8 1/2J
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)
Wheel size
Wheel nut torque
Front tires: 245/45RF20 99V
Rear tires: 275/40RF20 102V
Driving under normal conditions
Front: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Rear: 36 psi (250 kPa, 2.5 kgf/cm 2 or bar)
Driving at high speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)
Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm 2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Front wheels: 20 × 8 1/2J
Rear wheels: 20 × 9 1/2J
103 ft•lbf (140 N•m, 14.3 kgf•m)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Fuel information
You must only use unleaded gasoline.
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance and fuel economy.
If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine may occur and may void the vehicle warranty.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A.
8-1. Specifications
457
EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.
● Lexus strongly recommends the use of
Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.
■ Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline
Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated gasolines, are available in some cities.
These fuels are typically acceptable for use, providing they meet other fuel requirements.
Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emissions.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline
● Use only gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 15% ethanol, including from any pump labeled
E30 (30% ethanol [ A ]), E50 (50% ethanol [ B ]), E85 (85% ethanol [ C
(which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 15% ethanol).
])
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A.,
Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called the
World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
■ Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per
● If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than
91.
● Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■ Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gas-
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
458
8-1. Specifications oline that contains MMT. If fuel containing
MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Lexus dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If poor driveability is encountered after using a different type of fuel (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
8-1. Specifications
459
A
B
Tire size ( →
Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire (
This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire.
C
D
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) ( →
Location of treadwear indicators ( →
E Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.
F Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
G TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.
H Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure ( →
I Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
J Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
K Summer tires or all season tires (
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
460
8-1. Specifications
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Type A
B
C
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
D Manufacturer’s code
E Manufacturing week
F Manufacturing year
* : The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
A
B
C
DOT symbol *
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
Tire size code D
E Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)
F Manufacturing week
G Manufacturing year
* : The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Type B
A DOT symbol *
B
C
A Tire use (P = Passenger car, T =
Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
E
F
G
H
D Tire construction code (R = Radial,
D = Diagonal)
Run-flat tire code
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
Speed symbol (alphabet with one
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
letter)
■ Tire dimensions
A
B
C
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
H
I
F
G
J
C
D
A
B
E
K
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
461
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.
Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
8
462
8-1. Specifications
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
Cold tire inflation pressure
Maximum inflation pressure
Recommended inflation pressure
Accessory weight
Meaning
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
463
Rim
Tire related term
Curb weight
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
Normal occupant weight
Occupant distribution
Production options weight
Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)
Rim size designation
Rim type designation
Rim width
Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Meaning
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1 lows
* that fol-
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 * below
The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim diameter and width
The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Nominal distance between rim flanges
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
464
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Vehicle normal load on the tire
Weather side
Bead
Bead separation
Bias ply tire
Carcass
Chunking
Cord
Cord separation
Cracking
CT
Extra load tire
Groove
Innerliner
Meaning
The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 * below), and dividing by two
The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim
A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
The strands forming the plies in the tire
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The space between two adjacent tread ribs
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
465
Tire related term
Innerliner separation
Intended outboard sidewall
Light truck (LT) tire
Load rating
Maximum load rating
Maximum permissible inflation pressure
Measuring rim
Open splice
Outer diameter
Overall width
Passenger car tire
Ply
Ply separation
Meaning
The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material
The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.
A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
466
8-1. Specifications
Tire related term
Pneumatic tire
Radial ply tire
Reinforced tire
Section width
Sidewall
Sidewall separation
Snow tire
Test rim
Tread
Tread rib
Tread separation
Meaning
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire
The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands
That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136
Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00,
Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving
Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine
Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road
A tread section running circumferentially around a tire
Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-1. Specifications
467
Tire related term
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
Meaning
The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing
* : Table 1 -Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants
2 through 4
5 through 10
11 through 15
16 through 20
Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants
2
3
5
7
Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle
2 in front
2 in front, 1 in second seat
2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
468
8-2. Customization
8-2.Customization
Customizable features
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by using the meter control switches, the Remote Touch, Rear
Multi Operation Panel or at your
Lexus dealer.
Customizing vehicle features
■ Changing by using the meter control switches
1 Press or to select .
2 Operate the meter control switches to select the desired item to be customized.
3 According to the display, select the desired setting and then press .
To go back to the previous screen or exit the customize mode, press .
■ Changing by using the Remote
Touch
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.
2 Select “Setup” on the menu screen and select “Vehicle”.
3 Select “Vehicle Customization” or
“Drive Mode Customization”.
Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be changed for details.
For details on the Remote Touch, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
■ Changing by using the Rear Multi
Operation Panel (if equipped)
1 Display the home screen on the
Rear Multi Operation Panel and then touch “Settings”.
2 Touch “Seat”.
3 Select the desired setting.
■ When customizing using the Remote
Touch
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift position to
P. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features.
WARNING
■ During customization
As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
NOTICE
■ During customization
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing features.
Customizable features
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being cus-
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-2. Customization
469 tomized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
A
B
C
Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch
Settings that can be changed using the meter control switches
Settings that can be changed using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (if equipped)
D Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer
Definition of symbols: O = Available, — = Not available
■ Seat belts ( →
Function Default setting
Customized setting
Off
A B C D
Easy Access Buckle *1
Retraction of front seat belts when vehicle speed reaches approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) *2
On
On Off
— — — O
— — — O
*1 : If equipped
*2 : Vehicles with pre-collision seat belts with comfort function
■ Gauges, meters and multi-information display (
Language
Units *2
Function *1 Default setting
English miles (MPG)
Customized setting
French
Spanish km (km/L) km (L/100 km) miles (MPG
Imperial)
A B C D
O O — —
O O — —
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
470
8-2. Customization
Function *1
Drive information 1
Drive information 2
Clock
Pop-up display
Accent color
Rev indicator *3
Rev peak *3
Eco Driving Indicator Light
Suggestion function
Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel economy (after reset)
Distance (driving range)
Customizable items:
— O — —
Average vehicle speed (after reset)
12-hour display 24-hour display — O — —
On Off — O — —
Color 1 O O — —
5000 r/min.
Color 2
2000 - 6400 r/min.
Off
— O — —
On
On
On
Off
Off
On (when the vehicle is stopped)
Off
—
—
O
O
O
—
—
—
—
—
—
O
*1 : For details about each function: →
*2 : The default setting varies according to country.
*3 : F SPORT models
■ Head-up Display
*
(
Function
Gauge information
Default setting
Tachometer
Customized setting
Eco Driving Indicator
No content
A B C D
— O — —
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-2. Customization
471
Function Default setting
Customized setting
Route guidance to destination/street name *
Driving support system display
On
On
Compass *
Audio system operation status
* : If equipped
■ Door lock (
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Function Default setting
Customized setting
Unlocking using a mechanical key
All doors unlocked in one step
Automatic door locking function
Shift position linked door locking operation
Automatic door unlocking function
Shift position linked door unlocking operation
Off
Speed linked door locking operation
Off
Driver’s door linked door unlocking operation
Locking/unlocking of the trunk when all doors are locked/unlocked
Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two step
On Off
A B C D
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
A B C D
— — — O
O — — O
O — — O
— — — O
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
472
8-2. Customization
■ Smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control
( →
Function
Operating signal (Buzzers)
Default setting
5
Customized setting
Off
1 to 7
A B C D
O — — O
Operation signal (Emergency flashers)
Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked
Open door warning buzzer
On
60 seconds
On
Off
Off
30 seconds
120 seconds
Off
O — — O
O — — O
— — — O
■ Smart access system with push-button start ( →
Function Default setting
Customized setting
Smart access system with push-button start
Smart door unlocking
Time elapsed before unlocking all the door when gripping and holding the driver’s door handle
Number of consecutive door lock operations
On
Driver’s door
2 seconds
2 times
Off
All the doors
Off
1.5 seconds
2.5 seconds
As many as desired
■ Wireless remote control ( →
Function
Wireless remote control
Default setting
Customized setting
Off
Unlocking operation
On
Driver’s door unlocked in one step, all doors unlocked in two step
All doors unlocked in one step
A B C D
— — — O
O — — O
— — — O
— — — O
A B C D
— — — O
O — — O
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Function
Trunk unlocking operation
8-2. Customization
473
Default setting
Press and hold
(short)
On
On
Customized setting
One short press
Push twice
Press and hold
(long)
Off
Off
Off
A
—
B
—
C
—
D
O
— — — O
O — — O
Theft deterrent panic mode
Reservation lock
■ Trunk (
Function
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid
(kick sensor) *
*
: If equipped
■ Front seats ( →
Default setting
On
Customized setting
A B C D
Off — O — —
Function Default setting
Driver’s seat position linked head restraint height operation *
* : If equipped
■ Power rear seats * ( →
Off
Customized setting
A B C D
On — — — O
Function
Automatic rear seat operation (door-linked rear seat return function and shift-linked rear seat reclining function)
Default setting
On
Customized setting
A B C D
Off — — O —
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
474
8-2. Customization
Function Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
Door linked rear seat with ottoman seatback position for exiting *
More upright than upright position
Shift-linked rear seat reclining function
On
* : If equipped
■ Driving position memory (
Upright position — — O —
Off — — — O
Function Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
Selecting doors linked to the memory recall function
Driver’s door All doors — — — O
Driver’s seat slide movement when exiting the vehicle
Driver’s seat height movement when exiting the vehicle
Full
Off
Off
Partial
Full
Partial
O — — O
O — — O
Front passenger’s seat movement when exiting the vehicle
On Off — — — O
Steering wheel movement Tilt only
Off
Telescopic only
Tilt and telescopic
O — — O
■ Outside rear view mirrors (
Function Default setting
Automatic mirror folding and extending operation
Linked to the locking/ unlocking of the doors
Customized setting
Off
Linked to operation of the engine switch
A B C D
— — — O
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-2. Customization
475
■ Power windows, and moon roof
*
or panoramic moon roof
*
(
Function Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
Mechanical key linked operation
Wireless remote control linked operation
Wireless remote control linked operation signal
(buzzer)
Off
Off
On
On
On (open only) — — — O
Off
— — — O
— — — O
* : If equipped
■ Automatic light control system (
Function
Light sensor sensitivity
Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed
Default setting
Standard
30 seconds
Customized setting
-2 to 2
Off
60 seconds
90 seconds
A B C D
O — — O
O — — O
Windshield wiper linked headlight illumination
On Off — — — O
■ Lights (
Function
Daytime running lights
Welcome lighting
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting
System) *2
*1
: Except for Canada
*2 : If equipped
Default setting
On
On
On
Customized setting
Off *1
Off
Off
A B C D
O — — O
— — — O
— — — O
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
476
8-2. Customization
■ PCS (Pre-Collision System) and FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)
*
( →
Function Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
PCS (Pre-Collision System) and FCTA function
On Off — O — —
Adjust alert timing Middle
Far
Near
— O — —
Pedestrian alert
*
and FCTA function
On
* : If equipped
■ LTA (Lane Tracing Assist) * (
Off — O — —
Function
Lane centering function
Steering assist function
Alert type
Default setting
On
On
Steering wheel vibration
High
Customized setting
Off
Off
Buzzer
Standard
A B C D
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
— O — — Alert sensitivity
Vehicle sway warning function
Vehicle sway warning sensitivity
On
Standard
Off
High
Low
— O — —
— O — —
* : If equipped
■ LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) * (
Alert type
Function
Lane centering function
Steering assist function
Alert sensitivity
Default setting
Off
On
Steering wheel vibration
Standard
Customized setting
On
Off
Buzzer
High
A B C D
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-2. Customization
477
Function Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
Vehicle sway warning function
Vehicle sway warning sensitivity
On
Standard
* : If equipped
■ RSA (Road Sign Assist)
*
(
Function
RSA (Road Sign Assist)
Excess speed notification method
Excess speed notification level
Other notifications method
(No-entry notification)
Off
High
Low
— O — —
— O — —
Default setting
On
Display only
1 mph (2 km/h)
Display only
Customized setting
Off
No notification
Display and buzzer
3 mph (5 km/h)
5 mph (10 km/h)
No notification
Display and buzzer
A
—
B
O
C
—
D
—
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
* : If equipped
■ BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
*
( →
Function
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)
Outside rear view mirror indicator brightness
Default setting
On
Bright
Customized setting
Off
Dim
A B C D
— O — —
— O — —
Alert timing for presence of approaching vehicle (sensitivity)
Intermediate
Early
Late
Only when vehicle detected in blind spot
— O — —
* : If equipped
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
478
8-2. Customization
■ PKSA (Parking Support Alert)
*
(
Function
Buzzer volume
Default setting
Level2
Customized setting
Level1
Level3
* : If equipped
■ Intuitive parking assist
*
(
Function Default setting
Customized setting
Off Intuitive parking assist On
* : If equipped
■ RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function
*
(
Function Default setting
Customized setting
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) function
On Off
* : If equipped
■ RCD (Rear camera detection) function * (
Function Default setting
RCD (Rear camera detection) function
On
* : If equipped
■ PKSB (Parking Support Brake) * ( →
Customized setting
Off
Function Default setting
Customized setting
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) function
*
: If equipped
On Off
A B C D
— O — —
A B C D
— O — —
A B C D
— O — —
A B C D
— O — —
A B C D
— O — —
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
8-2. Customization
■ Driving mode select switch (
Function
Powertrain control in custom mode
*
Chassis control in custom mode
*
Default setting
Normal
Normal
Customized setting
Power
Eco
Sport
Comfort
Air conditioning operation in custom mode *
Normal Eco
*
: If equipped
■ Electronically modulated air suspension * (
Function Default setting
Vehicle height control
Ingress/egress height control function
Vehicle height when parked
On
On
Normal
*
: If equipped
■ Automatic air conditioning system ( →
Customized setting
Off
Off
High
Function
A/C auto switch operation
Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity
Default setting
On
Standard
Customized setting
Off
-3 to 3
479
A B C D
O — — —
O — — —
O — — —
A B C D
— O — —
— O — —
— O — —
A B C D
O — — O
O — — O
■ Seat heater/seat ventilators * (
Function Default setting
Customized setting
A B C D
Driver’s seat temperature preference in automatic mode
Passenger’s seat temperature preference in automatic mode
Standard
Standard
-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)
-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)
O — — O
O — — O
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
480
8-2. Customization
Function Default setting
Left-hand rear seat temperature preference in automatic mode *
Right-hand rear seat temperature preference in automatic mode *
Engine switch linked automatic activation of the left-hand rear seat heater/ventilator *
Engine switch linked automatic activation of the right-hand rear seat heater/ventilator *
Standard
Standard
Off
Off
* : If equipped
■ Heated steering wheel
*
(
Function
Steering wheel heating preference in automatic mode
* : If equipped
■ Illumination (
Customized setting
A B C D
-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)
O — — O
-2 (cooler) to 2
(warmer)
O — — O
On
On
O — — O
O — — O
Default setting
Standard
Customized setting
-2 (low) to 2
(high)
A B C D
O — — O
Function
Time elapsed before the interior lights turn off
Operation after the engine switch is turned off
Operation when the doors are unlocked
Default setting
15 seconds
On
On
Customized setting
Off
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
A B C D
O — — O
Off — — — O
Off — — — O
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Function
Operation when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person
Footwell lights
Instrument panel ornament light and door trim ornament lights
Default setting
On
On
On
8-2. Customization
481
Customized setting
A B C D
Off
Off
Off
— — — O
— — — O
— — — O
Time elapsed before the outer foot lights turn off
15 seconds
Off
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
O — — O
Operation of the outer foot lights when you approach the vehicle with the electronic key on your person
Operation of the outer foot lights when the doors are unlocked
Operation of the outer foot lights when a door is opened
Fading out of the outer foot lights when they turn off
On
On
On
Long
Off
Off
Off
Short
— — — O
— — — O
— — — O
— — — O
■ Vehicle customization
● When the smart access system with push-button start is off, the entry unlock function cannot be customized.
● When the doors remain closed after unlocking the doors and the timer activated automatic door lock function activates, signals will be generated in accordance with the operation buzzer volume and operational signal (Emergency flashers) function settings.
● Some settings can be changed using a switch or the audio system screen. If a setting is changed using a switch, the changed setting will not be reflected on the audio system screen until the engine switch is turned off and then to IGNI-
TION ON mode.
■ Clock settings screen
If the clock adjustment screen is displayed continuously when attempting to change the clock settings, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
8
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
482
8-3. Initialization
8-3.Initialization
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation after such cases as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the vehicle:
List of items to initialize
Item When to initialize
PKSB (Parking Support
Brake) *
• After reconnecting or changing the battery
Message indicating maintenance is required
Oil maintenance
• After maintenance is performed
Tire pressure warning system
• After maintenance is performed
• When the tire inflation pressure is changed, such as when changing traveling speed or load weight.
• When the tire inflation pressure is changed, such as when the tire size is changed.
• When rotating the tires.
• After performing the transmitter ID code registration procedure.
Lexus parking assist monitor
Panoramic view monitor *
*
Reference
• Battery has been reinstalled.
• The steering wheel has been moved while the battery was being reinstalled.
• Battery power is low.
Refer to the “NAVI-
GATION AND MUL-
TIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
• Battery has been reinstalled.
• The steering wheel has been moved while the battery was being reinstalled.
• Battery power is low.
Refer to the “NAVI-
GATION AND MUL-
TIMEDIA SYSTEM
OWNER’S MAN-
UAL”.
* : If equipped
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
For owners
9
.
9-1. For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ........................................
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French).......
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French).......
483
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
484
9-1. For owners
9-1.For owners
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of
Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus
Division of Toyota Motor Sales,
U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
Déroulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'épaule, sans pour autant être en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.
Réglez la position du dossier de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le siège.
Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Traitement des ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une
éponge humidifiés avec de l'eau savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas usées, effilochées ou entaillées excessivement.
ATTENTION
Inspectez le système de ceintures de sécurité régulièrement. Contrôlez l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et de pièces desserrées. N'utilisez pas une ceinture de sécurité endommagée avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité endommagée ne permet pas de protéger un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles.
9-1. For owners
485
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
486
9-1. For owners
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.
Système de coussins gonflables SRS
■ Emplacement des coussins gonflables SRS
Coussins gonflables frontaux SRS
A Coussin gonflable conducteur/coussin gonflable du passager avant SRS
Participe à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur et du passager avant contre les chocs contre les éléments de l'habitacle
B Coussins gonflables de genoux SRS
Participent à la protection du conducteur et du passager avant
Coussins gonflables latéraux et rideaux SRS
C
D
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant SRS
Participent à la protection du torse des occupants de siège avant
Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière SRS
Participent à la protection du torse des occupants des sièges latéraux arrière
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
9-1. For owners
487
E Coussins gonflables rideaux SRS
• Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des occupants des sièges latéraux
• Peut contribuer à empêcher les occupants d’être éjectés du véhicule en cas de tonneau
F Coussins gonflables de coussin de siège SRS (sur modèles équipés)
Contribue à retenir les occupants des sièges arrière électriques
■ Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
A Système de classification de l'occupant du siège passager avant (ECU et capteurs)
G
H
E
F
I
B
C
D
L
M
J
K
N
Capteurs d'impact latéral (porte avant)
Coussins gonflables de genoux
Coussin gonflable passager avant
Coussins gonflables rideaux
Témoins indicateurs “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR BAG OFF”
Coussins gonflables latéraux avant
Capteurs d'impact latéral (avant)
Témoin d'avertissement SRS
Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière
Prétensionneurs de ceinture de sécurité
Coussin gonflable conducteur
Coussins gonflables de coussin de siège (sur modèles équipés)
Contacts de boucle de ceinture de sécurité de siège arrière (sur modèles
équipés)
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
488
9-1. For owners
O Capteurs d'impact latéral (arrière)
P Capteur de position du siège conducteur
Q Contact de boucle de ceinture de sécurité conducteur
R Ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables
S Capteurs d'impact avant
T Ensemble informatique du capot actif
Votre véhicule est équipé de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS conçus selon les normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur (FMVSS208). L'ensemble de capteurs de coussins gonflables (ECU) régule le déploiement des coussins gonflables sur la base des informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc., indiqués ci-dessus dans le schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les passagers. Le déploiement rapide des coussins gonflables est obtenu au moyen d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.
ATTENTION
■ Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables SRS.
Le non-respect de ces précautions peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de sécurité.
Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires à utiliser avec les ceintures de sécurité.
● Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS se déploie avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable.
L'autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis (NHTSA) conseille: La zone à risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous placer à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de sécurité suffisante. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pédales.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
ATTENTION
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules aient une conception différente, un grand nombre de conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou remontez le siège si votre véhicule est
équipé de cette fonction.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de ceinture de sécurité avant, sans l'attacher au pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS déterminent que le conducteur et le passager avant ont attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, bien que la ceinture de sécurité ne soit pas attachée. Dans ce cas, les coussins gonflables frontaux
SRS peuvent ne pas se déployer correctement en cas de collision, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles. Veillez à porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.
9-1. For owners
489
● Le coussin gonflable passager avant
SRS se déploie également avec une force considérable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du passager avant doit être éloigné le plus possible du coussin gonflable en réglant le dossier de siège de façon à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans le siège.
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou attachés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement attaché au moyen d'un siège de sécurité enfant. Lexus recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les sièges arrière du véhicule et de prévoir pour eux des systèmes de retenue adaptés.
Les sièges arrière sont plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.
● N'installez jamais un siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route sur le siège passager avant, même si le témoin indicateur “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.
En cas d'accident, la force engendrée par le déploiement rapide du coussin gonflable du passager avant peut blesser grièvement, voire tuer l'enfant si le siège de sécurité enfant type dos à la route est installé sur le siège du passager avant.
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
490
9-1. For owners
ATTENTION
● Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord.
● Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur les sièges passagers en appui contre la porte ou sortir la tête ou les mains à l'extérieur du véhicule.
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS ou s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.
● Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des emplacements tels que la planche de bord, la garniture du volant et la partie inférieure du tableau de bord.
Ces éléments peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables conducteur, passager avant et genoux SRS se déploient.
● Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le rail latéral de toit ou les montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Ne fixez rien aux portes, à la vitre du pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral de toit et à la poignée de maintien.
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
ATTENTION
● Ne suspendez aucun cintre ou objet dur aux crochets à vêtements. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et causer des blessures graves, voire mortelles en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables rideaux SRS.
● Si un cache en vinyle est placé sur la zone où le coussin gonflable de genoux SRS se déploie, assurez-vous de le retirer.
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège recouvrant les zones de déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux SRS, car il risque de gêner le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonflables latéraux de fonctionner correctement, désactiver le système ou entraîner le déploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latéraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties renfermant les composants de coussins gonflables SRS ou aux portes avant.
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant immédiatement après le déploiement
(gonflage) des coussins gonflables
SRS, car ils peuvent être chauds.
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
9-1. For owners
491
● Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, comme les garnitures du volant et des montants avant et arrière, sont endommagées ou craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.
● Ne placez rien sur le siège du passager avant, comme un coussin par exemple. Cela a pour conséquence de répartir le poids du passager sur toute la surface du siège, ce qui empêche le capteur de détecter correctement le poids du passager. En conséquence, les coussins gonflables frontaux SRS du passager avant risquent de ne pas se déployer en cas de collision.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS
Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et ne procédez à aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables
SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se déployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables
SRS
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, des rails latéraux de toit, des panneaux de porte avant, des garnitures de porte avant ou des haut-parleurs de porte avant
● Modifications du panneau de porte avant (par exemple, perçage d'un trou dans le panneau)
● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs de l'habitacle
9
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
492
9-1. For owners
ATTENTION
● Installation d'un protège-calandre
(pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de treuils ou d'un porte-bagages de toit
● Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule
● Installation d'appareils électroniques tels que les émetteurs/récepteurs radios mobiles et les lecteurs CD
● Modifications de votre véhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Index
.
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
........................................................
Alphabetical Index....................
493
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
494
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your
Lexus dealer.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer.
( →
If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. ( →
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (
Is the engine switch in IGNITION
ON mode?
When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (
Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?
When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your person.
The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave. ( →
The rear door cannot be opened
Is the child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.
Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock. ( →
)
The trunk lid is closed with the electronic key left inside
The function to prevent the electronic key from being left inside the trunk will operate and you can open the trunk as usual. Take the key out from the trunk. (
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal? (
Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle?
(
Is the steering wheel unlocked?
(
Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?
In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (
Is the battery discharged?
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
( →
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped
It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (
The windows do not open or close by operating the power window switches
Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed. (
The engine switch is turned off automatically
The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in
ACCESSORY mode for a period of time. (
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
The seat belt reminder light is flashing
Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts? ( →
The parking brake indicator is on
Is the parking brake released? (
)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound. ( →
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds
Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds.
(
)
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
Unlock the doors.
Turn the engine switch to ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle
Is the message displayed on the multi-information display?
Check the message on the multi-information display. ( →
A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed
When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
Slow down the vehicle, drive with
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
496
What to do if... (Troubleshooting) extra caution, and take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible to have the tire replaced.
( →
The vehicle becomes stuck
Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow. ( →
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Alphabetical Index
A
A/C
Air conditioning filter ...............................402
Front automatic air conditioning system
...........................................................................313
Micro dust and pollen filter.....................319
Rear air conditioning system ............... 323
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).............. 294
Warning light...............................................420
Active stabilizer suspension system.... 294
Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS). 177
Adaptive Variable Suspension System295
AFS (Adaptive Front-lighting System). 177
Air conditioning filter.................................402
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ...............................402
Front automatic air conditioning system
...........................................................................313
Micro dust and pollen filter.....................319
Rear air conditioning system ............... 323
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.....................31
Airbag precautions for your child........ 34
Correct driving posture.............................23
Curtain shield airbag operating condi-
tions....................................................................31
Curtain shield airbag precautions ....... 34
Front passenger occupant classification
system .............................................................40
General airbag precautions ................... 34
Locations of airbags.................................... 29
Modification and disposal of airbags ..37
Side airbag operating conditions...........31
Side airbag precautions............................ 34
Side and curtain shield airbags operating
conditions........................................................31
Side and curtain shield airbags precau-
tions.................................................................. 34
SRS airbags ..................................................... 29
SRS warning light ........................................419
Alarm
Alarm...................................................................60
Warning buzzer.......................................... 418
Anchor brackets.....................................46, 55
Antennas (smart access system with
push-button start).......................................107
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS).............. 294
Warning light ...............................................420
Approach warning.......................................247
Armrest............................................................343
Assist grips .....................................................343
Audio system-linked display........................81
Automatic headlight leveling system ....176
Automatic High Beam ................................178
Automatic light control system................175
Automatic transmission..............................163
M mode ...........................................................168
Paddle shift switches.......................167, 168
Snow mode.....................................................167
Auxiliary boxes.................................338, 340
Average fuel economy................................. 78
Average vehicle speed ................................ 78
B
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Battery
Battery checking ....................................... 384
If the battery is discharged................... 438
Preparing and checking before winter
..........................................................................299
Warning light ................................................ 419
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM).........................251
Boost gauge.......................................................79
Brake
Brake hold.......................................................173
Fluid...................................................................453
Parking brake ............................................... 170
Warning light ................................................418
Brake assist .................................................... 294
Break-in tips......................................................151
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
498
Alphabetical Index
Brightness control
Instrument panel light control ..........71, 75
BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).........................251
C
Card key ............................................................ 92
Care
Aluminum wheels......................................362
Exterior ...........................................................362
Interior.............................................................365
Seat belts........................................................365
Cargo capacity.............................................. 158
Cargo net .......................................................339
Center Display .............................................306
Chains ..............................................................300
Child restraint system
Fixed with a LATCH system ..................53
Fixed with a seat belt................................... 49
Front passenger occupant classification
system .............................................................40
Points to remember ....................................45
Riding with children.....................................45
Types of child restraint system installation
method ........................................................... 46
Using an anchor bracket..........................55
Child safety
Airbag precautions...................................... 34
Battery precautions......................385, 442
Child restraint system................................. 46
Heated steering wheel and seat heater
precautions................................................326
How your child should wear the seat belt
............................................................................ 25
Moon roof precautions ............................143
Panoramic moon roof precautions....147
Power window lock switch.......................141
Power window precautions.................. 140
Rear door child-protectors.....................99
Removed electronic key battery precau-
tions...............................................................404
Seat belt extender precautions ............. 25
Seat belt precautions..................................45
Trunk precautions.......................................100
Child-protectors............................................. 99
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ......................................362
Exterior............................................................362
Interior ............................................................ 365
Radar sensor..............................190, 191, 197
Seat belts....................................................... 365
Clock ................................................69, 72, 344
Clock light ......................................................330
Coat hooks.....................................................343
Coin holder....................................................336
Condenser .....................................................382
Console box .................................................. 337
Consumption screen .................................... 87
Cooling system.............................................. 381
Engine overheating...................................443
Cornering lights............................................. 177
Cruise control
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................... 238, 241
Cup holders...................................................336
Current fuel consumption .......................... 78
Curtain shield airbags .................................. 29
Customizable features..............................468
D
Daytime running light system...................175
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors.......................314
Rear window..................................................314
Windshield......................................................314
Differential
Front differential oil....................................452
Rear differential oil.....................................453
Dimension ......................................................448
Dinghy towing.................................................159
Display
Center Display........................................... 306
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................................241
Head-up display............................................83
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Intuitive parking assist.............................. 257
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)................. 234
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist)................... 225
Multi-information display.......................... 76
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians) ..............................................286
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)........268
RCTA ..............................................................264
Warning message.....................................428
Distance until next engine oil
change ..................................................... 70, 75
Do-it-yourself maintenance....................369
Door courtesy lights...................................330
Door lock
Doors..................................................................96
Smart access system with push-button
start..................................................................107
Wireless remote control........................... 94
Doors
Automatic door locking and unlocking
system ...........................................................100
Door closer .....................................................99
Door glasses..................................................139
Door lock..........................................................96
Open door warning buzzer .......... 97, 99
Outside rear view mirrors ......................137
Rear door child-protectors.....................99
Drive distance.................................................. 78
Drive info 1/Drive info 2 .............................. 78
Driver’s seat position memory
Driving position memory......................... 127
Memory recall function ........................... 130
Power easy access system..................... 127
Drive-start control .........................................151
Driving
Break-in tips.................................................... 151
Correct driving posture.............................23
Driving mode select switch..................289
Procedures.................................................... 150
Winter drive tips.........................................299
Driving information display ........................ 78
Driving position memory............................127
Memory recall function............................130
Power easy access system .....................127
Driving range ................................................... 78
Driving support system information display
...............................................................................81
DRS (Dynamic Rear Steering) .............. 294
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range..............................238, 241
Warning message.................................... 250
Dynamic Rear Steering (DRS) .............. 294
E
ECB (Electronically Controlled Brake Sys-
tem) ................................................................ 294
Eco Driving Indicator............................ 79, 87
Eco Driving Indicator Light.........................79
EDR (Event data recorder)............................7
Elapsed time ..................................................... 78
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .............. 294
Warning light .................................................421
Electronic key .................................................. 92
Battery-saving function............................108
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.......................................................436
Replacing the battery.............................. 403
Electronic roof sunshade
Jam protection function........................... 146
Operation........................................................144
Electronically Controlled Brake System
(ECB) ............................................................ 294
Electronically modulated air suspension
............................................................................291
Emergency flashers..................................... 410
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer sounds.................... 418
If a warning light turns on........................ 418
If a warning message is displayed.....428
If the battery is discharged................... 438
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.......................................................436
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
500
Alphabetical Index
If the engine will not start .......................433
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
.........................................................................435
If you have a flat tire.................................. 432
If you lose your keys.................................435
If you think something is wrong ...........416
If your vehicle becomes stuck.............446
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ................................................. 410
If your vehicle needs to be towed.......412
If your vehicle overheats........................443
Engine
ACCESSORY mode ...............................162
Compartment ..............................................377
Engine compartment cover.................378
Engine switch................................................ 160
Fuel pump shut off system ......................417
Hood................................................................375
How to start the engine........................... 160
Identification number...............................449
If the engine will not start .......................433
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency ................................................. 410
Ignition switch (engine switch) ............ 160
Overheating.................................................443
Tachometer .............................................69, 72
Engine compartment cover.................... 378
Engine coolant
Capacity...........................................................451
Checking ........................................................ 381
Preparing and checking before winter
.........................................................................299
Engine coolant temperature gauge 69, 72
Engine immobilizer system ........................58
Engine oil
Capacity.........................................................450
Checking .......................................................379
Preparing and checking before winter
.........................................................................299
Warning light.................................................419
Engine oil maintenance data ................... 381
Engine switch ................................................. 160
Auto power off function............................162
Changing the engine switch modes..162
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency.................................................. 410
EPS (Electric Power Steering) .............. 294
Warning light .................................................421
Event data recorder (EDR)............................7
F
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)...........218
First-aid kit storage belt ............................340
Flat tire
Tire pressure warning system ............388
Floor mats...........................................................22
Fluid
Automatic transmission..........................452
Brake................................................................453
Washer .......................................................... 383
Footwell light .................................................330
Front air conditioning system...................313
Front Cross Traffic Alert (FCTA)...........218
Front passenger occupant classification
system .............................................................. 40
Front seats
Adjustment.......................................................116
Cleaning........................................................ 365
Correct driving posture ............................ 23
Driving position memory.........................127
Head restraints..............................................132
Memory recall function............................130
Power easy access system .....................127
Refresh system............................................... 121
Seat heaters..................................................326
Seat position memory ...............................127
Seat ventilators............................................326
Front side marker light
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Turn signal lever .......................................... 169
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Fuel
Capacity.........................................................449
Fuel gauge ...............................................69, 72
Fuel pump shut off system ......................417
Information....................................................457
Refueling ......................................................... 185
Type..................................................................449
Warning light.................................................421
Fuel consumption
Average fuel economy.............................. 78
Current fuel consumption........................ 78
Fuel filler door
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
.........................................................................435
Refueling ......................................................... 185
Fuel gauge................................................. 69, 72
Fuel pump shut off system..........................417
Fuses.................................................................405
G
Garage door opener................................. 349
Gauges....................................................... 69, 72
Gear Position...................................................80
G-force...............................................................80
Glove box.......................................................335
Glove box light.............................................336
H
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid .................. 103
Head restraints...............................................132
Headlights
Adaptive Front-lighting System (AFS)
........................................................................... 177
Automatic High Beam system..............178
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs............................... 408
Head-up display..............................................83
Driving information display area...........83
Driving support system display area..86
Eco Driving Indicator ................................. 87
HUD (Head-up display) switch............85
Navigation system-linked display ........83
Pop-up display...............................................86
Settings...............................................................85
Heated steering wheel.............................. 326
Heaters
Front air conditioning system ............... 313
Heated steering wheel............................326
Outside rear view mirrors.......................314
Rear air conditioning system ...............323
Seat heaters..................................................326
Height control
Electronically modulated air suspension
..........................................................................292
Hill-start assist control............................... 294
Hood
Open................................................................375
Pop Up Hood.................................................38
Hooks
Coat hooks ...................................................343
Retaining hooks (floor mat)..................... 22
Horn....................................................................135
HUD (Head-up display) switch................85
I
I/M test ............................................................ 372
Identification
Engine..............................................................449
Vehicle ........................................................... 448
Ignition switch (engine switch)................ 160
Auto power off function............................162
Changing the engine switch modes..162
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency.................................................. 410
Indicators ........................................................... 66
Initialization
Items to initialize .........................................482
Maintenance......................................368, 381
Power windows........................................... 139
Tire pressure warning system .............392
Inside door handle lights...........................330
Inside rear view mirror................................136
Instrument panel light control .............71, 75
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
502
Alphabetical Index
Intercooler......................................................382
Intercooler coolant
Capacity...........................................................451
Checking ........................................................ 381
Interior lights..................................................330
Front interior light......................................330
Rear interior light .......................................330
Intuitive parking assist.....................256, 257
Function.......................................................... 257
Warning message.....................................260
J
Jack
Positioning a floor jack............................375
Jam protection function
Electronic roof sunshade.........................146
Moon roof.......................................................142
Panoramic moon roof...............................146
Power trunk opener and closer.......... 105
Power windows............................................139
Rear door sunshade ................................346
K
Keyless entry
Smart access system with push-button
start..................................................................107
Wireless remote control........................... 94
Keys
Battery-saving function ...........................108
Electronic key................................................. 92
Engine switch................................................ 160
If the electronic key does not operate
properly.......................................................436
If you lose your keys.................................435
Key number plate......................................... 92
Keyless entry.........................................96, 107
Mechanical key.............................................. 92
Replacing the battery...............................403
Warning buzzer...........................................107
Wireless remote control........................... 94
Knee airbags .................................................... 29
L
Lane Tracing Assist (LTA)
Operation........................................................221
Warning messages...................................229
Lane-Keeping Assist (LKA)
Operation........................................................231
Warning messages...................................237
Language (multi-information display) .....81
LATCH anchors ............................................. 53
LDH (Lexus Dynamic Handling system)
..........................................................................295
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.................................375
Hood lock release lever.........................375
Internal trunk release lever.....................105
Shift lever......................................................... 163
Turn signal lever .......................................... 169
Wiper lever....................................................180
Lexus climate concierge .............................311
Lexus Dynamic Handling system (LDH)
..........................................................................295
Lexus Enform Safety Connect...............355
Lexus Safety System+
Automatic High Beam............................. 178
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................... 238, 241
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)...................231
PCS (Pre-Collision System)................. 210
RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................238
Lexus Safety System+A..............................187
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................... 238, 241
FCTA (Front Cross Traffic Alert)....... 218
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......................221
PCS (Pre-Collision System)............... 200
RSA (Road Sign Assist)..........................238
License plate lights
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Light bulbs
Replacing...................................................... 408
Lights
Automatic High Beam system..............178
Front interior lights......................................331
Front personal lights................................. 332
Headlight switch ..........................................175
Interior lights.................................................330
Interior lights list..........................................330
Rear interior lights.......................................331
Rear personal lights.................................. 332
Replacing light bulbs............................... 408
Trunk lid light................................................. 104
Trunk light....................................................... 104
Turn signal lever...........................................169
Vanity lights..................................................345
Welcome light illumination control....176
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)
Operation........................................................231
Warning messages .................................. 237
Lock steering column................................. 160
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)
Operation........................................................221
Warning messages .................................. 229
Luggage mats ...............................................339
M
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ................. 373
General maintenance.............................369
Maintenance data......................................448
Maintenance requirements ..................368
Malfunction indicator lamp .......................419
Master warning light .................................. 425
Menu icons.........................................................77
Meter
Changing the main meter location ..... 76
Clock ..........................................................69, 72
Indicators ..........................................................66
Instrument panel light control ..........71, 75
Meter control switches...............................77
Meters ........................................................69, 72
Multi-information display..........................76
Settings................................................................ 81
Units.................................................................... 80
Warning lights.............................................. 418
Warning message.....................................428
Micro dust and pollen filter .......................319
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror............................. 136
Outside rear view mirror defoggers .314
Outside rear view mirrors.......................137
Vanity mirrors..............................................345
Moon roof
Door lock linked moon roof operation
................................................................. 142, 146
Jam protection function............................142
Operation........................................................142
Multi-information display.............................76
Audio system-linked display.................... 81
Boost gauge....................................................79
Drive information 1/Drive information 2
.............................................................................78
Driving information display......................78
Driving support system information dis-
play..................................................................... 81
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range........................................241
Eco Driving Indicator..................................79
Gear Position ................................................ 80
G-force............................................................. 80
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist).................234
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) ...................225
Menu icons .......................................................77
Meter control switches ...............................77
Navigation system-linked display ......... 81
Pop-up display...............................................76
Settings................................................................ 81
Suggestion function.....................................82
Tire pressure ...............................................388
Units.................................................................... 80
Vehicle sway warning ............................... 80
Warning message.....................................428
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
504
Alphabetical Index
N
Navigation system-linked display.....81, 83
Noise from under vehicle ...............................6
O
“ODO TRIP” switch .............................. 70, 75
Odometer ................................................. 70, 75
Odometer and trip meter display
Display items.......................................... 70, 75
“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 70, 75
Pop-up display.........................................71, 75
Oil
Engine oil .......................................................450
Front differential oil ...................................452
Rear differential oil ....................................453
Opener
Fuel filler door............................................... 185
Hood................................................................375
Trunk..................................................................102
Outer foot lights
Location..........................................................330
Outside door handle lights......................330
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjustment......................................................137
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor) ...................251
Folding ............................................................. 138
Linked mirror function when reversing
...........................................................................137
Mirror position memory........................... 127
Outside rear view mirror defoggers.314
RCTA function............................................264
Outside temperature............................ 69, 72
Overheating.................................................. 443
P
Paddle shift switches..........................167, 168
Panic mode ....................................................... 94
Panoramic moon roof
Jam protection function............................146
Operation........................................................144
Parking assist sensors (intuitive parking
assist)............................................................. 257
Parking brake
Operation....................................................... 170
Parking brake engaged warning buzzer
............................................................................172
Warning light ...............................................425
Warning message.......................................172
Parking lights
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Parking Support Brake function (for
rear-crossing vehicles) ..........................282
Function..........................................................282
Parking Support Brake function (rear
pedestrians)...................................... 271, 286
Function......................................................... 286
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)...........................271
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects)................................................ 271, 277
Function.......................................................... 277
PCS (Pre-Collision System)
Function...............................................200, 210
PCS OFF switch............................. 203, 213
Warning light ...............................................424
Warning message............................ 210, 217
Personal lights...............................................330
PKSA (Parking Support Alert).............. 256
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)...............271
Warning message.....................................275
Pop Up Hood...................................................38
Power easy access system ........................127
Power outlets ................................................ 344
Power rear seat..............................................123
Power steering (Electric power steering
system).......................................................... 294
Warning light .................................................421
Power trunk opener and closer ..............102
Power windows
Door lock linked window operation. 140
Jam protection function........................... 139
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Operation........................................................139
Window lock switch ....................................141
Pre-Collision System (PCS)
Function...............................................200, 210
PCS OFF switch..............................203, 213
Warning light............................................... 424
Warning message.............................210, 217
R
Radar cruise control (dynamic radar cruise
control with full-speed range)... 238, 241
Radiator...........................................................382
RCD (Rear camera detection).............. 256
Warning message.....................................269
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)
Function..........................................................268
RCTA
Function..........................................................264
Warning message.....................................265
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ......... 256
RCTA function ............................................. 265
Rear air conditioning system.................. 323
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ......... 264
Rear door sunshades................................. 346
Rear Multi Operation Panel...................308
Rear seat position memory ........................131
Rear seats .........................................................123
Adjustment......................................................123
Head restraints .............................................132
Rear seat position memory ..................... 131
Relaxation system........................................126
Seat heaters..................................................326
Seat ventilators............................................326
Rear side marker lights
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs............................... 408
Rear sunshades ............................................ 347
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............................... 408
Turn signal lever...........................................169
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror..............................136
Outside rear view mirrors.......................137
Rear window defogger ...............................314
Refueling
Capacity .........................................................449
Fuel types.......................................................449
If the fuel filler door cannot be opened
..........................................................................435
Opening the fuel tank cap .....................185
Remote Touch ..............................................304
Replacing
Electronic key battery............................. 403
Fuses................................................................ 405
Light bulbs....................................................408
Tires ................................................................. 396
Resetting the message indicating mainte-
nance is required......................................368
Rev indicator .....................................................74
Rev peak..............................................................74
Road Sign Assist ..........................................238
RSA (Road Sign Assist) ............................238
Run-flat tires....................................... 388, 432
S
Seat belt buckle lights................................330
Seat belt reminder light....................421, 422
Seat belts............................................................ 24
Automatic Locking Retractor.................26
Child restraint system installation.........46
Cleaning and maintaining the seat belt
......................................................................... 365
Easy Access Buckle ....................................26
Emergency Locking Retractor..............26
How to wear your seat belt.....................25
How your child should wear the seat belt
.............................................................................25
Pregnant women, proper seat belt use
............................................................................. 24
Reminder light and buzzer .........421, 422
Seat belt extender.........................................25
SRS warning light........................................ 419
Seat heaters................................................... 326
Seat position memory......................... 127, 131
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
506
Alphabetical Index
Seat ventilators............................................. 326
Seating capacity............................................ 158
Seats
Adjustment.............................................116, 123
Adjustment precautions............................ 116
Child seats/child restraint system installa-
tion....................................................................45
Cleaning.........................................................365
Driving position memory......................... 127
Front seat refresh system...........................121
Head restraints .............................................132
Power easy access system..................... 127
Properly sitting in the seat.........................23
Rear seat relaxation system....................126
Seat heaters..................................................326
Seat position memory .......................127, 131
Seat ventilators............................................326
Secondary Collision Brake ..................... 294
Sensor
Automatic headlight system...................175
Automatic High Beam system..............178
Inside rear view mirror..............................136
Intuitive parking assist.............................. 257
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)...................231
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist)......................221
Parking Support Brake function
(rear-crossing vehicles)......................282
Parking Support Brake function (static
objects)........................................................278
Radar sensor.......................... 188, 195, 252
Rain-sensing windshield wipers............181
RCTA ..............................................................265
Service reminder message .....................368
Shift lever
Automatic transmission............................163
Shift lever light ..............................................330
Shopping bag hooks ..................................339
Side airbags ...................................................... 29
Side marker lights
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs............................... 408
Side mirrors
Adjustment......................................................137
BSM (Blind Sport Monitor)................... 251
Folding..............................................................138
Linked mirror function when reversing
............................................................................137
Mirror position memory...........................127
RCTA function............................................264
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Turn signal lever .......................................... 169
Side windows ..................................................139
Smart access system with push-button start
Antenna location......................................... 107
Entry functions................................................96
Starting the engine .....................................160
Snow mode ......................................................167
Snow tires ....................................................... 299
Spark plug ........................................................451
Specifications................................................448
Speedometer ........................................... 69, 72
Steering lock
Column lock release.................................160
Steering lock system warning message
...........................................................................160
Steering wheel
Adjustment..................................................... 135
Heated steering wheel............................326
Meter control switches ...............................77
Power easy access system .....................127
Steering wheel position memory.........127
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Storage features ..........................................334
Stuck
If the vehicle becomes stuck................446
Suggestion function....................................... 82
Sun visors........................................................345
Sunshade
Roof.....................................................................142
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Switches
Activating the Automatic High Beam178
Automatic High Beam system..............178
Brake Hold switch ......................................173
Door lock switches......................................98
Driving mode select switch..................289
Driving position memory switches..... 127
Dynamic radar cruise control with
full-speed range switch....................... 242
Electronic roof sunshade switches.....144
Emergency flashers switch.................... 410
Engine switch................................................ 160
Garage door opener switches ..........349
Heated steering wheel switch.............326
HUD (Head-up display) switch............85
Ignition switch............................................... 160
Instrument panel light control switches71,
Intuitive parking assist switch...............258
Light switches................................................175
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist) switch.. 233
LTA (Lane-Tracing Assist) switch.... 225
Meter control switches...............................77
Moon roof switches ...................................142
“ODO TRIP” switch........................... 70, 75
Outside rear view mirror switches.....137
Paddle shift switches.......................167, 168
Panoramic moon roof switches...........144
Parking brake switch .................................170
PCS OFF switch..............................203, 213
PKSB (Parking Support Brake) switch
..........................................................................272
Power door lock switch............................98
Power window switches..........................139
RCD (Rear camera detection) switch
.........................................................................268
RCTA switch................................................264
Rear door sunshade switch..................346
Rear seat heater ......................................... 324
Rear seat position memory switches.. 131
Rear seat ventilator................................... 324
Rear sunshades switch ........................... 347
Rear window and outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers switch ............................. 313
Seat heater switches.................................326
Seat ventilator switches ..........................326
Snow mode switch......................................167
“SOS” button............................................... 355
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
........................................................................... 135
Tire pressure warning reset switch...392
Trunk closer switch.................................... 104
Trunk opener main switch......................106
Trunk opener switch ................................. 102
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch...242
VSC OFF switch .......................................295
Window lock switch.................................... 141
Windshield wiper and washer switch180
Windshield wiper de-icer switch.........317
T
Tachometer............................................... 69, 72
Rev indicator ................................................... 74
Rev peak............................................................ 74
Tail lights
Light switch.....................................................175
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...................................................................60
Engine immobilizer system......................58
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data......................................454
Tire inflation pressure display function
.........................................................................388
Warning light ...............................................422
Tire information............................................459
Glossary.........................................................462
Size................................................................... 460
Tire identification number..................... 460
Uniform Tire Quality Grading............. 461
Tire pressure display..................................388
Tire pressure warning system
Function.........................................................388
Initializing........................................................392
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
508
Alphabetical Index
Installing tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters ......................................392
Registering ID codes...............................394
Warning light............................................... 422
Tires
Chains............................................................ 300
Checking .......................................................386
If you have a flat tire.................................. 432
Inflation pressure........................................399
Information....................................................459
Replacing.......................................................396
Rotating tires............................................... 388
Run-flat tires .................................... 388, 432
Size....................................................................454
Snow tires......................................................299
Tire inflation pressure display function
........................................................................ 388
Tire pressure warning system............ 388
Warning light............................................... 422
Top tether strap............................................... 55
Total load capacity......................................448
Towing
Dinghy towing.............................................. 159
Emergency towing .....................................412
Towing eyelet ................................................415
Trailer towing................................................ 159
TRAC (Traction Control) ........................ 294
Traction Control (TRAC) ........................ 294
Trailer towing ..................................................159
Transmission
Automatic transmission............................163
Driving mode select switch..................289
M mode........................................................... 168
Paddle shift switches.......................167, 168
Snow mode ....................................................167
Trip meters ................................................ 70, 75
Trunk.................................................................. 100
Hands Free Power Trunk Lid .............. 103
Internal trunk release lever .................... 105
Power trunk opener and closer...........102
Smart access system with push-button
start................................................................. 103
Trunk closer switch.................................... 104
Trunk easy closer........................................ 104
Trunk features..............................................339
Trunk grip ....................................................... 104
Trunk lid light................................................. 104
Trunk light....................................................... 104
Trunk opener main switch......................106
Trunk opener switch ................................. 102
Wireless remote control.........................103
Trunk lid light.................................................. 104
Trunk light........................................................ 104
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs...............................408
Turn signal lever .......................................... 169
U
USB charging ports.................................... 342
V
Vanity lights....................................................345
Vanity mirrors ...............................................345
Variable Gear Ratio Steering (VGRS)294
VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Man-
agement)......................................................295
Vehicle data recordings..................................6
Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Manage-
ment (VDIM)..............................................295
Vehicle identification number................448
Vehicle Stability Control (VSC) ........... 294
Vehicle sway warning display ...................80
Ventilators (seat ventilators)................... 326
VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)294
VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ........... 294
W
Warning buzzers
ABS...................................................................420
Airbags............................................................. 419
Approach warning.................................... 247
Brake hold.....................................................425
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
Brake Override System.........................420
Brake system ................................................ 418
Charging system .........................................419
Downshifting.......................................168, 169
Drive-Start Control ..................................420
Electric power steering ............................421
Engine ...............................................................419
High coolant temperature ..................... 418
Intuitive parking assist..................263, 423
LKA (Lane-Keeping Assist)....... 231, 422
Low engine oil pressure...........................419
LTA (Lane Tracing Assist).......... 221, 422
Open door.............................................. 97, 99
Open window.............................................. 140
PKSA (Parking Support Alert)........... 257
PKSB (Parking Support Brake)......... 424
Pop Up Hood .............................................420
Pre-collision braking......................200, 212
RCD (Rear Camera Detection)........ 423
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)...... 423
Seat belt................................................ 421, 422
Warning lights................................................ 418
ABS ..................................................................420
Brake hold operated indicator ...........425
Brake Override System.........................420
Brake system ................................................ 418
Charging system .........................................419
Drive-Start Control ..................................420
Electric power steering ............................421
High coolant temperature ..................... 418
Intuitive parking assist OFF indicator423
LKA indicator .............................................. 422
Low engine oil pressure...........................419
Low fuel level.................................................421
LTA indicator............................................... 422
Malfunction indicator lamp.....................419
Master warning light ................................425
Parking brake indicator..........................425
PKSB OFF indicator................................ 424
Pop Up Hood .............................................420
Pre-collision system ................................. 424
RCD OFF indicator ................................. 423
RCTA OFF indicator...............................423
Seat belt reminder light.................421, 422
Slip indicator.................................................424
SRS..................................................................... 419
Tire pressure ................................................422
Warning messages.....................................428
Warning reflector storage belt..............340
Washer
Checking ...................................................... 383
Preparing and checking before winter
..........................................................................299
Switch................................................................180
Washing and waxing.................................. 362
Weight
Cargo capacity............................................158
Load limits ......................................................158
Weight............................................................ 448
Wheels
Replacing wheels...................................... 396
Size....................................................................454
Window lock switch ...................................... 141
Windows
Power windows........................................... 139
Rear window defogger.............................314
Washer ............................................................180
Windshield wiper de-icer ..........................319
Windshield wipers
Position.............................................................183
Rain-sensing windshield wipers..........180
Winter driving tips....................................... 299
Wireless remote control
Battery-Saving Function..........................108
Locking/Unlocking .....................................94
Replacing the battery.............................. 403
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
510
Alphabetical Index
?
For information regarding the equipment listed below, refer to the “NAVIGATION AND MULTI-
MEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S
MANUAL”.
· Navigation system
· Audio/visual system
· Rear seat entertainment system
· Lexus parking assist monitor
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
512
GAS STATION INFORMATION
C
D
A
B
E
F
Auxiliary catch lever (
Trunk opener ( →
Fuel filler door opener ( →
Fuel filler door (
Hood lock release lever (
Tire inflation pressure (
Fuel tank capacity (Reference)
21.7 gal. (82.0 L, 18.0 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type
Cold tire inflation pressure
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill ⎯ reference)
Engine oil type
Unleaded gasoline only
LS500_OM_OM50F54U_(U)
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement